Manual

mz-24 Pro
12 channel HoTT 2.4 GHz transmitter
No. S1006.PRO

Copyright © Graupner/SJ GmbH

Part 2
Programming manual
Table of Contents
General Operating Instructions
Before Use ................................................................. 3
Warning Symbols and Their Meaning.......................... 3
Transmitter Start Up .................................................. 4
Display Operation ................................................. 6
Warnings .............................................................. 8
DSC Port............................................................. 10
Data Port ............................................................ 10
Audio Port .......................................................... 11
Card Slot ............................................................ 11
Micro-USB Connection ...................................... 12
Receiver Start Up .................................................... 14
Installation Notices .................................................. 16
Safety and Handling
Instructions for Lithium Batteries....................... 22
Definition of Terms ................................................... 24
Control and Switch Assignment............................... 26
Receiver Configuration
Vehicles, Boats and Drones................................ 30
Helicopter Models............................................... 31
Fixed-wing Models.............................................. 32
Program Description
Program Description ............................................... 34
Base Menu
Model Sel - Model Selection................................... 38
HoTT Synchronization Methods Setting............. 39
Model Name........................................................ 42
New Model Basic Settings - Manual................... 42
New Model Basic Settings - Wizard.................... 44
Model Type ............................................................. 60
E.P.A ........................................................................ 62
2 Index
REV/SUB ................................................................ 64
THR.CUT / Motor - Throttle Cut / Motor Off .......... 66
TX ctl - Transmitter Setting ..................................... 68
Timer ....................................................................... 74
Fail Safe .................................................................. 80
Trim Step - Trim Settings ........................................ 82
Servo - Servo Monitor ............................................. 86
CTL Set - Control/Switch Setting............................ 90
Throttle Limit Function ....................................... 94
Out.Swap - Transmitter Output............................... 96
Telemetry ................................................................ 98
Announce - User Voice Recordings...................... 118
Function Menu
Phase .................................................................... 120
D/R,EXP ................................................................ 124
THR.CRV .............................................................. 128
Mixer - Basic Functions ........................................ 132
Programmable Mixers - General Information......... 133
Prog.MIX - Programmable Mixer........................... 134
Trainer ................................................................... 141
Connecting Scheme ......................................... 144
Wireless HoTT System ..................................... 145
Logical sw - Logical Switch.................................. 148
Sequence - Sequencer.......................................... 150
Phase .................................................................... 120
D/R,EXP ................................................................ 124
PIT.CRV - Pitch Curve ........................................... 154
THR.CRV - Throttle Curve .................................... 160
Gyr/Gover - Gyro/Governor .................................. 166
THR.HOLD ............................................................ 170
Swash - Swashplate Mixer ................................... 172
S.Limit - Swashplate Limiter ................................. 173
S.MIX - Heli Mixer ................................................. 174
THR.MIX - Throttle mixer ...................................... 176
Mixer - Basic Functions ........................................ 132
Programmable Mixers - General Information......... 133
Prog.MIX - Programmable Mixer........................... 134
Trainer ................................................................... 141
Connecting Scheme ......................................... 144
Wireless HoTT System ..................................... 145
PIT>>TAIL ............................................................. 178
Logical sw - Logical Switch.................................. 148
Sequence - Sequencer.......................................... 150
Phase .................................................................... 120
D/R,EXP ................................................................ 124
THR.CRV .............................................................. 128
Idle LOW ............................................................... 180
Mixer - Basic Functions ........................................ 132
Programmable Mixers - General Information......... 133
Prog.MIX - Programmable Mixer........................... 134
Snap roll ............................................................... 181
Aile diff - AILE Differentiation (Motor Airplane)...... 182
Aile diff - AILE Differentiation (Glider).................... 184
Wing MIX - Wing Mixer.......................................... 188
Flap MIX - Flap Mixer ........................................... 192
Flap Set ................................................................. 196
Airbrake ................................................................ 200
Butterfly ................................................................ 202
Trainer ................................................................... 141
Connecting Scheme ......................................... 144
Wireless HoTT System ..................................... 145
Logical sw - Logical Switch.................................. 148
Sequence - Sequencer.......................................... 150
V-Tail ..................................................................... 206
System Menu
ST mode - Control Mode ...................................... 208
Warning ................................................................ 210
Etc. Set ................................................................. 212
Display .................................................................. 216
Stick Cali - Stick Calibration ................................ 220
MP3 - MP3 Player ................................................. 222
Telemetry
Telemetry Data Display .......................................... 225
Programming Examples
Phase Specific Flaps Trimming.............................. 230
Phase Specific Pitch Trimming............................... 232
Phase Specific Trimming
"RPM Setting"........................................................ 233
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................... 234
Before Use
Thank you very much for purchasing the Graupner
mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter.
This transmitter comes with two manuals: Part 1 is a
quick-start guide included in the transmitter’s pack-
aging. Part 2 is a programming manual providing
in-depth details about the advanced functions of the
mz-24 PRO. Both manuals are available for down-
load at www.graupnerusa.com.
Carefully read both manuals for all safety precautions
and for information on optimal transmitter and model
use. If you experience any trouble during operation,
ask experienced modelers, your dealer or contact the
Graupner Service Center.
For ease-of-use in locating specific information, cer-
tain sections in this manual are marked with the same
model type symbols used in the transmitter display
menus. Icons will be highlighted blue when pertaining
to the model it represents; icons will be grayed out if
the information is irrelevant to that model. Refer to
the highlighted icons for information related to your
model type:
Warning Symbols and Their Meaning
Always observe the information indicated by
! this warning icon, particularly those which
are additionally marked with the following
signal words:
WARNING indicates the potential for serious
injury.
CAUTION indicates possibility of lighter in-
juries.
This icon indicates information that may be
helpful in diagnosing or troubleshooting, es-
pecially when accompanied by the following
signal words:
Note indicates potential malfunctions.
Attention indicates potential damages to
objects.
This symbol indicates instructions on the
P care and maintenance of the device. Follow-
ing these instructions will help the device re-
main in good functioning condition.
Before use 3
Transmitter Start Up

Preliminary Remarks The green "TX" and white "RX" to the left and right
The Graupner-HoTT system allows more than 200 When the transmitter is turned on the RF module will of this switch symbol indicate that an active model
models or remote-control systems to be operated at display the message: memory had once been linked to a Graupner-HoTT
the same time, though in practice this number will be Warning
receiver but is currently not detected.
significantly less since permits are required for com- Thr.HOLD Thr.CUT
Once this link is established, the field strength display
bined remote operation within the 2.4 GHz ISM band. appears to the left of the green "TX" and to the right
Thr.POS PHASE
Ultimately, however, the only thing limiting pilots is the of the white "RX", and a numeric display underneath
Normal signal Fail Safe not set
size of the flying field. shows the current voltage of the receiver power sup-
Please select RF ON/OFF
ply. For example:
Battery Charged? ON OFF 000% 000%

The battery delivered with the transmitter is only par- TX RX

Audible warning signals will sound for a few seconds. 4.2V
tially charged. Charge it according to the charge in- RX 05.5V
000:00.0
Either wait a few seconds until the display automati- 000 000
structions in Part 1 of the manual. If not fully charged,
cally disappears or press the  ON  or  OFF  button to 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
a warning signal will sound once the voltage drops
initiate or turn off the RF transmission.
below a certain threshold. To change the voltage set- M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
ting, adjust the value in the "Batt warning" line in the MODEL NAME 1

SYSTEM submenu Etc.Set (page 212). The basic display menu of the mz-24 HoTT Pro trans- BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
mitter now appears:
BACK CLR AUTO LOAD OFF 000% 000%
If the transmitter is turned on while the RF transmis-
TX VOLT 04 RX VOLT 00 TX RX
sion is off, none of this information is displayed, and
4.2V
3.5V 4.9V RX 00.0V
the RF switch symbol is gray:
STRENGTH ALARM
000 000 000:00.0 000% 000%
STRENGTH 00
000% OFF 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 4.2V

ESC CUR 00 ESC VOLT 00

M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 000 000 000:00.0
000.0A 00.0V MODELLNAME 1
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 M-1 000 000

Transmitter Startup PHASE 1

Icon symbols are either active (highlighted blue) or in- MODELLNAME 1
Whenever the transmitter is switched on, the servo active (grayed out). The RF switch symbol is located BATT TIME 00: 01: 23

outputs on channels 1 through 12 are checked. For

safety reasons, the RF module will remain off to avoid
accidental motor starts if the impulse is outside a
pre-selected bandwidth for idling.
000 000
at the top left corner of the display. In this example
If the transmitter is turned on and no receiver or model
the symbol appears blue and is positioned between
memory is linked, the following warning appears:
the green "TX" and the white "RX", meaning that the
RF transmission of the transmitter is on. Warning

Thr.HOLD Thr.CUT

Thr.POS PHASE

Fail Safe not set

No receiver bound to TX

SET

4 Starting up the transmitter

Press the  SET  button to pull up the BASE submenu • When training, linking or adjusting the remote CAUTION
TX ctl: control, make sure that the transmitter an- Never turn off the transmitter while oper-
BACK
RX1
TX ctl

RX2
tenna is always far enough from the receiv-
er antennas. If the transmitter antenna is too ! ating the model! If this happens, wait three
seconds for the display to go dark, then
close to the receiver antennas, the receiver turn the transmitter on again. The transmitter may
BIND ON/OFF OFF OFF
will overdrive, and the red LED on the receiv- freeze if turned on before the screen goes dark. If
TX OUT SET SET SET
er will shine to indicate that no signal is be- a transmitter is turned off during flight, wait three
RF ON/OFF OFF RF TYPE NORMAL
ing received. At the same time, the feedback seconds until the display screen goes dark, then
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
channel will stop working, the field strength turn on the transmitter. Transmitter may freeze if
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
bar in the transmitter display will disappear, turned on before the display screen goes dark,
Bind the receiver by pressing the buttons in the BIND and the current receiver battery voltage will be and models may become uncontrollable.
ON/OFF line, or press the  BACK  button at the top displayed as 0.0 V. In this moment the trans-
left of the display to exit and return to the basic dis- mitter is in Fail Safe Mode (page 80). When
play menu. in Fail Safe Mode, during reception loss, the
servos remain in the last known positions or
Tip will move to preset Fail-Safe positions and
Refer to the Model Name section (page 42) for addi- remain until signal re-established. When this
tional instructions on how to bind the receiver using the happens, move the two antennas apart until
Setup Wizard and program a new model memory. the displays return to normal.

Notices
• With the mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter it is
possible to control up to 12 functions. Any
servos which are connected to connections
13 and higher remain in their default center
position and cannot be actuated by the trans-
mitter.
• For maximum flexibility, and to prevent unin-
tentional misuse, control channels 5-12 are
not initially assigned to any control elements,
and the servos linked to these channels re-
main in their center positions until an operat-
ing element has been assigned. For the same
reason, nearly all mixers are inactive. Refer to
Control/Switch Setting (page 90) for infor-
mation on how to change these settings.

Starting up the transmitter 5

Display Operation

Operate the display by pressing value fields or icons To access the BASE, FUNCTION, SYSTEM and TE- The FUNCTION Helicopter menu selection display
with a finger or the provided stylus: LEMETRY menu screens, press one of the four gear appears as follows:
000% 000% icons along the bottom of the basic display: the green
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
4.2V "B", the blue "F", the purple "S" or the blue "T". Se-
000:00.0 lection menus open from which you can choose relat-
000 000
ed submenus. Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 The BASE submenu selection display  (page 38) ap- THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX

MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
pears as follows:
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
000 000

The main menu display has shortcuts and icons that BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
easily take users to desired menus or information dis- The Fixed-Wing models are further divided into two
plays. For example, pressing the model memory field additional screens. The FUNCTION Motor-Powered
labeled  M-1  in the above display is a shortcut to the Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
menu selection display appears as follows:
BASE submenu Model Sel:
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX

02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M The FUNCTION submenu selection display (page Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set

05 MODEL NAME 5 RES 120) is model-type-specific, and the icons shown will
change depending on which model is being used.
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
The submenus are divided into three types: Vehicles/
Many menus and submenus have additional display Drones/Boats, Helicopters, Fixed-Wing. Refer to And the FUNCTION Glider menu selection display
screens or pop-up menus that can be accessed by the Table of Contents for information on type-specif- appears as follows:
pressing the buttons. For example, in the above ic functionalities, as the manual divides the Function
screen, highlighting a model name line number and menu into thirds according to model differences.
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

pressing  SEL brings up a pop-up menu for chang-

ing the model saved in that memory line. Conversely,
The FUNCTION Vehicle/Drone/Boat menu selection Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Snap roll
pressing   NEW brings up a pop-up menu allowing
display appears as follows:
the user to manually setup model names or use the Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Butterfly

setup Wizard. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Trainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

Pressing  YES  or  NO  will accept or cancel pop-up Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
selections.
Logical sw Sequence

Pressing  BACK   returns users to the previous menu

screen. Pressing  NEXT  advances users to the next
option screen.
6 Operating the displays
The SYSTEM menu selection display appears as fol- The TELEMETRY display had no submenu selection.
lows: The screen can differ depending on system settings.
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
If the Outdoor disp option of the SYSTEM submenu
Display is turned  OFF , the TELEMETRY menu se-
ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display lection display appears as follows:
BACK NEXT R - 58dB T - 52dB
Stick Cali MP3
3.0 3.0

VOLT L-VOLT
5.2V 5.0V
This menu is transmitter-specific and the submenus 0
25
6.0 0 6.0

Q 100%
are applicable to all models. However, the Warning
S 075%
menu options will vary slightly according to certain TEMP
+26°C L 0020ms
model settings. -20 70

If the Outdoor disp option of the SYSTEM submenu

Display is turned  ON , the TELEMETRY menu se-
lection display appears as follows:
BACK NEXT Receiver

RX TX
-41dB -62dB
VOLT Min V TEMP
04.1V 04.1V +032°C
QUA STR L-PACK
100% 100% 2000ms

Refer to the Telemetry section (page 225) for addi-

tional information on telemetry settings and outdoor
display functions.

Operating the displays 7

Warning Displays

There are two warning systems in the mz-24 Pro
HoTT transmitter. Active warning pop-up screens
appear if receiver and transmitter operation statuses
are not detected or are incorrect. System warnings
appear as highlighted data information that require
immediate attention.
Notice
Do not use the Servo Reverse option on Channel
6 (helicopters) and Channel 1 (all other model
types) to reverse the control stick direction. The
Thr.POS and Thr.HOLD warning systems are not
equipped to recognize changes made via that option.
If a receiver is bound and saved into the model mem-
ory, and there is an inactive Thr.POS warning, the RF
module will automatically turn on with the transmitter.
Otherwise, the following warning display will appear,
and an acoustic warning will sound:
000% 000%

Instead, reverse the control direction using the Pitch Warning

4.2V

Curve (helicopters models) or Throttle Curve (all other Thr.HOLD

000:00.0
Thr.CUT
Active Warning Display 000 000

model types) menus (pages 154 and 160 respectively). Thr.POS PHASE
These warnings will only appear if the function is ac- 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
RC Signal Fail Safe not set
tive via the   ON  buttons in the SYSTEM submenu If a receiver is not detected by the transmitter, the M-1 000 000
Please select RF ON/OFF PHASE 1
Warning (page 210). warning window will display the message: "No re- MODEL NAME 1
ON OFF
ceiver bound to TX!". Press the  SET  button to go BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000

These warning windows primarily appear after the directly to the BASE submenu TX ctl (transmitter set- Press the  ON  button to maintaining the RF transmis-
transmitter is turned on. In the example below, the tings) to link the receiver to the model memory: sions, or switch them off by tapping the  OFF  button.
red dot after Thr.POS indicates that the throttle ser- BACK TX ctl If no action is taken this screen automatically disap-
vo connected to Output 1 (fixed-wing models), or the RX1 RX2 pears after a few seconds.
throttle servo and to Output 6 (helicopter model), is BIND ON/OFF OFF OFF
not in the idle position, risking a runaway engine. Until TX OUT SET SET SET Additional warning messages may appear in the field
the throttle/pitch is corrected, no other information or between the two green lines. For example, the mes-
RF ON/OFF OFF RF TYPE NORMAL
buttons will appear in the warning box: sage "RC signal" indicates the transmitter is set to
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
normal remote control, "TEACH signal" or "PUPIL
000% 000%

Warning DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF

4.2V
signal" indicate student/trainer settings, and "Fail
Thr.HOLD
000 000:00.0
Thr.CUT
000
Or touch the  BACK  button at the top left to exit and safe not set" indicates that fail-safe settings have not
Thr.POS
mz
PHASE return to the basic display menu. been programmed.
0:01:23 000:00.0
Fail Safe setting
M-1
Notices
000 000
PHASE 1
KEIN EMPFÄNGER GEBUNDEN!
MODEL NAME 1
SET • The Active Warning Display is monitored by
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 the options found in the SYSTEM submenu
Once the throttle/pitch is corrected, additional infor- Warning (page 210).
mation and options appear: • To set a reminder to turn on the fail-safe func-
000% 000%
tions, select the  REV  option in the Throttle
Warning
4.2V Hold line of the SYSTEM submenu Warning
Thr.HOLD
000 000:00.0
Thr.CUT
000
(page 210).
Thr.POS PHASE
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Fail Safe not set
M-1 000 000
No receiver bound to TX! PHASE 1
MODEL NAME 1
SET
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

8 Warnings
System Warning Display The mz system data display will automatically appear
Additional warnings may be triggered based on pow- when the transmitter is turned on and alarm function is
er and signal information, located in the mz-24 PRO triggered. To stop the mz system display screen from
system menu. Press the  mz  button in the center of automatically appearing, touch the  ON  button at the
the basic display to access the menu: top right to change to   OFF  , and press the   BACK 
000% 000% button to save setting.
TX RX 4.2V
The red number at the top right of each warning field
RX 00.0V Press shows the number of current warnings; in the prior
000:00.0
example, the warnings generated are at 04. Deleted
000 000

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 this count by pressing the   CLR  button next to the
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 back button. All warning counts can be cleared the
MODELLNAME 1 same way. With the Strength Alarm, triggered alarms
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
can be turned off by pressing the  ON  button under
STRENGTH ALARM to switch it to  OFF .
BACK CLR AUTO LOAD OFF
Press the  BACK  button to exit and return to the ba-
TX VOLT 04 RX VOLT 00 sic display.
4.2V 00.0V
STRENGTH 00 STRENGTH ALARM CAUTION
000% OFF
A STRENGTH ALARM set to the  OFF  po-
ESC CUR 00
000.0A
ESC VOLT
00.0V
00
! sition will stay off the next time the trans-
mitter is turned on. Manually change the
setting back to  ON .
Acoustic warnings will sound and systems requiring
attention will be highlighted in red. In the example
below, the transmitter's supply voltage has reached
the warning threshold:
BACK CLR AUTO LOAD OFF

TX VOLT 04 RX VOLT 00
3.5V 4.9V
STRENGTH 00 STRENGTH ALARM
000% OFF

ESC CUR 00 ESC VOLT 00

000.0A 00.0V

Stop operating the model as soon as an acute warn-

ing is displayed and attend to the issue before con-
tinuing.

Warnings 9
DSC Port Data Port

The abbreviation DSC stands for "direct servo con-
trol." Traditionally, this function allowed users to con-
trol models by direct wired connection instead of by
wireless radio transmissions. DSC was useful for per-
forming model adjustments without any chance of in-
terfering with other models utilizing FM radio frequen-
cies. However, with the HoTT technology system, it is
no longer necessary to use a diagnostic cable in that
manner.
The standard two-pin DSC port on the back of the
mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitters is now used to function
as a TRAINER / PUPIL port and as an interface for
flight simulators or other external devices.
3. Depending on the number of channels used for The DATA port is found under the cover on the back
the connected flight simulator or for the Training side of the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter:
mode, in the DSC OUTPUT line of the BASE sub-
menu TX ctl (page 68), select one of the following
modes: PPM10, PPM16, PPM18 or PPM24. De-
fault setting: PPM10.
Notice
Given the numerous flight simulators on the mar-
ket, the contacts on the jack plug or DSC module
may have to be adapted by Graupner Service.
Attention
Exercise extreme caution when directly connect-
Use the DATA port for connecting a Smart Box (order
ing the transmitter to a desktop computer or lap-
No. 33700) or for an external Bluetooth module (No.
top  by a DSC cable and/or connecting a com-
S8351).
puter interface to the simulator: the transmitter may be
destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Only use this type Further information on the Smart Box and the Blue-
of connection if precautions are taken, such as wearing tooth module can be found in the main Graupner FS
a commercially available grounding armband while op- catalogue and on the Internet at www.graupnerusa.
erating the simulator. Graupner strongly recommends com.
only using wireless simulators.

To ensure a correct DSC connection, observe the

following:
1. Perform adaptations in the menu appropriate for
the task. For example, to adapt to the transmitter
to a trainer system,  refer to the FUNCTION sub-
menu Trainer (page 141).
2. Connect the other end of the connecting cable to
the desired device while observing all relevant op-
erating instructions.

Tip
Make sure that all the plugs are securely inserted in
the respective ports, and only use the provided plug-
in connections  with a 2-pin jack plug on the DSC
side.
10 Connection on the back side
Audio Jack
The headphone connection is found under the cover
on the back side of the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter:
The port is for connecting commercially available  ear
buds or headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack (not
included).
When headphones are plugged in, the transmitter's
speaker is turned off and the headphone icon on the
main display screen changes from gray (inactive) to
blue (active).
In addition to acoustic signals from the transmitter,
signals and messages associated with the BASE sub-
menu Telemetry are output via this connection. Fur-
ther information can be found in the Voice Triggers
subsection of the Telemetry section (page 116).
Card Slot
Micro-SD and Micro-SDHC
The card slot for micro-SD and micro-SDHC memory
cards is found under the cover on the back side of the
mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter:
In addition to the micro-SD memory card that come
standard with the mz-24 Pro HoTT, all convention-
al micro-SD memory cards with up to 2GB and mi-
cro-SDHC cards with up to 32GB memory can be
used. The manufacturer recommends using memory
cards with a maximum of 4GB since this capacity is
normally sufficient.
Insert the memory card into the slot behind the cover
with the contacts facing up, pressing to lock it into
place. After the memory card is inserted, close the
port cover.
As soon as a memory card has been inserted in the
transmitter, the card is immediately ready for use.
Once the transmitter is turned on, the memory card
icon on the main display screen changes from gray
(inactive) to blue (active). Storage folders are auto-
matically created on the memory card.
Removing the Memory Card
Open the cover on the back. Press the SD card gently
inwards to unlock the spring. The card will pop out
slightly. It is now safe to remove.
Capturing / Saving Data
The memory on the SD card is linked to Timer 1. Once
the timer starts, data automatically begins recording
(assuming that an appropriate memory card is being
used and there is a telemetry link with the receiver).
Data recording stops when Timer 1 is stopped. Refer
to the BASE submenu Timer (page 74) for additional
information on timer starts and stops. The memory
card symbol will animate as long as data is being re-
corded.
After data recording stops, an (empty) "Models" fold-
er and "LogData" folder automatically appear on the
memory card. Log files are saved in subfolders called
"Modelname" and utilize the following naming sys-
tem: 0001_year-month-day.bin, 0002_year-month-
day.bin, etc. If a model memory is nameless, the cor-
responding log files are saved in a subfolder entitled
"NoName". All folders and files are accessible once
the memory card is removed from the transmitter and
inserted into the card slot of a desktop or laptop com-
puter. The data can be evaluated on any compatible
computer using the firmware programs found in the
downloads section of our website www.graupnerusa.
com.
Notice
Note that for technical reasons memory card
data is inaccessible during MP3 playback.
Connection on the back side 11
 Micro-USB Connection

Tip The Micro-USB port is found under the cover on

To automatically receive email updates regarding import- the back side of the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter:
ant product information and software/firmware updates,
register all products on our website www.graupnerusa.
com.

Importing and Exporting Model Memories

Model memories can be backed up and copied to and
from the memory card and used interchangeably be-
tween transmitters of the same make or model. Refer
to the Import From SD Card and Export To SD Card
sections (pages 54-56) for more information on this
procedure.
Use this connection  for software updates  and date/
Notices time setting from a desktop or laptop using any of the
• Certain special characters used in mod- Windows operating systems (XP, Vista, 7 - 10).
el names cannot be transferred to FAT and The included USB cable is plugged into this port and
FAT32 file systems due to the specific restric- the downloading procedure for obtaining software up-
tions of these file systems used by the mem- dates through a computer is described in the software
ory card. Characters within such filenames package instructions.
will be replaced by with a tilde (~) during the The appropriate USB driver and software needed for
copying process. the computer to interface with this system can be
• The model memories of the mz-24 and mz- downloaded off our website www.graupnerusa.com.
24 Pro transmitters are in principle compati- After the required driver and software are installed, the
ble with one another, HOWEVER: transmitter can be updated at any time using the USB
In order to import from an SD card, the mod- connection. The date and time can also set using the
el memory must first be copied or moved to USB connection.
a corresponding directory on a desktop or
laptop. For example, from Models\mz-24 to
Models\mz-24pro or vice versa. Refer to
the Import From SD Card section (page 54)
for more information.
After importing from an SD card, always check
each and every model function. In particular,
adapt the control and switch functions to the
respective transmitter.

12 Connection on the back side

Personal notes 13
Receiver Start Up
Preliminary Remarks

Notice On-board Voltage Display Reset

With the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter, it is possi- When a telemetry link exists, the current voltage of the To reset the receiver, hold down the SET button on the
ble to control up to 12 functions. Any servos receiver power supply appears in the main display to top of the receiver while turning on the power supply.
which are connected to the receiver outputs 13 the left of the RF icon: If the reset is performed while the transmitter is turned
and higher remain in their middle position by default and 000% 000%
off, or if the receiver is not bound to a transmitter, the
cannot be actuated by the transmitter. TX RX 4.2V LED on the receiver indicates the status (according
RX 05.5V
000:00.0 to the receiver's instructions), usually by a series of
After turning on the receiver a LED indicates the trans- 000 000

flashes. Release the button after about 3 seconds.

mitter reception is missing. This means that a link 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
has not (yet) been established with a Graupner-HoTT If the reset is performed with a receiver not bound to
M-1 000 000

transmitter. This happens if the transmitter is not yet

bound to the receiver, if the bound transmitter is out
of range, if the transmitter is turned off, or if the wrong
model memory has been selected in the transmitter.
To establish a connection with the transmitter, first the
receiver must be linked to the model memory in the
transmitter. This process is known as "binding". Re-
fer to the BASE submenu TX ctl section (page 68) for
additional information on binding. This binding proce-
dure is required once per each receiver-model mem-
ory combination or, after changes have been made to
one or more model memories, once per each trans-
mitter-receiver combination . Basically, binding must
be performed only after buying a new transmitter, af-
ter buying additional receivers, or after changing the
model memory.
Notice
If the LED of your receiver indicates that it is ready
for use but the receiver does not react to the SET
button or to the control movements, check the
PHASE 1
MODEL NAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000
Temperature Warning
If the receiver temperature falls below a pre-set thresh-
old (-10°C by default) or exceeds a pre-set threshold
(+55°C by default), the receiver emits a warning beep
that repeats approximately once per second. Tem-
perature thresholds can be adjusted in the telemetry
menus.
Refer to Installation Notices (page 16) for informa-
tion on receiver and servo setup.
Notice
Certain integrated BEC* speed controllers can-
not be used in conjunction with additional receiv-
er batteries without first removing the plus pole
(red cable) from the 3-pin plug. Check the speed con-
troller's instructions for more information. red
To remove the cable: 1
a transmitter, you can then start a binding process at
any time.
000
If a bound receiver is reset and the associated mod-
el memory is active in the turned-on transmitter, the
LED will typically flash for 2-3 seconds (according to
the description included in receiver instructions), in-
dicating that the transmitter/receiver system is ready
to use.
Note
The RESET ALL function will delete all receiver
settings and revert it to the factory defaults. The
HoTT synchronization information is not affected.
If a reset is performed accidentally, all of the receiver
settings made using the BASE submenu Telemetry
should be restored.
Resetting is recommended when moving a receiver to a
different model. Otherwise, settings may be transferred
which do not match the new model.

polarity of the receiver power supply. 1. Use a short screwdriver to 2

3

carefully lift the middle tab of

the plug.
2. Remove the red cable.
3. Use electrician's tape to protect against shorts.

* BEC = Battery Elimination Circuit

14 Starting up the receiver
Installing the receiver
Installing the Receiver
The following procedure is the same across all
Graupner  receiver systems.
Install the receiver behind a strong bulkhead where it
is protected against dust or splash water. Make sure
that it is not excessively airtight to prevent it from
overheating during operation.
The receiver should not directly touch the fuselage or
chassis since they can directly transmit motor vibra-
tion or impact from landing. When installing the receiv-
er in a model with a gas motor, all of the parts must be
protected to prevent exhaust or oil from penetrating.
This holds true in particular for ON/OFF switches that
are installed on model shells.
The receiver's servo and power supply connecting
cables should remain loose. The receiving antennas
should be at least 2 inches (5 cm) from all large met-
al parts or wires that do not directly originate from
the receiver. This includes carbon fiber parts, servos,
electric motors, fuel pumps, all types of cables, all
steel parts, etc.
Install the receiver away from all other installed parts
at an easily accessible location in the model. Servo
cables should not be wound around or run next to
antennas because radio transmission interference will
occur.
Note that the cables can shift during flight accelera-
tion. Make sure that the cables cannot slip and move
directly adjacent to antennas and interfere with recep-
tion.
Installing the Receiver Antennas Channel Mapping
With a single antenna, orientation is not crucial. The function of each channel is determined by the
With dual antennas, the active end of the second an- transmitter and not the receiver. Change the channel
tenna should be at a 90° angle from the end of the first mapping settings directly through the BASE submenu
antenna, and the distance between the active ends Telemetry (page 104), or indirectly through the BASE
should be a minimum of 5 inches (125mm). submenu Out.Swap (page 96).
For carbon fiber fuselages, the ends of the antennas
should extend from the fuselage about 2 inches (125
mm). If needed, replace the standard HoTT receiver
antennas with longer 300 mm or 450 mm antennas
(No. 33500.2 or 33500.3).
Servo Connections and Polarity
Graupner-HoTT receiver servo connections are num-
bered; the supply voltage runs through the numbered
connections. The polarity of the plug-in system cannot
be reversed. When inserting the plug, note the small
bevels on the side. Insert gently and do not use force.
Attention
Do not reverse connection polarity. This can de-
stroy the receiver and connected devices.
Notice
In compact receivers, such as GR-12L HoTT,
the outputs 1 through 6 are reversed 180° from
that of the bigger receivers. Pay close attention
while connecting any plug to the receiver. If applicable,
use a V or Y cable (No. 3936.11).
Installing the receiver 15
Installation Notices
Components and Accessories
Attention
Due to incompatibility and possible system fail-
ure, Graupner recommends only using official
or approved parts, components and accesso-
ries that have been tested and accepted for suitability,
functionality and safety. Graupner will only assume
responsibility for the product if such components and
accessories have been used.
Graupner assumes no liability for products or acces-
sories produced by other manufacturers (unless oth-
erwise approved for use by Graupner), as Graupner
is incapable of evaluating all third-party products to
determine safety and compatibility.
Installing the Switch
Install switches in an area of the model free from ex-
haust or vibration. The switch knob must be freely ac-
cessible over its entire operating range.
Installing the Servos
To protect the servos from excessive vibration, always
install them with the provided rubber vibration damp-
er.
• Install the servos on rubber grommets with tubular
brass spacers as protection from vibration. Do not
overtighten fixing screws as this could counteract
vibration protection provided by the rubber grom-
mets. The system offers both safety and vibration
protection for the servos when the fixing screws
are properly tightened. The following figure shows
how to correctly mount a servo. The brass spacers
are inserted from below into the rubber grommets:
16 Installation instructions
Servo mounting lug Do not connect to receiver horizontally as shown
here:
Retaining screw
Rubber grommet
Tubular brass spacer
• Servo arms must freely move throughout entire
operating range. Make sure no linkage parts block
the servos movements.
• Connect the receiver’s power supply cable(s) or
the servo connecting cable to the receiver in a ver- • Servo connecting sequences may vary between
tical line as shown below: model types. Refer to installation instructions for
helicopters (page 154) and fixed-wings (page 180)
for specific model information.
WARNINGS
• Technical defects of an electrical or
!
mechanical nature may cause motors
to start without warning, or may gen-
erate flying parts which can cause sig-
nificant injury to the pilot, spectators
or products.
• Avoid short-circuiting. Short-circuits
can destroy the remote-control sys-
tem, cause serious burns and ex-
plosions. All motor-driven parts (air
and water propellers, helicopter ro-
tors, exposed gears, etc.) pose an in-
jury hazard. Never touch these parts!
A fast-rotating propeller can sever fin-
gers or cause other significant dam-
age! Ensure no other objects come in
contact with driven parts.
 • Once the battery is connected or the
motor is running, always maintain a
safe distance from the hazard area
posed by the propulsion system!
• Disconnect the fuel supply or drive
battery beforehand programming the
transmitter to prevent an accidental
motor start.
Notices
• Protect all equipment from dust, dirt, mois-
ture, vibration and excessive heat or cold. The
models may only be operated remotely in nor-
mal outside temperatures ranging from 14° to
130°F (-10°C to 55°C).
• To avoid electrical shock, check the model
regularly for damages to the housings and
cables, especially after a crash. Discontinue
using any electronic components that have
become wet; short-circuiting and shock risk
is still prevalent even after components have
dried.
• Only use Graupner approved and recom-
mended components and accessories. Al-
ways use matching, original plug-in connec-
tions of the same design and material.
• Make sure routed cables are not under ten-
sion, excessively kinked or broken. Sharp
edges can damage the insulation.
• Make sure that all of the plug-in connections
are tight. When disconnecting the plug-in
connections, do not pull the cables.
• The devices must not be modified in any way.
Modifications will void insurance coverage
and warranties. For assistance and repairs,
contact the Graupner USA Service Center.
Range and function test
Before every use, check the range and functioning.
Firmly secure the model and make sure that no one
is nearby.
Perform at least one complete function test on the
ground, and run through an entire flight simulation to
determine if there are any problems with the system
or the programming of the model. Always follow the
instructions under Range Test (page 71).
WARNING
Always perform a complete and consci-
! entious range and function test as well as
the flight simulation. Malfunctions and
reception issues can occur if a range, function test
and flight simulation are not performed. Models
may crash and cause major property damage and/
or personal injury.
Servo Noise Filters for Extension Cables
No. 1040
A servo noise filter is required when using long servo
extension cables. The filter is connected directly to
the receiver output. In severe cases, a second filter
may be attached to the server.
Electrical Ignitions
Gas engine ignition systems also generate interfer-
ence that can impair remote control functioning.
Electrical ignition systems should always obtain pow-
er from a separate source.
Only use interference-suppressed spark plugs and
spark plug connectors and shielded ignition cables.
The receiver should be at a sufficient distance from
the ignition system.
Model Function
WARNING
• Never fly the model over observers or
! other pilots. Never endanger people or
animals, fly close to power lines, oper-
ate the model close to waterways or
open nautical traffic, near open roads,
highways, paths, public walkways,
etc.
• Never turn off the transmitter while
operating the model! If this happens,
wait three seconds for the display to
go dark, then turn the transmitter on
again. The transmitter may freeze if
turned on before the screen goes dark.
Installation instructions 17
 • If a transmitter is turned off during Disconnect batteries when not in use.
flight, wait three seconds until the dis- Never use rechargeable or replaceable batteries with
play screen goes dark, then turn on the damaged, defective or different cell types, i.e. do not
transmitter. Transmitter may freeze if mix combinations of old and new cells or cells from
turned on before the display screen different manufacturers.
goes dark, and models may become
uncontrollable. Capacity and Operating Time
• To avoid feedback channel malfunc- The recharging process gradually reduces battery
tions when operating towed mod- capacity. Check the capacity of power sources every
els, maintain a minimum distance of 6 months, and replace any battery with low perfor-
approximately 20 inches (50 cm) be- mance.
tween the participating receivers or Additionally, never store batteries at low tempera-
their antennas. In this case, use a sat- tures; the internal resistance increases while capacity
ellite receiver. decreases and the battery’s overall ability to discharge
and retain power diminishes.
Checking the Transmitter and Receiver Batteries Only use original Graupner rechargeable batteries.
When the warning message “Charge the battery!”
appears in the display followed by a warning sound,
immediately cease operation and recharge the trans-
mitter battery.
Use the transmitter battery power display functions to
check the battery charge of both the transmitter and
receiver. Do not wait until the rudder movements are
noticeably slower. Immediately replace dead batter-
ies.
Always follow the manufacturer’s charging instruc-
tions. Always fully recharge batteries. Do not leave
batteries unattended while charging. Never attempt to
charge alkaline batteries as they may explode.
Recharge batteries before each use. To prevent
short-circuits, insert the banana plugs into the charger
first, and then insert the charging cable plugs into the
battery charging ports.

18 Installation instructions
Personal notes 19
Receiver System Power Supply

To safely operate the model, a reliable power supply
is required. If the receiver voltage shown on the trans-
mitter display consistently drops or is generally (too)
low even though the linkage moves freely, the battery
is full, the cross-section of the battery connecting ca-
ble is sufficient, and the transition resistance at the
Using this method, a battery with 1400 mAh rep-
resents the absolute minimum for supplying power
to a receiver with four analogue servos. Also include
in the calculations any receiver which requires about
70 mA due to its bidirectional function.
Apart from the above circumstances, it is generally
Never used battery boxes or alkaline batteries.
When the model is in use, the on-board power supply
voltage is graphically represented in the upper right
side of the main display, showing a battery and nu-
merical outputs:
000% 000%

plug-in connections is minimal, etc., troubleshoot ac- recommended to connect the receiver to the power TX RX 4.2V
cord to the following information: supply using two cables. As per the standard, con- RX 05.5V
000 000 000:00.0
Make sure that the battery remains fully charged when nect the GR-16 or GR-24 receiver cable "1" to the
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
initially operating the model. Make sure that the re- "6+B" or "12+B-" output, and receiver cable "2" to
M-1
sistance of the contacts and switches is low. Mea- the opposite end of the connector strip labeled "1+B-
000 000
PHASE 1
sure the voltage drop over the installed switch cables " or "11+B-". Between the cable and receiver, use a MODEL NAME 1

under a load since even robust, new switches cause V or Y cable (No. 3936.11, see figure below) if one or BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000

a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value can be sev-
eral times higher due to aging and oxidation of the
contacts. In addition, constant vibration and shaking
of the contacts also gradually increase the transition
resistance.
Even small servos such as a Graupner/JR DS-281
draw stall current to 0.75 A when you stop under a
load. Four of these servos in a foam airplane can
hence draw up to 3 A from the on-board power supply.
Servos connected to a 2.4 GHz receiver receive con-
trol pulses more frequently than comparable receivers
in the classic frequency range. This affects the receiv-
er system power consumption and prevents the digi-
tal servos from maintaining the last control pulse posi-
tion specified while waiting for the next pulse to arrive.
Choose a power supply that does not fail under a
permanent high load and which always provides suffi-
both receiver connections need to be connected to a
servo, speed controller, etc. With the double connec-
tion to the switch or voltage controller, the risk of a
cable rupture is reduced, and an even power supply
is ensured to the connected servos.
If you connect a separate battery to each battery con-
nection, be sure that each of the batteries have the
same rated voltage and capacity. Never connect dif-
ferent battery types or batteries with strongly different
charges. This can cause an effect similar to a short
circuit. For safety reasons, insert voltage stabilizing
elements such as the PRX-5A receiver power supplies
between the batteries and receiver:
special function
V-cable PRX stabilized
No. 3936.11 receiver power supply
No. 4136
If the voltage falls below the warning threshold (nor-
mally 3.8 V) visual and acoustic low-voltage warnings
are generated. The warning threshold can be adjust-
ed in the BASE submenu Telemetry section (page
108).
Attention
Check the battery level regularly. Do not wait to
charge the battery until the voltage decreases
enough for a warning signal to be generated.
Tip
A summary  of the batteries, chargers and measuring
devices for checking the power sources can be found
in the main Graupner FS catalogue as well as on the
website www.graupnerusa.com.

cient voltage. To calculate the required battery capac-

ity, add at least 350 mAh for each analog servo, and at
least 500 mAh for each digital servo.

20 Installation notice - Receiver system power supply

Receiver System Power Supply
NiMH Battery Packs - 4 Cells
With a traditional 4-cell pack, the Graupner HoTT sys-
tem can be reliably operated providing that the above
conditions are observed, and assuming that the packs
have a sufficient capacity and charge.
NiMH Battery Packs - 5 Cells
Battery packs with five cells offer greater leeway in
comparison to 4-cell packs.
Note that not every servo available on the market can
handle the voltage from a 5-cell pack over the long
term, especially when the pack is freshly charged.
Some of these servos audibly "growl" when operated
with a 5-pack.
Notice
Note the specifications for the servo before de-
ciding to use a 5-cell pack.
LiFe Packs - 2 Cells
Given the above considerations, these cells are the
best choice.
LiFe cells are also available in a hard plastic housing
to protect against mechanical damage. Like lithium
polymer cells, LiFe cells can be charged quickly with
suitable chargers and are comparably robust.
In addition, this type of cell can undergo significantly
more charging/discharging cycles than conventional
LiPo batteries. The comparatively high rated voltage
of 6.6 V of two cell LiFe battery packs does not pose
any problems to Graupner HoTT receivers or the ser-
vos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. which are approved
for operation with this higher voltage.
Attention Charging the Receiver Battery
Note that practically all of the  previously market- To charge the receiver battery, directly connect the
ed servos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. as well charging cable (No. 3021). If the battery in the model
as newly released servos have permissible oper- is connected by a power supply cable (No. 3046,
ating voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Stabilized voltage con- 3934, 3934.1 or 3934.3), the battery is charged via the
trol such as the PRX (No. 4136) is needed to connect charging socket integrated in the switch, or a sepa-
them to the receiver. Otherwise, the connected devices rate charging connection. The switch for the power
may become damaged. supply cable must be set to OFF for charging.
LiPo Packs - 2 Cells
LiPo batteries are lighter yet they offer the same ca- Polarity of the receiver battery plug
pacity of NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries also come in
a hard plastic housing to protect against mechanical
damage.
The comparatively high rated voltage of 7.4 V of two
cell LiPo battery packs does not pose any problems
to Graupner HoTT receivers or the servos, speed con-
trollers, gyros, etc. which are approved for operation
with this higher voltage.
Attention
Note that practically all of the  previously market-
ed servos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. as well
as newly released servos have a permissible op-
erating voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Stabilized voltage
control such as the PRX (No. 4136) is needed to con-
nect them to the receiver. Otherwise, the connected de-
vices may become damaged.
Installation notice - Receiver system power supply 21
Safety and Handling Instructions
for Lithium-Ion (LiIo) and Lithium Polymer (LiPo) Rechargeable Batteries
Lithium-ion (LiIo) and lithium polymer (LiPo) batteries
require special treatment when charging, discharging,
storing and all other types of handling. Observe the
following specifications:
Charging Graupner LiPo/LiIo Batteries
• Since Graupner|SJ GmbH is unable to monitor
whether the batteries are correctly charged and
discharged, all warranties are voided upon incor-
rect charging or discharging.
• Only use the approved chargers with the associ-
ated charging cables to charge lithium ion/lithium
polymer batteries. Any alterations to the charger
and/or charging cables can cause serious dam-
age.
• The maximum charging capacity must be limited
to a factor of 1.05 of the battery capacity.
Example: 700  mAh battery = 735  mAh max.
charging capacity
• To charge and discharge lithium-ion/lithium poly-
mer batteries, only use the plug-in charger in the
set, or the specially designed charger/dischargers
by Graupner, available online at www.graupneru-
sa.com.
• Make sure that the number of cells, charging cut-
off and discharging cutoff voltage are set correctly.
Refer to the operating instructions of your charger/
discharger.
• Under these prerequisites, Graupner lithium-ion/
lithium polymer batteries can be charged with a
maximum 2 C (1 C corresponds to the cell capac-
ity) charging current. Starting at a maximum 4.2 V
per cell, continue charging at a constant 4.2 V per
cell until the charging current falls below 0.1... 0.2
A.
• Do not charge with more than 4.20 V per cell.
This would permanently damage the cell and may
cause a fire.
22 Safety and handling instructions for lithium-ion/lithium polymer batteries
To keep from overcharging individual cells within
the pack, set the cutoff voltage to between 4.10...
4.15 V per cell in order to extend the battery life.
• The permissible temperature range for charging
and discharging lithium ion/lithium polymer batter-
ies is 0... +50°C.
• Batteries as well as individual cells are not toys
and must be kept  from children. They must there-
fore be stored out of the reach of children.
• Keep batteries away from infants and small chil-
dren. If a battery is swallowed, immediately con-
sult a physician or go to an emergency room.
• Never place a battery in a microwave or under
pressure. This may cause smoke, fire or an ex-
plosion.
• Do not disassemble lithium ion/lithium polymer
batteries. Disassembling a battery can cause in-
ternal short-circuits. This can result in the release
of gas, fire and explosion, or other problems.
• The electrolyte and electrolyte vapors within lithi-
um-ion/lithium polymer batteries are hazardous to
health. Avoid direct contact with electrolytes. If the
electrolyte comes into contact with your skin, eyes
or other body parts, use a large amount of fresh
water for rinsing and then consult a doctor.
• Before each use, make sure that the batteries are
in a satisfactory condition. Defective or damaged
cells or batteries may not be used.
• Cells and batteries may only be used in accor-
dance with the technical specifications for the spe-
cific cell type.
• Batteries and cells may not be heated, burned,
short-circuited or charged with excessive current
or with reversed polarity.
• If handled improperly, there is a danger of fire, ex-
plosion, irritation and burns. To extinguish a fire,
use a fire extinguishing blanket, CO2 extinguisher
or sand.
• If the batteries overheat, proceed as follows:
Disconnect the battery, and place it on a non-flam-
mable surface (such as concrete) until it cools
down. Never hold the battery in your hand due to
the risk of explosion.
• Batteries from parallel-connected cells, and com-
binations of old and new cells, cells of different
makes, sizes, capacities, manufacturers, brands
or type may not be used.
• Batteries which have been installed in a device
should always be removed when the device is
not being used. Always turn devices off after you
have finished using them to prevent battery drain-
age. Dead lithium-ion/lithium polymer batteries are
considered defective and may not be reused.
• Be sure to charge the batteries in a timely manner.
While they are being charged, the batteries must
be placed on a non-flammable, heat-resistant and
non-conductive surface. Combustible or highly
flammable objects are to be kept away from the
charging area.
• Batteries must be monitored while they are being
charged. The maximum charging current specified
for the respective cell type may not be exceeded.
• You may only charge a pack of series-connected
lithium-ion/lithium polymer batteries all at once as
long as the voltage of the individual cells does not
deviate by more than 0.05 V, or if the differences in
voltage are monitored and equalized by a balanc-
er connection using a balancer or equalizer during
charging.
 The 1s lithium-ion battery in the set comes with a
special safety shut off. The voltage differences be-
tween individual cells are not balanced by means
of the usual balancer plug-in connection.
• If the battery heats up above 60°C while it is be-
ing charged, stop charging and let the battery cool
down to approximately 30°C.
• The batteries may not be modified. Do not directly
solder or weld the cells.
• To avoid deformation, avoid excessive mechanical
pressure.
• Make sure to observe the charging and discharg-
ing instructions.
Storage
LiIo/LiPo cells should be stocked with about 50% of
their nominal capacity. If the cell voltage falls below 3
V during the stocking, the lithium ion/lithium polymer
cells must be recharged to 50% of the full capacity.
Otherwise, the battery will die during storage and be-
come useless.
Special Discharging Instructions for Graupner
LiIo/LiPo Polymer Batteries:
• A continuous current of approximately 1 C does
not pose a problem for Graupner lithium-ion/lithi-
um polymer batteries. If the current is higher, refer
to the instructions in the catalogue. Bear in mind
the maximum load for the plug-in system (see the
maximum discharge current indicated on the bat-
tery label).
• Discharging below 2.5 V per cell will damage the
cells and should be avoided at all costs.
• The batteries should never be short-circuited.
Short-circuits generate a very high current which
heats up the cells. This causes a loss of electro-
lyte, gas formation or even explosions. Graupner
LiIo/LiPo batteries should be kept away from and
not touch conductive surfaces due to the short-cir-
cuit hazard.
• The battery's temperature during discharging
should never exceed +70°C. If this occurs, make
sure that the battery is sufficiently cooled, or re-
duce the discharge current. The temperature can
be easily checked using the infrared thermometer
(No. 1963). However, the battery may not be dis-
charged using the transmitter's charging port. This
port is not designed for this purpose.
Additional Handling Instructions
• The battery capacity decreases each time it is
charged and discharged. Charging when the tem-
perature is too high or too low can also gradually
reduce the battery's capacity. After 50 cycles, the
battery capacity of models is only 50-80% of that
of a new battery due to the occasionally high dis-
charge current and induction current of the motor,
even when all charging and discharging instruc-
tions have been followed.
• Batteries may only be series-connected or paral-
lel-connected in exceptions since the cell capacity
and charge can differ. The battery packs that we
supply are therefore preferable.
• The connections of lithium ion/lithium polymer
batteries are not as robust as other batteries. This
holds true particularly for the plus pole connection.
The connections can easily break.
Safety and handling instructions for lithium-ion/lithium polymer batteries
Cells Connection
Attention
Never directly solder on the battery cells. The
heat from direct soldering can damage battery
components such as the separator or isolator.
Battery connections should only be created by spot
welding in the factory. If the cable is missing or sev-
ered, have it repaired professionally by the manufac-
turer or dealer.
Replacing Individual Battery Cells
Attention
Individual battery cells may only be exchanged by
the manufacturer or dealer and not by the user.
Do not use Damaged Cells
Damaged cells should not be used.
Indications of damaged cells include damaged hous-
ing packaging, deformed cells, the smell of electrolyte
or leaking electrolyte. The battery must not be used in
these cases.
Damaged or useless cells are considered hazardous
waste and must be disposed of properly.
Contact with Liquids
Batteries should not be immersed in liquids of any
kind. Avoid all contact with liquids.
23
Definition of Terms
Control, Control Channel, Control Function, Control Switch, Function Input, Logical Switch, Mixer,
Switch
The following definitions appear repeatedly in this
manual:
Controls
Controls are the control elements on the transmitter
that are activated directly by the pilot that control the
connected servos, speed controllers, etc. on the re-
ceiver. These include:
• The two control sticks for control functions 1
- 4, including the related trims. These four func-
tions in all the six model types (vehicle, boat,
drone, helicopter, airplane and glider) can be
exchanged using the Mode Setting in the soft-
ware. For example: throttle/brake or throttle/
pitch left or right. The control stick function for
throttle/brake flap control for fixed-wing mod-
els or throttle/pitch control in helicopters is usu-
ally identified as the THR Control (channel 1).
• The four proportional dials (DV1 - DV4)The two
side proportional rotary controls SL1 and SL2.
• Switches S1 - S8
• The INC/DEC buttons DT1 and DT2
With the DV and SL proportional controls, as well as
the DT buttons, the servos directly follow the control
position, whereas only a two or three-stage adjust-
ment is possible with a switch.
The assignment of controls and switches to servos 5
-12 is freely programmable.
Control Channel
The term "control channel" is used to describe the
point at which a signal contains all control information
necessary for a particular servo, whether directly from
the control or indirectly via a mixer.
For example, the "aileron" control function of a fixed-
wing model for the model type 2AILE is divided into
control channels for the left and right aileron. Anal-
ogously,  the  "roll" control function  for the helicopter
24 Definition of terms
model 3S 120(Roll) governs the control channels for
both the left and right roll servo.
This signal is influenced by settings made in the fol-
lowing BASE submenus: E.P.A (servo path/servo lim-
it), REV/SUB (servo direction reverse/delay and servo
middle and neutral position), and Out.Swap (trans-
mitter output). The signal is then transmitted by the
transmitter through the RF module. Once it arrives in
the receiver, this signal may be modified by settings
saved in the FUNCTION submenu Telemetry. The
signal then controls the associated servo.
Control Function
A control function is the signal for a specific control
function, independent from the signal within the trans-
mitter. For example, in fixed-wing models the control
signals would be throttle, rudder or aileron; in helicop-
ter models these would be pitch, roll or nick.
The control function signal can be transmitted directly
into a single control channel, or through a mixer to
several control channels. A typical example of the lat-
ter are separate aileron servos, or the use of two roll
or elevation servos in helicopters. The control function
includes the influence of the mechanical control path
on the corresponding servo. This can be spread or
concentrated and modified from linear to highly ex-
ponential.
Control Switch
It is oftentimes impractical to automatically switch
a timer or a function on or off when a control is in
a specific position (e.g. a stopwatch turns on/off to
measure engine operating times). The mz-24 Pro
HoTT transmitter allows control switches to be pro-
grammed.
With these programmed switches, users identify the
switching point along the control path in the direction
of switching. Refer to the Controls and Switches As-
signment (page 26) for additional information.
Function Input
This is an imaginary point in the signal flow and should
not be confused with the control connection on the
printed circuit board. The selected Control Mode and
the TX OUT SET setting of the BASE submenu TX ctl
influence the sequence beyond the physical connect-
ing points. This generates differences between the
number of function inputs and the number of subse-
quent control channels.
Logical Switch
This option allows two switches, controls and/or log-
ical switches (or the preferred combination thereof)
to be interconnected into a single AND/OR switch.
A total of 8 logical switches, L1 - L8, can be pro-
grammed. Refer to the FUNCTION submenu Logi-
cal sw section (page 148) for additional information.
Mixer
The transmitter program contains a variety of mixing
functions. These allow a control function to influence
several control channels to control several servos or
allow several control functions to influence a single
servo.
Refer to the Basic Functions section (page 132) for
additional information on mixers.
Switch
The series of toggle switches S1 - S8 can be used in
control programming, to change program options (i.e.
timer start/stop), to turn mixers on and off, as trainer
switches etc. Each switch can be assigned any num-
ber of functions.
Related examples are described throughout the man-
ual.
Definition of terms 25
Control and Switch Assignment
Basic Procedure

Many options and settings can be actuated to a con- Pressing the   NONE  button in any channel line will Deleting Controls or Switches
trol function with a freely selectable control (ST1 - 4, bring up an active window. In the example below, the To delete, press the value field of the switch or control
DV1 - 4, DT1 and DT2, SL1 and SL2), switch (S1 - 8), CH 5 line needs a control assigned to SL1: to be removed. The active window will appear. Press
or logical switch (see Assigning a Logical Switch or the  CLR  button:
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
Control, page 27). In all cases, multiple assignments
Select
are possible. Refer to the Definition of Terms section Select Press
CH 5. NONE 0% +100% +100% NEXT
(page 24) to distinguish between a control and switch. NO
NO
CH 6. NONE 0% +100% +100% INC
CLR CLR
Notice CH 7. NONE 0% +100% +100% RES
LOGIC LOGIC
Note that incorrect responses may arise from CH 8. NONE 0% +100% +100% DEC

functional overlaps, e.g. using the same switch to
toggle between Phase changes and a control for
Phase trimming. The functions are incompatible and the
switch assignment should be changed.
The same method is used to assign the controls,
switches, control switches and logical switches in
all relevant menus. The basic procedure will be ex-
plained below; refer to the specific submenu sections
CTL OFFSET – Travel + The field returns to its default value (NONE).
To assign a switch, simply move the desired control Canceling Control or Switch Assignment
(stick 1 - 4, DV1 - DV4, SL1 - SL2, or DT1 - DT2) or To cancel an assignment, press the NO  button:
the desired switch (S1 - S8). Once the switch, con- Select
trol or control stick is assigned the active window will
NO
disappear. In the example below, the right proportion-
al rotary control SL1 was flipped and the assignation CLR
Press
shows in the CTL column of the CH 5. line: LOGIC

for details on individual functions. BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO The active menu will disappear.
Control and Switch Assignment
CH 5. SL 1 0% +100% +100% NEXT Notice
Open the BASE submenu CTL Set: For certain menu options, only physical controls
CH 6. NONE 0% +100% +100% INC
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO CH 7. NONE 0% +100% +100% RES or switches can be assigned. When the logical
CH 8. NONE 0% +100% +100% DEC switch option is unavailable, the active windows
CH 1. ST 1 NEXT CTL OFFSET – Travel + will appear without the  LOGIC  button:
CH 2. ST 2 +100% +100% INC Select
CH 3. ST 3 +100% +100% RES
NO
CH 4. ST 4 +100% +100% DEC
Note CLR
CTL OFFSET – Travel+
The controls are only recognized along a specific
path. Move the control to the left or right, forward This is not an error.
Use this display to assign transmitter inputs 1 - 12
to operate servos, any control stick (ST1 - ST4), any or backward until the assignation appears in the
switch (S1 - S8), or any control (DV, SL or DT). display. If the length of travel is insufficient, move the
control in the opposite direction.

26 Control and switch assignment

Assigning Logical Switch or Control BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
Press any  OFF  button at any time to activate the
• Switch Assignment CH CH 2
switch position. The value field will change to ON
and the switch graphic display will color in blue
Logical switches can be assigned to a function
(up), green (center), or red (down). In the example
wherever there is a CTL value field. In the example D/R +100% +100% INC
below, the down switch direction was activated:
below, the D/R,EXP display menu has a CTL line: EXP 000% 000% RES
BACK
CTL SW 5 DEC
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
SYM OFF
CH CH 2  OFF
The assigned switch appears in the CTL value
D/R +100% +100% INC field. Press the  BACK  button to save and exit. SW 1
OFF
EXP 000% 000% RES
• Switch Setup
CTL NULL DEC
For certain functions, the exact switch position ON
SYM OFF
needs to be assigned. In the example below,
This switch position must be logically matched
To assign a switch, press  NULL  button in the CTL PHASE3 needs to be assigned to S1:
with the other switch positions.
line: BACK PHASE SET NEXT To remove the position assignment, press the  ON 
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXPO SERVO PHASE SLOW CTL NEW button to change the field to OFF.
CH CH 2 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
2. START 0.0s SW 1 CPY

D/R +100% INC 3. PHASE 3 0.0s NULL DEL Notice

Press +100%
EXP 000% 000% RES 4. PHASE 4 INC When none of the assigned phase switches
CTL NULL DEC 5. PHASE 5 DEC are in the "ON" position, the default "normal
SYM OFF
phase" (Phase 1) will activate.
Press the  NULL  button. The active window ap-
The active window will appear: pears (as described above). Flip the S1 switch. As If a 2-stage switch is chosen instead of a 3-stage
soon as the switch is flipped, an accessory display switch, the center position option will disappear.
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO will appear: In the example below, the 2-stage S6 was chosen:
CH CH 2
Select BACK BACK
NO
D/R +100% +100% INC
CLR 
EXP 000% 000% RES
OFF  OFF
LOGIC
CTL NULL DEC
SW 1 SW 6
OFF
SYM OFF

Move the desired switch. In the example below, OFF OFF

the front left 3-way switch S5 is assigned:
Select the desired switch direction by pressing the
appropriate  OFF  button.

Control and switch assignment 27

• Deleting Switches in the throw and press the ENT button. The pre- The logical switch display window appears listing
To delete, press the value field of the switch or cise position point along the control and produc- the eight logical switches (L1 - L8) and eight invert-
control to be removed. The active window will ap- es a value in the POS line. Reverse the switching ed logical switches (L1i - L8i):
pear. Press the  CLR  button: direction by pressing the REVERSE button in the
BACK
Select
DIR line. Press the button in the MODE line to tog-
Select logical switch
Press gle between SINGLE and DUAL . This chang-
NO L1 L2 L3 L4
es the function of the control switch from an on/off
CLR L5 L6 L7 L8
switch (like a 2-stage switch) to the switching be-
L1i L2i L3i L4i
LOGIC havior of a 3-stage switch.
L5i L6i L7i L8i
• Canceling the Switch Assignment
To cancel an assignment, press the NO  button: Notice
When changing modes, be sure the switching Press the desired button. The logical switch dis-
Select
position is not "000". Otherwise, there is risk play closes and returns to the previous menu. The
NO of switching continuously back-and-forth be- selected logical switch appears in the CTL value
CLR tween the two switching states while the relevant field. In the example below, L1 appears in the field:
Press
LOGIC control is in the middle control position.
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
The active menu will disappear. • Assigning Logical Switch CH AILE

Logical switches can be assigned to a function

INC
• Control Switch Assignment wherever there is a CTL value field. To assign a D/R +100% +100%
RES
Logical controls can be assigned to a function control, press  NULL  button near or next to any EXP 000% 000%

wherever there is a CTL value field. To assign a CTL line or column. In the example below, the L1 CTL L1 DEC

control, press  NULL  button near or next to any switch is being assigned through the D/R,EXP dis- SYM OFF

CTL line or column. An active window will appear. play:

Turn or move the control that you want to use to BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO Notice
assign. In the example below, left proportional ro- CH AILE Do not forget to program the selected logical
tary control SL2 was assigned. As soon as the switch in the FUNCTION submenu Logical
control is moved, an accessory display will appear: D/R +100% +100% INC sw.
Press
BACK EXP 000% 000% RES
CTL NULL DEC Tips
CTL SL 2 SYM OFF Logical switches can be used to logically intercon-
POS 000
An active window will appear. Press the LOGIC  nect two switches. They can also be used to estab-
 lish a control switch as an AND/OR. A total amount
MODE SINGLE button:
DIR REVERSE of 8 logical switches L1 - L8 are available, each with
Select
ENT a reversed (inverted) direction L1i - L8i. Refer to the
NO
Press FUNCTION submenu Logical sw (page 148) for ad-
Continue to move or turn the control. The yel- CLR ditional information.
low arrow to the right of the bar diagram will move LOGIC
along the control's throw. Select the position with-
28 Control and switch assignment
• All of these switches can be given multiple assign-
ments. Make sure that you do not accidentally as-
sign competing functions to a switch. It is recom-
mendable to write down the switching functions.

Practical Examples:
• Turning on/off an on-board glow plug heater when
an idling switching point for the THR control stick
is exceeded or undershot. The switch for the glow
plug heater is controlled at the transmitter by a
mixer.
• Automatically turning the stopwatch on/off to mea-
sure the actual flight time of a helicopter by means
of a control switch on the throttle limiter.
• Automatically turning off the mixer "AILE  RUDD"
when the brake flap extends to adapt the landing
position of the model to the ground contour when
landing on a slope without affecting the direction
of flight by rudders.
• Extend the landing flaps and retrim the elevator
while approaching a landing once the throttle con-
trol stick is moved beyond the switching point.
• Turn the stop watch on/off to measure the operat-
ing time of electric motors.

Control and switch assignment 29

 Receiver Configuration
Vehicles, Boats and Drones
This manual is grouped by model type. Refer to sec-
tions of the appropriate model type for programming
information specific to that model. For example, in-
formation specific to vehicles, boats and drones, look For drones there are basically four different ways of
for any/all of the following three icons to be highlight- assigning the four control functions (roll, nick, yaw
ed blue: and throttle/pitch) of both sticks. The options that are
chosen depend on individual preferences. It is recom-
mended to keep the control modes 1 - 4 compatible
by connecting them according to the following sche-
ma:
Connection Notices free or special function
free or special function
receiver power supply
free or special function
yaw
For surface models there are basically four different nick
ways of assigning the control functions (forward/ roll
backward and left/right) of both control sticks. The receiver power supply
motor/pitch
options that are chosen depend on individual prefer- (up/down)
ences. It is recommended to keep the control modes free or special function
1 - 4 compatible by connecting control function 1 with
the forward/backward function and the control func-
tion 4 with the direction function:
free or special function
free or special function
receiver power supply
free or special function
left/right
free or special function
free or special function
receiver power supply
engine servo or speed controller
(forward/backward)
free or special function

30 Receiver assignation
 Receiver Configuration
Helicopters
This manual is grouped by model type. Refer to sec- Receiver Assignment for Helicopter Models Notice
tions of the appropriate model type for programming In comparison to the receiver configuration of
information specific to that model. For example, in- Models With 1 to 3 Swashplate Servos
some  older Graupner/JR transmitters, servo
formation specific to helicopters, look for the follow- free or special function connection 1 (pitch servo) and servo connection
ing icon to be highlighted blue: free or special function 6 (throttle servo) have been switched. The servos must
free or governor or special function
be connected to the receiver outputs as depicted in the
free or special function
previous schema. Leave outputs that are not required
receiver power supply unassigned.
gyro suppression
throttle servo or motor controller
Installation Notices free or special function
tail servo (gyro-system)
Notice Nick-1-servo
The servos must be connected to the receiver in Roll-1-servo
Pitch- or Roll-2 or Nick-2-servo
the indicated sequence. Leave outputs that are
not required unassigned. receiver power supply

Follow the instructions on the subsequent pages. free or special function

Tip Models With 4 Swashplate Servos

In order to take advantage of the comfort and safety of free or special function
the Throttle Limit feature (page 94), a governor should free or special function
be connected to receiver output 6 instead of receiver free or governor or special function
output 8 (as shown in the adjacent receiver configura- free or special function
tion). Refer to the FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV sec- receiver power supply
tion (page 160) for additional information on governors. gyro suppression
throttle servo or motor controller
Nick-2-servo
Tail-servo (gyro-system)
Nick-1-servo
Roll-1-servo
Roll-2-servo

receiver power supply

free or special function

Receiver assignation 31
 Receiver Configuration
Motor-Powered Airplanes and Gliders
This manual is grouped by model type. Refer to sec- Fixed-Wing Models With or Without Motor - Up to Delta/Flying Wing Models With or Without Motor
tions of the appropriate model type for programming 4 Ailerons and 4 Flaps - Up to 4 Ailerons/Elevators and 4 Flap/Elevator
information specific to that model. For example, infor- Servos
mation specific to airplanes and gliders, look for any/ Normal Tail Unit or 2 Elevator Servos
free or special function or flap 2 / elev right
all of the following two icons to be highlighted blue: free or FLAP2 right or special function free or special function or flap 2 / elev left
free or FLAP2 left or special function free or special function
free or 2nd elevator or special function
free or special function
free or AILERON2 right or special function
receiver power supply
receiver power supply
free or flap / elev right
FLAP right or free or special function fre or flap / elev left
Installation Notices FLAP of FLAP left free or special function
AILERON right or special function free or rudder
Notice rudder aile/elev right
The servos must be connected to the receiver in elevator or elevator1 aile/elev left
AILERON or AILERON left
the indicated sequence. Leave outputs that are Airbrake or motor servo
Airbrake or engine servo or electric drive controller or ESC for electric models
not required unassigned.
receiver power supply
receiver power supply
Follow the instructions on the following pages. free or special function
free or AILERON2 left or special function

V-Tail Unit
free or FLAP2 right or special function
free or FLAP2 left or special function
free or special function
free or special function
receiver power supply
FLAP right or free or special function
FLAP or FLAP left
AILERON right or special function
elevator/rudder right
elevator/rudder left
AILERON or AILERON left
airbrake or engine servo or electric drive controller

receiver power supply

free or special function

32 Receiver assignation
Due to the different installation of the servos and rud-
der linkages, the operating direction for certain servos
can be reversed:

Model Servo with Wrong

Solution
Type Rotation Direction
V-Tail Reverse rudder and Invert the servos 3
elevator & 4 in the submenu
REV/SUB
Rudder correct, Switch servos 3 & 4
elevator reversed on the receiver
The elevator is Invert the servo 3
correct, + 4 in the submenu
rudder is reversed REV/SUB AND
switch them in the
receiver
Delta/ Elevator and aileron Invert the servos 2
Flying reversed & 3 in the submenu
Wing REV/SUB
Elevator correct, Invert the servo 2
aileron reversed & 3 in the submenu
REV/SUB AND
switch them in the
receiver
Aileron correct, Switch servos 2 & 3
elevator reversed on the receiver

Servo with wrong direction of rotation 33

Program Description

To open the respective submenu, press one of the B (BASE Menu) F (FUNCTION Menu)
four colored gear icons at the bottom right of the main The icons displayed in the FUNCTION submenu
display: screen vary depending on the active model type and
000% 000%
basic settings. Locate the blue model type icon for
4.2V Press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to bring information relative to that model.
000 000 000:00.0 up the BASE submenu screen:
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 Press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen:
000 000
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo

BASE menu = green B icon CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer

This menu contains all of the base setting and display

menus that are needed to set up the model:
Logical sw Sequence

FUNCTION menu = blue F icon

Name Menu Page
Model Sel Model Selection 38
SYSTEM menu = purple S icon Model Type Model Type 60 Name Menu Page

E.P.A Servo Path/Servo Limit 62 Phase Phase setting 120

Servo Reverse/Servo Sub- D/R,EXP Dual rate, Expo 124

TELEMETRY menu = blue T icon REV/SUB 64
Trim THR.CRV Throttle curve 128
These submenus contain all of the setting and display Prog.MIX Programmable mixers 134
Motor Throttle Cut* 66
menus required to program models and the mz-24
PRO transmitter. TX ctl Transmitter Controls 68 Trainer Trainer system 141
This manual follows the sequence order of the menus Timer Timers 74 Logical sw Logical switch 148
as they appear in the transmitter. Fail Safe Fail Safe Settings 80 Sequence Sequencer 150
Trim Step Trim Setup 82
Notice
Servo Servo Monitor 86
The display screen-shots of this manual are in-
tended for illustration purpose only. Therefore CTL Set Control Settings 90
please note that the represented settings and Out.Swap Transmitter Output 96
setting values cannot be used for 1:1 reference. Telemetry Telemetry Settings 98
Announce Announcements 118

* This icon remains hidden for models without a motor

34 Program description
Press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to Press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to Press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to
bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen: bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen: bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Snap roll

THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Butterfly

Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail Trainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

Name Menu Page Name Menu Page Name Menu Page

Phase Phase setting 120 Phase Phase setting 120 Phase Phase setting 120
D/R,EXP Dual rate, Expo 124 D/R,EXP Dual rate, Expo 124 D/R,EXP Dual rate, Expo 124
PIT.CRV Pitch curve 154 THR.CRV Throttle curve 128 THR.CRV Throttle curve* 128
THR.CRV Throttle curve 160 Idle LOW Idle setting* 180 Prog.MIX Programmable mixers 134
Gyr/Gover Gyro/governor 166 Prog.MIX Programmable mixers 134 Snap roll Snap roll setting 181
THR.HOLD Throttle autorotation 170 Snap roll Snap roll setting 181 Aile diff Aileron setting 182
Swash Swashplate mixer 172 Aile diff Aileron setting 182 Wing MIX Wing mixer 188
S.Limit Swashplate limiter 173 Wing MIX Wing mixer 188 Flap MIX AILE and FLAP mix** 192
S.MIX Heli mixer 174 Flap MIX AILE and FLAP mix** 192 Flap set Flap setting** 196
THR.MIX Throttle mixer 176 Flap set Flap setting** 196 Butterfly Butterfly** 202
Prog.MIX Programmable mixers 134 Airbrake Airbrake settings** 200 Trainer Trainer system 141
Trainer Trainer system 141 Trainer Trainer system 141 Logical sw Logical switch 148
PIT>>TAIL Pitch >> tail mixer 178 Logical sw Logical switch 148 Sequence Sequencer 150
Logical sw Logical switch 148 Sequence Sequencer 150 V-Tail V-Tail** 206
Sequence Sequencer 150 V-Tail V-Tail** 206 * This icon remains hidden for models without a motor
** This icon may remain hidden depending on the selected model
* This icon remains hidden for models without a motor
type.
** This icon may remain hidden depending on the selected model
type.

Program description 35
S (SYSTEM Menu) T (Telemetry Display)
Press the TELEMETRY icon (blue “T”) to bring up the
TELEMETRY display. The Telemetry display has no
submenu icons but has differing screens depending
Press the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to on system settings. By default, the receiver display
bring up the SYSTEM submenu screen: appears:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK NEXT Receiver

RX TX
-41dB -62dB
ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
VOLT Min V TEMP

Stick Cali MP3

04.1V 04.1V +032°C
QUA STR L-PACK
100% 100% 2000ms

This menu is transmitter-specific and the submenus Note this display will only appear if the Outdoor disp
are applicable to all models. However, the Warning function of the SYSTEM submenu Display is turned
menu options will vary slightly according to certain ON .
model settings: If no sensors are connected to the receiver and the
Name Menu Page Outdoor disp option is OFF (as shown below):
ST mode Stick mode 208 BACK Display

Brightness 15
Warning Warning instructions 210
Backlight off OFF
Etc. Set Various settings 212 INC
Touch sense 1
Display Display settings 216 Logo color DEFAULT RES
Stick Cali Stick calibration 220 Outdoor disp OFF DEC

MP3 MP3 Player 222 RFID AAAAA876

Then the display will appear as follows:

BACK R - 58dB T - 52dB
3.0 3.0

VOLT L-VOLT
5.2V 5.0V
0 6.0 0 6.0
25
Q 100%

S 075%
TEMP
+26°C L 0020ms
-20 70

Refer to the Telemetry section of this manual (page

225) for additional information on the display screens.

36 Program description
Personal notes 37
 Model selection
Edit Model Memories 1 to 30
Turn off the receiver and the RF module of the trans- Then press the Model Sel submenu icon: BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
mitter. Press the M - # value field line in the left side
of the main display with a finger or stylus: Warning
000% 000% BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM Model Sel MODELLTYP WEG/LIM UMK/MITTE Motor
First switch receiver off
4.2V
YES
000 000 000:00.0 Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
TX ctl UHREN FAIL-SAFE TR.ST. Servo

Press
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
M-1 000 000 Press
PHASE 1 This means there is still a connection be-
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
tween transmitter and receiver. Turn off the
000 000
receiver and try again until the Model Select
This is a direct shortcut to the BASE submenu Model function screen appears:
select (Model Sel):
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL 02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M The Model Select function screen now appears: 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
• Access to the Model Select submenu is gen-
To access the same menu without using the shortcut, 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
erally blocked if the transmitter is in Wireless
press the green BASE “B” gear icon to open the BASE 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
Trainer Mode.
menu display: 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
000% 000%
Model Select Display
4.2V
The currently active model is always shown in the
000:00.0 Notices
000 000 name bar at the top of the Model Type Display in ad-
mz
• If there is no reaction either by pressing the dition to the blue model-type icon shown to the left
0:01:23 000:00.0 main display’s M - # button or by pressing
M-1 000
Press
000 of center.
PHASE 1 the BASE menu’s Model Sel submenu icon,
MODELLNAME 1
the following Active Warning message may
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 appear:

38 Base menu - Model selection

In the example below, the helicopter model named BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
“Starlet” is currently active. The model’s name is vis- 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
ible in the active Model Memory line 01 as well as the HoTT Synchronization Methods Setting Press
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
name bar at the top of the screen. The model type
As mentioned in the section Starting the Receiv- 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
icon is displayed. In the example below, the helicop-
er (page 14):  if both the receiver and the RF mod- 04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
ter icon is visible:
ule function are turned off, every model saved in the 05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES
BACK STARLET NEXT Model Memory lines (01 - 30) can be switched from 06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY
01 STARLET SEL Standard Memory Specific HoTT-Synchronization to
02 BEAVER NEW Transmitter Specific and vice-versa. Models saved Once the line is selected the field is highlighted blue:
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M in memory with active HoTT-synchronization, also BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M known as Global Bound, have a yellow G to the right 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES of the model memory line. 02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
NO yellow G to the right of
04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
To view the model-type of other models saved in MODEL NAME 1 memory line = memory-spe-
05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES
memory, press to highlight any model name in the cific bound
06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY
Model Memory lines. For example, by pressing line Yellow G to the right of mod-
03 in the example below, the glider icon appears: MODEL NAME 1 G el memory line = transmit- Press the model-type icon:
ter-specific (global) bound
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
BACK STARLET NEXT Press
In the example below, Memory Lines 01, 02 and 03 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
01 STARLET SEL
are memory-specific HoTT-Synchronization; Memory 02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
02 BEAVER NEW
Lines 04, 05 and 06 have been switched to transmit- 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
ter-specific HoTT-Synchronisation: 04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
Press 05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW A selection window will pop up with two options:
BACK STARLET NEXT 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
01 STARLET SEL 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
02 BEAVER NEW 05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M 04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
Changing the HoTT-Synchronization Select
05 MODEL NAME 5 G global RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY Turn the transmitter's RF module off. 06 MODEL NAME 6 G NO CPY
Press to highlight on model memory line to be
Note that “Starlet” remains in the name bar at the top changed. For the example below, Model Memory 03
of the screen because it is still the currently active is being changed from Standard Memory to Global:
model.

Base menu - Model selection 39

Press  NO  to cancel. Press  GLOBAL  to change the CAUTION BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
selected model memory to Global (transmitter-specif- If a receiver system is accidentally 07 MODEL NAME 7 SEL
ic HoTT-Synchronization):
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
! turned on after a model memory
change, it will react to control move-
08
09
MODEL NAME 8
MODEL NAME 9
NEW
IMP.M
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL ments of every global-bound model memory as 10 MODEL NAME 10 EXP.M
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW soon as a valid signal is emitted from the trans- 11 MODEL NAME 11 RES
03 MODEL NAME 3 G IMP.M mitter. 12 MODEL NAME 12 CPY
04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
• Model-specific bound receivers react exclusively The screens are cyclical; pressing NEXT after reach-
05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES
to the signal coming from the specifically assigned ing the screen displaying Lines 25 - 30, the first screen
06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY
model memory. Accidentally using a non-specifi- will reappear, displaying Lines 01 - 06.
To change from Global to Standard (model-specific cally assigned model memory is NOT possible.
HoTT-Synchronization), then the selection window Receivers turned on after a model memory change NOTE: Pressing BACK will not recall the previous
appear as below: will automatically pass into Fail-Safe Mode. screen. Pressing BACK will bring up the last major
menu, e.g. either the BASE submenu display or the
BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT Tip Main Menu.
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
Refer to the Import/Export from SD Card section for
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
additional information regarding HoTT-Synchronization SEL (Change Model)
03 MODEL NAME 3 G IMP.M after the copying, importing or exporting process (page Press to highlight the Model Memory line to be made
04 MODEL NAME 4 G Select EXP.M 54). the active model. In this example Line 02 - Beaver:
05 MODEL NAME 5 G model RES
BACK STARLET NEXT
06 MODEL NAME 6 G NO CPY
 NEXT  (Page Change) 01 STARLET SEL
Touch  NO  to cancel. Press  MODEL  to change the Press the   NEXT  button at the top right cornier of 02 BEAVER NEW
selected model memory back to Model (model mem- the display to scroll through additional Model Memory 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
ory specific HoTT-Synchronization). Lines: 04
Press
MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
• NOTE: Re-bind all receivers after changing the BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
HoTT Synchronization! 01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

• Global bound receivers react to the signals of all 02 MODEL NAME 2

Press
NEW
Line 02 is highlighted blue:
of the global bound model memories saved in the 03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
transmitter. For safety reasons a model memory 04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M BACK STARLET NEXT
change is only possible if the receiver system is 05 MODEL NAME 5 G RES 01 STARLET SEL
turned off. 06 MODEL NAME 6 G CPY 02 BEAVER NEW
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
There are six lines per screen: 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

40 Base menu - Model selection

Press the SEL button on the right side of the display 000% 000%
NEW (Create New Model)
to Select the model: Warning
4.2V
Thr.HOLD Thr.CUT
000:00.0 Tips
BACK STARLET NEXT 000 000
Thr.POS PHASE • To view model memory lines 07 and higher, press
01 STARLET SEL 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
RC Signal Fail Safe not set the  NEXT  button.
02 BEAVER NEW M-1 000 000

Press Please select RF ON/OFF PHASE 1 • Change previously saved model memories by press-
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M MODEL NAME 1
EXP.M
ON OFF ing SEL .
04 MODEL NAME 4 BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
Maintain the RF transmissions by pressing   ON  To set up a new model, select an open model memory
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
button, or switch them off by pressing  OFF . If no line or an existing memory line to be reassigned. Press
Press   NO  to terminate the process or   YES  to action is taken the warning display will automati- the NEW button on the right side of the display:
change the model: cally disappear after a few seconds. BACK STARLET NEXT
• If no receiver is bound to the selected model mem- 01 STARLET SEL
BACK STARLET NEXT
ory the message "No receiver bound to TX!" with- 02 BEAVER NEW
01 STARLET SEL
in the following active warning display appears: 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
02 BEAVER NEW
000% 000% Press
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M Warning
4.2V 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
04 MODEL NAME 4 CHANGE EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 MODEL RES
Thr.HOLD
000
Thr.CUT
000 000:00.0 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
Press Thr.POS PHASE
06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 A selection window will appear with the option to pro-
Fail Safe not set

After pressing YES, the message "Please wait!!" will

M-1 000 000
No receiver bound to TX! PHASE 1 gram manually, use the setup wizard or press  NO  to
appear as the transmitter searches for bound receiv-
MODEL NAME 1
SET
exit:
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
ers: 000 000
BACK STARLET NEXT
Pressing the   SET  button opens the BASE sub- 01 STARLET SEL
BACK STARLET NEXT
menu TX ctl, where you can bind your receiver in 02 BEAVER NEW
01 STARLET SEL Select
the Bind ON/OFF line: 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
02 BEAVER NEW MAN. WIZ. NO
BACK TX ctl 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
RX1 RX2 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
04 MODEL NAME 4 MODELL EXP.M
Please
WECHSEL BIND ON/OFF OFF OFF 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
wait!!
J N TX OUT SET SET SET
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
RF ON/OFF OFF RF TYPE NORMAL
The next section, New Model Basic Settings - MAN-
• If a receiver is already bound to the selected mod- UAL, will focus on programming a fixed-wing model.
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
el memory and if the Thr.POS warning is inactive, DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
the RF module of the transmitter will automatically Refer to the New Model Basic Settings - WIZARD
turn on and the following active warning display Press the   BACK  button to return to the main section (page 44) for an example of programming a
appears: menu. helicopter.

Base menu - Model selection 41

Tip Press <  [DELETE] in the bottom row of the red key- Press the  MAN.  button at the top left to advance to
Refer to the New Model Basic Settings - WIZARD pad to erase a single character. the next selection screen:
section (page 44) for an example of programming a Press  <<  [CLEAR] to delete the entire selection. MAN.
helicopter. Current Model Name A B C D E F

New Model Basic Settings - MANUAL Characters appear in the blue field above the keypad: Press
BEAVER G H I J K L

MAN. Graubele New Model Name M N O P Q R

Current Model Name A B C D E F Graubele S T U V W X

BACK STARLET NEXT

BEAVER G H I J K L Y Z _ << < =
New Model Name M N O P Q R CAPS NUM SPECIAL
01 STARLET SEL
S T U V W X
02 BEAVER NEW
03 GRAUBELE
Select
IMP.M
Y Z _ << < = Model Type
MAN. WIZ. NO
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M CAPS NUM SPECIAL This example shows an electric motor fixed-wing.
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES Press the blue AIRPLANE icon:
Press
Press the  =  [ENTER] button on the bottom of the red
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
keypad to transfer the model name from the blue field Press

Both the Manual and Wizard options follow the same into the Model Memory Name field at left:
predefined procedure. After pressing  MAN. the key- MAN. Graubele

pad display appears: Current Model Name A B C D E F HELICOPTER AIRPLANE GLIDER

BEAVER G H I J K L
Model Name
New Model Name M N O P Q R
MAN. S T U V W X CAR COPTER BOAT
A B C D E F
Current Model Name
Y _
Z Press<< < = Pressing the model icon will bring up the wing type
BEAVER G H I J K L
CAPS NUM SPECIAL menu:
New Model Name M N O P Q R
S T U V W X The name is now entered in the New Model Name Wing Type
Y Z _ << < = field: Press to select the icon that corresponds to the num-
CAPS NUM SPECIAL MAN.
ber of aileron and flap servos on the model:
Current Model Name A B C D E F
A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for each WING Type NORMAL
BEAVER G H I J K L
model name.
New Model Name M N O P Q R
To toggle between uppercase and lowercase press
Graubele S T U V W X
the  CAPS  button at the bottom edge of the red key-
pad.
Y Z _ << < =
1AILE 1AILE 1FLAP 2AILE 2AILE 1FLAP

CAPS NUM SPECIAL

Press the   NUM  button bring up the numbers and
punctuation keypad. 2AILE 2FLAP 2AILE 4FLAP 4AILE 2FLAP 4AILE 4FLAP

Press the   SPECIAL  button to bring up a special

characters keypad.
Press the [Space] key on the red keypad to enter
a space.
42 Base menu - Model selection
Press the button to the right of the Wing Type line
to switch between delta/flying fixed-wing models. A
different submenu appears depending on if the model
is  NORMAL  or  DELTA :
Wing Type DELTA
Tip
The default for "Motor  Off" or "Idle"  is  Rear Thro Posi-
tion. This can be changed to Front Thro Position for
fixed-wing models by inverting the control curve in the
BASE submenu Throttle Curve (page 128).

Pressing the propulsion icon brings up an Overview

Display showing all settings selected. To save, press
2AILE 2AILE 1FLAP 2AILE 2FLAP the  ENT  button at the right bottom:

M/TYPE W/TYPE P/TYPE

2AILE 4FLAP 4AILE 2FLAP 4AILE 4FLAP
NORMAL

Pressing the wing icon will bring up the tail type menu: 2A
T/TYPE
Tail Type AIRPLANE ELE.POWER

NORMAL
Press the blue icon that corresponds to the model's
ENT
tail type:
Pressing ENT brings up the BASE submenu display:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

NORMAL V-TAIL 2ELEVATOR

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo

Pressing the tail icon will bring up the propulsion type CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
menu:
Propulsion Type
Press the blue icon that corresponds to the model's
motor type:

ELECTRIC POWER GAS POWER

Base menu - Model selection 43

 New Model Basic Settings - WIZARD BACK Graubele NEXT
Model Name
01 STARLET SEL WIZ.
02 Graubele NEW A B C D E F
First-time users should utilize the Wizard function until Current Model Name

comfortable inputting the information manually. 03 EXTRA 360 IMP.M MODEL NAME 4 G H I J K L
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M M N O P Q R
The following example will describe programming a New Model Name

05 MODEL NAME 5 RES

helicopter model. Refer to the New Model Basic S T U V W X

Settings - WIZARD section (page 42) for an example 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY Y Z _ << < =

of programming a fixed-wing. A selection window will appear with the option to pro- CAPS NUM SPECIAL

gram manually, use the setup wizard or press  NO  to A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for each
Both the Manual and Wizard options follow the same exit. Model-type specific configuration options will model name.
predefined procedure. appear based on the model icon chosen. The follow- To toggle between uppercase and lowercase press
ing example will describe programming a helicopter the  CAPS  button at the bottom edge of the red key-
Tip model. Press the  WIZ.  button:
Some of the sub-menus offer phase-specific settings. pad.
Each phase is indicated in the top left of the screen in BACK Graubele NEXT Press the   NUM  button bring up the numbers and
green PHASE #, as shown below: 01 STARLET SEL punctuation keypad.
02 Graubele
Select
NEW Press the   SPECIAL  button to bring up a special
03 EXTRA 360 IMP.M characters keypad.
MAN. WIZ. NO
WIZ. PHASE 1 D/R,EXP 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M Press the [Space] key on the red keypad to enter
CH ROLL 05 MODEL NAME 5
Press RES a space.
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY Switch to the desired symbols chart and tap on the
D/R +100% +100% INC first character of the model name.
EXP 000% 000% RES Tip All other characters can be entered in the same man-
DEC
CTL NULL
Refer to the New Model Basic Settings - WIZARD ner. A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for
SYM OFF
section (page 42) for an example of programming a a model name.
The setup wizard only allows "Phase 1" settings. For fixed-wing. Press <  [DELETE] in the bottom row of the red key-
more information on the different phases, refer to the pad to erase a single character.
Phase section (page 120). Both the Manual and Wizard options follow the same Press  <<  [CLEAR] to delete the entire selection.
predefined procedure. After pressing  WIZ. the key-
To set up a new model, select an open model memory pad display appears: Characters appear in the blue field above the keypad:
line or an existing memory line to be reassigned. Press
WIZ. COBRA
the NEW button on the right side of the display:
Current Model Name A B C D E F
MODEL NAME 4 G H I J K L
New Model Name M N O P Q R
S T U V W X
Y Z _ << < =
CAPS NUM SPECIAL

44 Base menu - Model selection

 Model Type to the FUNCTION submenu Swash section (page
Press the  =  [ENTER] button on the bottom of the red 172) for more information.)
This example shows helicopter model. Press the blue
keypad to transfer the model name from the blue field
HELICOPTER icon: • 2SERVO 180
to the New Model Name field at left:
WIZ. COBRA

Current Model Name A B C D E F

MODEL NAME 4 G H I J K L
2
New Model Name M N O P Q R HELICOPTER AIRPLANE GLIDER

S T U V W X 1

_
Press
Y Z Press<< < = The swashplate is shifted axially for the pitch con-
CAPS NUM SPECIAL
CAR COPTER BOAT trol by means of two roll servos; the nick control
Pressing the model icon will bring up the swashplate is decoupled by means of a mechanical compen-
The name is new entered in the New Model Name sation rocker.
type menu:
field:
• 3S 120(Roll)
Swashplate Type
WIZ.
Current Model Name A B C D E F Press to select the icon that corresponds to the num-
MODEL NAME 4 G H I J K L ber of swashplate servos on the model:
New Model Name M N O P Q R
2 3
COBRA S T U V W X
Y Z _ << < =
1

CAPS NUM SPECIAL Symmetrical three-point control of the swash-

plate by means of three articulations points offset
Press the  WIZ.  button at the top left of the screen to by 120°, by means of which  one nick servo (front
advance to the next display: or rear)  and two roll servos (to the left and right
WIZ. side) are connected. All of the three servos of the
Current Model Name A B C D E F
• 1SERVO NOR swashplate shift axially for pitch control.
Press NAME 4
MODEL G H I J K L • 3SERVO 140
New Model Name M N O P Q R
COBRA S T U V W X
Y Z _ << < = 2
CAPS NUM SPECIAL
This option is for a flybar system, or where the 2 3
swashplate is tilted by a roll and nick servo. One 1
separate servo is used for the pitch control. Asymmetrical three-point control of the swash-
(Most flybar system helicopter models with only plate by means of three articulations points offset,
one pitch servo that have three swashplate ser- by means of which  one nick servo (rear) and two
vos for pitch, nick and roll also operate without a roll servos (to the left side and right front) are con-
mix of functions in the transmitter. These options nected. All of the three servos of the swashplate
do not appear on the multifunction menu. Refer shift axially for pitch control.
Base menu - Model selection 45
• 3S 120(Nick) REV/SUB (Servo Reverse/Servo Sub Trim) Notices
SUB.TR
• It is only possibility to reverse the direction of
WIZ. REV SERVO
the servos connected to the output 6 (CH6)
CH 1. NOR 000%
in a helicopter model and the output 1 (CH1)
CH 2. NOR 000% NEXT
1
3
in the other types if matched with the differ-
CH 3. NOR 000% INC
2
ent building cases. If not matched, the ac-
CH 4. NOR 000% RES
tive warning during transmitter turn-on will
Symmetrical three-point axis as before, but rotat- CH 5. NOR 000% DEC
not function properly. It is only possible to
ed 90°; one roll servo  on the side, and two  nick CH 6. NOR 000%
change the value field by confirming YES to
servos, front and rear. the "SURE?" active warning pop-up.
• 4SERVO 90 Tip • Independent of trim controls and any mix
In order to set control  channels with numbers higher settings, the neutral position can be shifted
than CH6, press  NEXT  [change page]. around ±125% within the maximum servo
travel of ±150%. The servo is always adjusted
2 Press the related button to set the directions, left col- directly independent of all other trim and mix
5 3 umn (REV), and the neutral positions, right column settings.
1 (SUB.TR), of each phase specific servo. In the follow-
ing example servo 8 is changed by pressing CH 8 line, Note that if the neu- Servo travel
Four-point control of the swashplate by means of
REV column: tral position  is ad- Cen
tre adjustment
two roll servos and two nick servos.
justed  strongly,  ser-
Pressing the swashplate icon will bring up the propul- WIZ. REV SUB.TR SERVO vo travel on one side
sion type menu: CH 7. NOR 000% may be restricted 
Propulsion Type CH 8. NOR 000% NEXT since the total travel
Press the blue icon that corresponds to the model's
CH 9. NOR 000% INC is limited to ±150%
Press
motor type:
CH 10. NOR 000% RES for electronic and
CH 11. NOR 000% DEC mechanical reasons.
CH 12. NOR 000%

Servo 8 is now changed from NOR to REV: Press the  WIZ. button to bring up the E.P.A display:

WIZ. REV SUB.TR SERVO

ELECTRIC POWER GAS POWER CH 7. NOR 000%

CH 8. REV 000% NEXT
CH 9. NOR 000% INC
CH 10. NOR 000% RES
Pressing the motor icon will bring up a model-depen-
CH 11. NOR 000% DEC
dent display:
CH 12. NOR 000%

46 Base menu - Model selection

E.P.A (Servo Travel/Limit) WIZ. E.P.A
Conversely, the effect of the control around neutral
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150%
position increases for values less than 0% and de-
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT
creases in the direction of the full deflection. The pro-
WIZ. E.P.A
INC
gression can be set from -100% to +100%; 0% cor-
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150% CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150%
responds to the normal linear control characteristic.
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% RES
CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150% DEC
The EXP setting always acts directly on the  corre-
CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150% INC
sponding control function independent of whether
CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% – LIMIT – TRAVEL+ LIMIT +
RES
it affects the individual servo or several servos by
DEC
CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150%
Press the  INC  button at the right edge of the display means of complex mixing and coupling functions.
– LIMIT – TRAVEL+ LIMIT +
to increase the value of the active option field. Press By default, the dual rate and/or expo values are set
the  DEC  button to reduce the value of the active op- for each control side. Press to change the option SYM
Tip tion field. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed from  OFF  to  ON :
Press the  NEXT  button on the right side of the display value back to the default. Alternatively, press the ar- D/R,EXP
WIZ. PHASE 1
to scroll through the channel screens. row keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to
CH ROLL
achieve the same increase/decrease result.
The travel and limitation are shown separately for Once all you have adjusted all of your servos, press
D/R +100% +100% INC
each side in this display. The setting range in both the  WIZ.  button to bring up the D/R,EXP display:
EXP Press
000% 000% RES
cases is 0 - 150% of normal travel.
D/R,EXP (Dual Rate/Expo) CTL NULL DEC
The set values always refer to the settings in the BASE
submenu REV/SUB (page 64). The dual rate/expo function allows you to switch or SYM OFF

To change a value, touch the desired option field, for influence the control deflections and characteristics
A symmetrical (joint) setting of both control sides is
example: for the control functions of roll, nick and tail rotor, i.e.
now possible.
control functions 2 - 4 through switch.
WIZ. E.P.A The curve characteristics are shown in the graphic on
Dual Rate allow one or more controls to have less (or
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150% the left of the display screen the curve characteristics
more) control authority at the flick of a switch.
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT are shown directly.
The control deflections can be set for each switch
CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150% INC
position between 0 and 125% of the normal control Tip
CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% RES
Press
travel. These options and settings can be changed via the
CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150% DEC
EXP (exponential curve) limits how much the servo FUNCTION submenus PHASE and D/R,EXP (page
– LIMIT – TRAVEL+ LIMIT +
moves within programmed stick parameters. This is 120 and 124).
The selected field will highlight blue: used to help slow down the servos reaction to stick
input, allowing a more sensitive model control in the Programming
central position of the respective control function (roll,
nick and tail rotor) for values greater than 0% without To enter programming parameters on the different
having to do without the complete deflection in the ROLL, NICK and TAIL channels, press the button to
end position of the control stick. the right of the CH (channel) line:

Base menu - Model selection 47

 WIZ. PHASE 1 D/R,EXP WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV Basic Operating Steps
CH ROLL Pitch min. BACK TRIM • Button  ST OFF  /  ST ON 
Curve OFF Press this button to turn the graphic and nu-
D/R
Press
+100% +100% INC
Press
IN –100% INC meric display of the control stick position on
EXP 000% 000% RES OUT –100% and off, as shown below:
CTL NULL DEC POINT L –100% DEC PIT.CRV
WIZ. NORMAL
SYM OFF ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
Curve OFF
Press the  INC  button at the right edge of the display Pressing the button will bring up an active warning:
IN +050% INC
to increase the value of the active option field. Press PIT.CRV
WIZ. NORMAL
the  DEC  button to reduce the value of the active op- OUT +050%
Pitch min. BACK TRIM
tion field. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed Warning
POINT ? 000% DEC
KURVE AUS
value back to the default. Alternatively, press the ar- ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
SURE?
EIN –100% INC
row keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to
YES NO
AUS –100% With the control element (gas/pitch control
achieve the same increase/decrease result.
POINT L –100% DEC stick), a vertical green line is moved synchro-
The adjustment range is ±125 % in the D/R line and nously in the graph between the two endpoints
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
±100 % in the EXP line. "L" and "H". The momentary control stick po-
To switch between two variants, assign a switch or a Press  NO  to terminate the procedure. Press  YES  sition (input) is displayed numerically in the IN
control in the CTL line. Refer the Control and Switch to confirm the procedure and reverse the move- line (-100 % to +100 %). The intersection of this
Assignment section (page 26) for more information. ment direction of the pitch stick WITHOUT any vi- line with the curve (output) is displayed numer-
Press the  WIZ. button to bring up the PIT.CRV dis- sual changes in the display: ically in the OUT line and can be varied at the
play: WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV support points between -125% and +125%. A
PIT.CRV (Pitch Curve) Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM control signal changed in this way affects all of
the following mixing and coupling functions:
Use the Pitch min line to adjust the movement di- Curve OFF

rection of the pitch stick. The remaining options will IN –100% INC •  ENT  Button
adjust the pitch curve. OUT –100% Press the button at the bottom right of the dis-
1. Stick Direction POINT L –100% DEC play to set up to 5 additional points between
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT the two endpoints "L" and "H".
To reverse the control direction of the pitch con-
trol stick from the standard pre-set position "pitch In the following example, the control stick is ex-
2. Pitch Curve Settings actly between the middle and end of its path,
min back" to "pitch min forward", and vice versa,
press the   BACK  or   FORWARD  button in the Tip at +50% of the control path, and generates an
"Pitch min" line: output signal that is also +50% due to the lin-
These options and settings can be changed via the
ear characteristic.
FUNCTION submenu PHASE (page 120).

48 Base menu - Model selection

Between the two endpoints "L" and "H", up to Once the support point number and value ap- Press the X-axis button again to deactivate
5 additional support points can be set, and the pear in the POINT line, delete the point by the function and save the setting.
distance between neighboring support points touching the  ENT  button, as shown below:
may not be less than approximately 25%. Tips
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV
Move the control stick. As long as a "?" is next • If you move the red point horizontally away
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
to the POINT line, you can set the next sup- from the current control position, the point
Curve OFF
port point by touching the  ENT  button. Once becomes green after a short while, and a
IN 000% INC
a POINT value is entered, the "?" is replaced "?" appears  in the POINT line. This ques-
with a number:
OUT 000%
Press tion mark does not relate to the point which
POINT 2 000% DEC has been moved but rather indicates that
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT another point can be set at the current
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM control position.
Curve OFF WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV
• Remember that the input/output percent-
ON +050% INC Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
ages in the IN and OUT lines always refer
OUT +050% Curve OFF
to the momentary position of the control
POINT 1 +050% DEC IN 000% INC
stick and not to the position of the point.
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT OUT 000%

The support points can be entered in any order

POINT ? 000% DEC •  Y-axis  Button (Y-axis)
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
between the "L" and "H" endpoints; they will be To activate this function, press to highlight
automatically renumbered sequentially from left the  Y-axis button at the bottom of the dis-
Changing the Support Point Value play.
to right after each point is set, as shown in the
example below: •  X-axis  Button (X-axis) Move the selected (red) point to the top with
To activate this function, press to highlight the   INC  button, and to the bottom with
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV
the  X-axis button at the bottom of the dis- the  DEC button, as shown below:
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
play. WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV
Curve OFF
INC
Move the selected (red) point to the right Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
IN –050%
with the   INC  button, and to the left with Curve OFF
OUT –050%
the  DEC button, as shown below: IN –044% INC
POINT 1 –050% DEC
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV OUT +027%

Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM POINT 2 +044% DEC

Deleting a Support Point Curve OFF ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
In order to delete the set support points 1 to IN 000% INC
5, use the control stick to move the vertical Press the  Y-axis button again to deactivate
OUT 000%
line next to the point to be deleted. Selected the function and save the setting.
POINT 2 000% DEC
points will turn red. ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

Base menu - Model selection 49

 Tip •  TRIM  Button WIZ.
Remember that the input/output percentages in The mz-24 Pro transmitter software has a CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
the IN and OUT lines always refer to the momen- function that is integrated in the helicopter pro- NONE NONE L 1
tary position of the control stick and not to the gram for trimming during flight up to six sup- NONE NONE
Select
KEIN 1 INC
position of the point. port points of the two options "throttle curve" NONE NONE NO
KEIN 1
RES
CLR
and "pitch curve". NONE NONE KEIN 1
DEC
NONE NONE L 1
Rounding Off the Throttle Curve Open the following window by touching NONE NONE L 1
the  TRIM  button at the top right edge of the
• Curve Line  ON/OFF  Button Press to scroll through the control options.
display:
The default angled curve profile can be au- In this example, the right proportional rotary
tomatically rounded off by turning on the WIZ.
control SL1 is selected:
rounding function by pressing the  ON/OFF  CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
NONE NONE L 1
button in the Curve line, as shown below: WIZ.
NONE NONE L 1 CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
INC
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV NONE NONE L 1 SL 1 NONE L 1
RES
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM NONE NONE L 1 NONE NONE L 1
DEC INC
NONE NONE L 1 NONE NONE L 1
Curve OFF
NONE NONE L 1 RES
INC NONE NONE L 1
IN –044%
Press DEC
NONE NONE L 1
OUT +027%
Basic Operating Steps NONE NONE L 1
POINT 2 +044% DEC
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT • CTL Column • MIXER Column
Use the first column to select a control that Use the second column to select individu-
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV appears suitable for the controls offered by al helicopter mixers, or one of the two avail-
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM the transmitter. able mixers in any combination.
Curve ON To assign a control, press the button in the To select a mixer, press the button in the
IN –044% INC CTL column along the appropriate row: MIXER column along the appropriate row:
OUT +027%
WIZ. WIZ.
POINT 2 +044% DEC
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT NONE NONE L 1 SL 1 NONE L 1
Select
NONE NONE KEIN 1 NONE NONE L 1
INC INC
Press NO
Notice NONE NONE KEIN 1
RES NONE Press
NONE L 1
NONE NONE CLR
KEIN 1 RES
The curves portrayed here are for demon- NONE NONE L 1
DEC DEC
NONE NONE L 1 NONE NONE L 1
stration purposes only and do not repre- NONE NONE L 1 NONE NONE L 1
sent real pitch curves.
An active warning window will appear: The button will highlight blue:

50 Base menu - Model selection

 WIZ.
To scroll through the available points (L, 1 to • PHASE Column
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
5 or H), press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons on To activate the governor during a specif-
SL 1 NONE L 1 the right side of the display. In the example ic phase, the phase must be selected. The
NONE NONE L 1 INC
below, support point #3 is selected: phase number corresponds to the phase
NONE NONE L 1
RES WIZ.
number set in the FUNCTION submenu
NONE NONE L 1
DEC CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
PHASE.
NONE NONE L 1
NONE NONE L 1
SL 1 THR.CRV 3 1 To select a phase other than the default
NONE NONE L 1 INC Phase1, press to highlight the button in the
To scroll through the available mixers, press NONE NONE L 1
RES
PHASE column along the appropriate row:
the  INC  or  DEC  buttons on the right side NONE NONE L 1
DEC
NONE NONE L 1 WIZ.
of the display. In the example below, THR.
NONE NONE L 1 CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
CRV is selected: SL 1 THR.CRV 3 1
WIZ. Press the RES button to reset the changed NONE NONE L 1 INC
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE value field back to the default value (L). NONE NONE L 1
RES
SL 1 THR.CRV L 1 NONE NONE L 1

NONE NONE L 1
Notice NONE NONE L 1
DEC
INC
NONE NONE L 1 The associated controller does not NONE NONE L 1
RES
NONE NONE L 1 have any effect if an undefined point is To scroll through the available phases, press
DEC
NONE NONE L 1 selected (in the basic version of the rel- the   INC  or   DEC  buttons on the right
NONE NONE L 1 evant curve mixers, only the points "L" and side of the display. In the example below,
Press the RES button to reset the changed "H" are set). Phase3 is selected:
value field back to the default value (NONE).
WIZ.
• POINT Column CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
If one or more mixers are selected, the sup- SL 1 THR.CRV 3 3
port points to be trimmed must be specified. NONE NONE L 1 INC
NONE NONE L 1
To select a point, press to highlight the but- RES
NONE NONE L 1
ton in the POINT column along the appro- DEC
NONE NONE L 1
priate row: NONE NONE L 1
WIZ.
Press the RES button to reset the changed
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
SL 1 THR.CRV L 1
value field back to the default value (1).
NONE NONE L 1 INC Notice
NONE NONE L 1
NONE NONE L 1
RES These options and settings directly affect
NONE NONE L 1
DEC the TRIM display options found in the
NONE NONE L 1 FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV (page
128).

Base menu - Model selection 51

 Press the  WIZ. button to return to the Pitch Curve THR.CRV (Throttle Curve) Notice
display: The throttle curve can be specified by assigning up to The associated controller does not have any ef-
WIZ. 7 support points, along the entire control stick travel: fect if an undefined point is selected (in the basic
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
version of the relevant curve mixers, only the
WIZ. NORMAL THR.CRV
Press
SL 1 THR.CRV 3 3 points "L" and "H" are set).
THR.Limit OFF TRIM
NONE NONE L 1 INC Curve OFF
NONE NONE L 1
RES IN –100% INC Tips
NONE NONE L 1
NONE NONE L 1
DEC OUT –100% These options and settings directly affect the TRIM
NONE NONE L 1 POINT L –100% DEC display options found in the FUNCTION submenu
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT PIT.CRV (page 154).
Press the  WIZ.  button again to advance to the Throt-
tle Curve display: These options, settings and phase-specific throttle
Support points can be set, changed and deleted in curve functions can be changed via the FUNCTION
WIZ. NORMAL PIT.CRV the same manner as described in the previous Pitch submenu PHASE (page 120).
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM Curve section. First specify the throttle curve using
Press
three points: the two end points "L" and "H", in addi- Press the  WIZ.  button again to advance to the Gyro/
Curve ON
tion to the set point "1" in the control center. These Governor display:
IN –044% INC
OUT +027%
three points harmonize the motor performance curve Gyr/Gover (Gyro/Governor)
POINT 2 +044% DEC
with the pitch curve. Initial basic settings are needed for the gyro and/or
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
Tip any governor used in the model.
The value shown to the right of the THR.Limit line indi- WIZ. NORMAL Gyr/Gover

cates the status or the position of the throttle limit.

Gyro Suppression 000%
Refer to the FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV section Gyro Gain 000% INC
(page 160) for additional information about setting Governor ACT INH RES
throttle curves. Governor RATE 050% DEC

WIZ.
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
SL 1 THR.CRV 3 3 Tip
NONE NONE L 1 INC These options, settings and phase-specific values can
NONE NONE L 1
NONE NONE L 1
RES be changed via the FUNCTION submenu PHASE (page
NONE NONE L 1
DEC 120).
NONE NONE L 1

52 Base menu - Model selection

• Gyro Suppression Line
Notice
This option may  not function with current
standard gyro systems and render the heli-
copter impossible to fly. Consult the gyro set-
ting instructions for compatibility.
This option can influence the effect of the gyro
sensor (gyroscope) as the tail rotor control stick
is moved, assuming that a gyro system is used in
which the gyro's effect can be set by the trans-
mitter using an additional channel (CH 7 in the
Graupner remote-control system). The gyro sup-
pression reduces the gyro's effect in a linear man-
ner in proportion to the deflection of the tail rotor
control stick corresponding to the set value. If the
gyro has not been suppressed (at a value of 0%),
the gyro's effect remains independent of the con-
trol stick deflection.
However, the gyro's effect can be varied smooth-
ly between a minimum and maximum using a con-
trol assigned in the Gyro line in the BASE submenu
CTL Set (for example with one of the proportion-
al  dials DVx). For more information refer to the
Gyro/Governor section (page 166).
• Gyro Gain Line
Most of the current gyro systems can be adjusted
for a smooth, proportional effect; the transmitter
allows for a choice between two different modes
of action.
If the gyro being used has one of these options,
the alternative offset setting enables both the nor-
mal gyro gain and "heading lock mode" as well as
flying with maximum stabilization in normal, slow
fights within this selected mode, and reducing the
gyro gain in fast roundtrips and aerobatics.
Values up to ±125% are possible, as shown below:
WIZ. NORMAL Gyr/Gover
Gyro Suppression 000%
Gyro Gain +023% INC
Governor ACT INH RES
Governor RATE 050% DEC
Based on these phase specific settings (offset) the
gyro gain can also be proportionally varied with a
control assigned in the CH 7 line in the BASE sub-
menu CTL Set, (for example the proportional dial
DVx).
Attention
• This option may  not function with current
standard gyro systems and render the he-
licopter impossible to fly. Consult the gyro
setting instructions for compatibility.
• Note that the offset values entered in this
option  as well as in the CH 7 line of the
BASE sub-menu CTL Set must add up!
For ease of use, make sure to only enter
or change an offset value in one of the two
options.
• Governor ACT Line
In contrast to speed controllers that only regulate
performance like a carburetor, governors maintain
a constant speed in the system they are monitor-
ing by independently regulating the provided out-
put. Like cruise control in cars, in an ICE helicopter
a governor controls the throttle servo in the same
way as the speed controller of an electric motor he-
licopter. Governors therefore only require a speed
setting and not a classic throttle curve. A deviation
from the set speed occurs when the required out-
put exceeds the maximum available output.
To change the current value, touch the desired but-
ton in the Governor ACR line. The display switch-
es from  INH  (inhibit/off) to  ON  and vice versa, as
shown below:
WIZ. NORMAL Gyr/Gover
Gyro Suppression 000%
Gyro Gain +023% INC
Governor ACT ON RES
Governor RATE 050% DEC
• Governor RATE Line
In the BASE submenu CTL Set GOVERNOR line,
if the function Governor at CH8 is switched on: in
the Governor RATE line, enter the appropriate off-
set value for the desired rotor speed. The value to
be set depends on the governor that is used as
well as the desired target speed, and can of course
be varied for specific phases, for example:
Base menu - Model selection 53
 WIZ. NORMAL Gyr/Gover
Tip  IMP.M  (Import From SD Card)
There is an alternative emergency off option in the BASE Once a memory card is inserted into an operational
Gyro Suppression 000% submenu Throttle Cut (page 66). transmitter, a blue memory card icon appears at the
Gyro Gain +023% INC top right of the main display:
Press the  WIZ.  button again to advance to the final 000% 000%
Governor ACT ON RES
display: 4.2V
Governor RATE 067% DEC

000 000 000:00.0

M/TYPE SWASH P/TYPE

With a control assigned in the CH 8 line of the 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0

BASE sub-menu CTL Set, for example the propor- M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
tional dial DVx, this value can also be proportion- MODELLNAME 1
HELICOPTER 3 Sv(140°) ELE.POWER
ally varied. BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000

Press the  WIZ.  button again to advance to the Throt- ENT To import compatible models into the transmitter
tle Hold display: memory from the memory card, open the BASE sub-
Press the  ENT  button to return to the BASE menu. menu Model Sel:
THR.HOLD (Throttle Hold)
During competition, is expected that gas engines be BACK STARLET NEXT
completely turned off. In the training phase, this is a 01 STARLET SEL
bit inconvenient since it would be necessary to restart 02 BEAVER NEW
the engine after each autorotation training landing. 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
(Refer to FUNCTION sub-menu THR.HOLD (page 04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
170) for additional information.) 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
To make the appropriate settings during the training 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
phase so the gas engine can be kept idling during the
autorotation phase without the clutch engaging or so Choose from the list of empty model memories. For
any electric drive is definitely off, as shown below: this example Line 04: MODEL NAME 4 has been se-
lected. Press to select and highlight the field blue:
WIZ. THR.HOLD
BACK STARLET NEXT
01 STARLET SEL

INC 02 BEAVER NEW

ACT INH
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
CTL ON RES
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
  SET –100% DEC
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

Press the  IMP.M  button in the middle of the right col-

umn to switch to the display of the data model saved
on the SD card:

54 Base menu - Model selection

 BACK STARLET NEXT
Tip Tips
01 STARLET SEL
The recall of each model type of the models saved on If a memory specific bound (and at the same time
Press
02 BEAVER NEW
the memory card is performed as described in the BASE assigned to the SD card, eventually for safety rea-
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
submenu Model Type Display section (page 60). sons) model is loaded again on the originally model
04 MODEL NAME 4 EXP.M
memory of the same transmitter, the receiver binding
Touch  NO  to terminate the action and return to the will always be functional.
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
start page. Press  YES  to confirm import: If, in contrast, the same model is copied in another
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
BACK SD card data model memory or in a completely different transmit-
BACK SD card data 01 E-HELI SEL ter, the receiver MUST be bound again to the trans-
01 E-HELI SEL 02 ALPINA 3001 NEW mitter.
02 ALPINA 3001 NEW 03 EPSILON IMP.M • If a transmitter specific bound (and at the same time
03 EPSILON IMP.M 04 RACECOPTER SOURCE 02 EXP.M
Press
assigned to the SD card, eventually for safety rea-
04 RACECOPTER SOURCE EXP.M 05 BEAGLE TARGET 04 RES sons) model is loaded again on another model mem-
05 BEAGLE TARGET 04 RES 06 YES NO CPY ory of the same transmitter, the receiver binding will
06 YES NO CPY always be functional.
The message "Please Wait!" will appear while the in-
If, in contrast, the same model is copied in another
Press to select the model to be imported from the SD formation is being transferred:
transmitter, the receiver MUST be bound again to the
memory card, for example: BACK SD card data transmitter.
BACK SD card data 01 E-HELI SEL
Press
01 E-HELI SEL 02 ALPINA 3001 NEW
02 ALPINA 3001 NEW 03 EPSILON IMP.M
03 EPSILON IMP.M 04 RACECOPTER SOURCE 02 EXP.M
PLEASE
04 RACECOPTER SOURCE EXP.M 05 BEAGLE TARGET 04 RES
WAIT!
05 BEAGLE TARGET 04 RES 06 J N CPY

06 YES NO CPY
Once the process is completed, the warning message
The field of the model to be imported will highlight will disappear, and the display returns to the transmi-
blue. The model type icon will automatically change trer's list of model memories. The imported memory
accordingly. In the information window the source is seen in memory Line 04:
number appears (in red) of the memory line to import: BACK STARLET NEXT
BACK SD card data 01 STARLET SEL
01 E-HELI SEL 02 BEAVER NEW
02 ALPINA 3001 NEW 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
03 EPSILON IMP.M 04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
04 RACECOPTER SOURCE 02 EXP.M 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
05 BEAGLE TARGET 04 RES 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

06 YES NO CPY

Base menu - Model selection 55

 EXP.M (Export to SD Card) From the list of saved models, select the memory to BACK STARLET NEXT
Use this option to export models saved in the trans- be exported. In the example below, Memory Line 02 01 STARLET SEL
mitter to a memory card inserted into the transmitter's "Beaver" will be exported. Press to highlight the field.
02 BEAVER NEW
card slot. The binding information of the exported The color of the field highlights blue:
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
model memories remain intact. BACK STARLET NEXT 04 ALPINA 3001 SD CARD EXP.M
Press
01 STARLET SEL 05 MODEL NAME 5 EXPORT? RES
Tip
02 BEAVER NEW 06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY
Information about HoTT-Synchronisation of a model
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
memory after importing from an SD card can be found in The message "Please Wait!" appears while the model
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
the previous pages, in the notices under  IMP.M  (page memory is exported to the SD card:
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
55).
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY BACK STARLET NEXT

Once a memory card is in an operational transmitter, Press the  EXP.M  button on the right side of the dis-
01 STARLET SEL

a blue memory card icon appears at the top right of play:

02 BEAVER NEW

the main display: 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M

000% 000% BACK STARLET NEXT 04 ALPINA 3001 SD-CARD EXP.M
PLEASE
4.2V 01 STARLET SEL 05 MODEL NAME 5 EXPORT? RES
WAIT!
02 BEAVER NEW 06 MODEL NAME 6 J N CPY
000 000 000:00.0 Press
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 EXP.M
Once the process is completed, the message will dis-
04 ALPINA 3001
M-1 000 000 appear and returns to the Model Sel display:
PHASE 1 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
MODELLNAME 1
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY BACK STARLET NEXT
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 01 STARLET SEL
A pop-up box appears:
To export model settings from the transmitter memo- 02 BEAVER NEW

ry onto the memory card, insert an SD card into the BACK STARLET NEXT 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
transmitter and open the BASE submenu Model Sel: 01 STARLET SEL 04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
02 BEAVER NEW 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
BACK STARLET NEXT
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
01 STARLET SEL
04 ALPINA 3001 SD CARD EXP.M
02 BEAVER NEW
05 MODEL NAME 5 EXPORT? RES
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES Press  NO  to terminate the action or press on  YES 
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY to confirm transfer.

56 Base menu - Model selection

 RES  (Delete Model) BACK STARLET NEXT
If the model currently in use has been initialized, an
To reset an assigned model memory using the  RES  01 STARLET SEL
additional pop-up box will appear:
button, open the BASE submenu Model Sel: 02 BEAVER NEW BACK MODEL NAME 2 NEXT

BACK STARLET NEXT 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 01 STARLET SEL

SEL 04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M 02 MODEL NAME 2 BIND N/A NEW

01 STARLET INITIALIZE
05 MODEL NAME 5 SURE RES 03 GRAUBELE OK IMP.M
02 BEAVER NEW
06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY 04 ALPINA 3001 Fail Safe EXP.M
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
not
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
Press  NO  to terminate the action or press  YES  to set
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES initialize:
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
BACK STARLET NEXT
Pressing   OK  opens BASE submenu TX ctl, where
Select the model memory to be deleted from the list. 01 STARLET SEL
the receiver can be re-bound. The message "FAIL
In the example below, the Model Memory 02 "Beaver" 02 BEAVER NEW
SAFE NOT SET" indicates the fail safe function will
will be deleted. Press to highlight the name. The field need to be reset as well.
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
highlights blue: 04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
If no action is taken, the pop-up box will disappear
Press
INITIALIZE
05 MODEL NAME 5 SURE RES
after a few seconds.
BACK STARLET NEXT
06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY
01 STARLET SEL Notice
02 BEAVER NEW
The message "Please Wait!" appears while the infor- The Restore function cannot be reversed. All the
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
mation is being deleted: data in the selected model memory will be per-
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M manently deleted.
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES BACK STARLET NEXT

06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY 01 STARLET SEL

02 BEAVER NEW
Press the RES button on the right side of the display: 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
BACK STARLET NEXT SPEICHER
PLEASE
SEL 05 MODEL NAME 5 INIT.? RES
01 STARLET WAIT!
06 MODEL NAME 6 J N CPY
02 BEAVER NEW
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
Press Once the process is completed, the messages will
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
disappear and returns to the Model Sel display. Line
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES 02 now reads the default title "MODEL NAME 2":
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
BACK STARLET NEXT
A pop-up box appears: 01 STARLET SEL
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

Base menu - Model selection 57

 CPY  (Copy Model Memory) BACK STARLET NEXT BACK STARLET NEXT
To use the  CPY  button to duplicate a saved model 01 STARLET SEL 01 STARLET SEL
memory to another model memory line by opening the 02 BEAVER NEW 02 BEAVER NEW
BASE submenu Model Sel: 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M

BACK STARLET NEXT 04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M 04 ALPINA 3001 SOURCE 02 EXP.M
Press Press
01 STARLET SEL 05 MODEL NAME 5 RES 05 MODEL NAME 5 TARGET 05 RES

02 BEAVER NEW 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY 06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY

03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
A pop-up box appears verifying Line 02 as the source The message "Please Wait!" appears indicating the
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
memory to be copied: information is being copied:
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY BACK STARLET NEXT BACK STARLET NEXT
01 STARLET SEL 01 STARLET SEL
02 BEAVER NEW 02 BEAVER NEW
Tips
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
• If a memory specific bound model is copied in anoth-
er model memory of the same transmitter, the receiv-
04 ALPINA 3001 SOURCE 02 EXP.M 04 ALPINA 3001 QUELLE 02 EXP.M
Please
05 MODEL NAME 5 TARGET RES 05 MODEL NAME 5 Ziel 05 RES
er must be bound again in the target model memory. wait!!
06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY 06 MODEL NAME 6 J N CPY
• If a transmitter specific bound model is loaded on
another model memory of the same transmitter, the Press the target Memory Line where the information is Once the process is completed, the message will dis-
receiver binding will always be functional. to be duplicated. In the example below, Model Mem- appear and returns to the Model Sel display:
ory Line 05 is selected. The target line highlights blue,
BACK STARLET NEXT
Select the model memory to be copied. In the exam- and the target line number appears in the box in red.
01 STARLET SEL
ple below, Model Memory Line 02 "Beaver" is being In the example below, the red line number "05" ap-
02 BEAVER NEW
copied. Press to highlight. The field highlights blue: pears in the box:
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
BACK STARLET NEXT BACK STARLET NEXT EXP.M
04 ALPINA 3001
01 STARLET SEL 01 STARLET SEL 05 BEAVER RES
02 BEAVER NEW 02 BEAVER NEW 06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M 03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M Press the  BACK  button to return to the BASE menu:
04 ALPINA 3001 SOURCE 02 EXP.M
05 MODEL NAME 5 RES 05 MODEL NAME 5 TARGET 05 RES BACK STARLET NEXT
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY 06 MODEL NAME 6 YES NO CPY 01 STARLET SEL
Press
Press the CPY button right on the bottom: Press  NO  to terminate the action or press  YES  to 02 BEAVER NEW
03 GRAUBELE IMP.M
begin the copying process:
04 ALPINA 3001 EXP.M
05 BEAVER RES
06 MODEL NAME 6 CPY

58 Base menu - Model selection

 BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo

CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

Base menu - Model selection 59

 Model Type
Changing the Model Type
Use this submenu to change the type or details of the The information screen for the currently active model The safety message "SURE?" appears:
currently assigned model. will appear:
BACK SURE? OK
First, turn the receiver system off and turn the trans- BACK
mitter's RF module off. From the main display, press M/TYPE W/TYPE P/TYPE
the BASE menu gear icon (green "B") to bring up the NORMAL
BASE submenu screen: HELICOPTER AIRPLANE GLIDER
1A
000% 000%
T/TYPE
4.2V AIRPLANE ELE.POWER
NORMAL CAR COPTER BOAT
000 000 000:00.0
mz Press  NO  to terminate the procedure or press  OK 
0:01:23 000:00.0 The basic model type is assigned when creating a
to proceed. The OK button will highlight blue for one
M-1 000 Press
000 new model memory in the BASE submenu Model Sel.
PHASE 1 second. Make the new model type choice as soon as
MODELLNAME 1 In the BASE submenu Model Type, it is possible to
the OK button changes back to black.
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 change the model type of the current model. When
000 000
such a change is made, all of the mixers, coupling Press the HELICOPTER icon:
From the BASE submenu display, press the Model functions, etc. for the previous model type are deleted BACK SURE? OK
Type icon: or need to be adapted to the changed type.
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
Notice
Once you change any of the existing settings, all HELICOPTER AIRPLANE GLIDER
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
of the relevant parameters are reset.
Press

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo CAR COPTER BOAT
Press
The display changes to the next selection screen for
Programming
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

that model type:

In the following example, the Model Memory 01 is
If the receiver is still powered and connected to the currently assigned to an airplane but needs to be
transmitter, the following Active Warning message will changed to a helicopter. Begin by pressing the model
appear: type icon:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK
M/TYPE W/TYPE P/TYPE
Warning NORMAL
Model Sel MODELLTYP WEG/LIM UMK/MITTE Motor
Switch OFF the receiver First 1A

TX ctl UHREN
OK
FAIL-SAFE TR.ST. Servo
T/TYPE Refer to the section New Model Basic Settings -
AIRPLANE ELE.POWER
NORMAL MANUAL (page 42) for further information on manu-
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
Touch
Press ally setting new models.
Press OK, turn the receiver off and press the Model
Type icon again.

60 Base menu - Model type

To retain the model type but change a model setting, Press the  ENT  button at the lower right side of the BACK
the same procedure is utilized. In the example be- display to return to the BASE menu display:
low, the wing type of the current model needs to be
changed from "1AILE" to "2AILE 2FLAP'. Press the M/TYPE W/TYPE P/TYPE
Wing Type button: NORMAL
COPTER
BACK 2A2F
M/TYPE W/TYPE P/TYPE T/TYPE
ELE.POWER
ENT
MOTOR Press
NORMAL NORMAL
1A ENT
T/TYPE
AIRPLANE Press ELE.POWER
NORMAL Notices

The WING Type menu will be displayed. Press to se-

lect the appropriate wing type:
• Options are limited depending on certain
WING Type NORMAL Press model types. When selecting BOAT, the only
possible selection is between motor powered
or non-motor powered model type:
1AILE 1AILE 1FLAP 2AILE 2AILE 1FLAP BACK
M/TYPE P/TYPE

2AILE 2FLAP 2AILE 4FLAP 4AILE 2FLAP 4AILE 4FLAP

Continue selecting the appropriate icons for the addi-

BOAT POWER
tional fields displayed in the following menus, such as
Tail Type. The information display will appear when all
selectable fields are completed:

• When selecting CAR and DRONE, the only

possible selection is the model type:

Base menu - Model type 61

 E.P.A
Setting the E.P.A
End Point Adjustments allows definition of the maxi- The set values always correspond to the settings in BACK E.P.A SERVO
mum servo travel for any channel. This feature is help- the BASE submenu REV/SUB. CH1 150% 104% 097% 150%
ful with components, such as wing flaps, that may get CH2 150% 111% 88% 150%
Press
NEXT
damaged by excessive movements. Tip
CH3 150% 107% 115% 150% INC
To set the E.P.A, from the main display press the BASE Press the  NEXT  button on the right side of the display
CH4 150% 077% 076% 150% RES
menu gear icon (green "B") to bring up the BASE sub- to scroll through the channel screens.
CH5 150% 088% 111% 150% DEC
menu screen:
000% 000%
To change a value, press the desired button. In the – Limit – Travel + Limit +
example below, Channel 3 Travel:
4.2V Press the   TEST  button to activate the Servo Test
000 000 000:00.0 BACK E.P.A SERVO function (page 87):
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150%
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 BACK NORMAL Servo
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT
Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150% INC
MODELLNAME 1
CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% RES Press
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 Press
000 000 CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150% DEC

From the BASE submenu display, press the E.P.A – Limit – Travel + Limit +
icon: 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
The field highlights blue: 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK E.P.A SERVO

BACK NORMAL Servo
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIEW
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT +0.5s
CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150% INC
INC
Press CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% RES
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
RES
CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150% DEC
DEC
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce – Limit – Travel + Limit + 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% START

Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of Upon activating one or more control elements of the
E.P.A. Adjustment the display to increase/decrease the value of the ac- transmitter, the resulting servo travel is graphically
tive field. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed displayed, as shown below:
In the E.P.A display, the parameters are set as they
value back to the default. Alternatively, press the ar-
relate to the servo, i.e. the servo path and angle of
row keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to BACK NORMAL Servo
rotation or its limit.
achieve the same result. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
BACK E.P.A SERVO Use the same procedure for all settings.
CH 1. 150% 100% 100% 150%
To advance directly to the BASE submenu Servo dis-
CH 2. 150% 100% 100% 150% NEXT
play, press the  SERVO  button in the top right corner
INC
CH 3. 150% 100% 100% 150% of the screen. Alternatively, simultaneously press the –100% –061% +100% 000% 000% 000%
CH 4. 150% 100% 100% 150% RES arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display (while no +100% +061% 000% 000% 000% 000%

CH 5. 150% 100% 100% 150% DEC fields are highlighted) to also bring up the Servo dis-
Press the  BACK  button to return to the E.P.A display
– Limit – Travel + Limit + play:
screen.
62 Base menu - Servo path/Servo limit
Notice
In contrast to the BASE submenu CTL Set, all
the settings of the E.P.A submenu refer to the rel-
evant servo  independent of  where the control
signal for the servo comes from, i.e. either directly
from the control element or from mix functions.

Example
The rudder servo of a model is directly controlled by
the rudder control stick and also through an accessory
"Aileron  Rudder" mixer. For model-specific reasons,
this servo can only follow a maximum servo travel of
100% since, for example, the rudder would contact the
elevator if the allowed mechanical travel was more than
100%.
As long as only the rudder is used, this is not a problem.
It becomes problematic, however, if the signals add up
to a total travel of more than 100% when simultaneously
using the rudder and the aileron. The linkages and ser-
vos can be subject to an extreme load, causing damage.
To prevent this, the path of the relevant servo has to be
limited individually. In the rudder servos example, this
would be slightly less than 100% since we are assuming
that the rudder is already traveling 100%.

Base menu - Servo path/Servo limit 63

 REV/SUB
Setting Servo Direction and Neutral Position
Setting the servo directions is necessary for to main- Servo Direction and Neutral Position 1. Setting Servo Direction
tain the model's control system. Improperly set con- With this option, the servo rotation direction is
Servo direction adjustments are done in the left REV
trol movements will cause the model to crash. adapted to the specifics in the particular model so
column, the related center position adjustments are
To set the servos, from the main display press the done in the right SUB.TR column: that, when the control linkages and articulations
BASE menu gear icon (green "B") to bring up the are installed, the servo's rotational direction does
BASE submenu screen: BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO not have to be considered.
CH 1. NOR 000%
000% 000%
The travel direction is reversed by pressing
4.2V
CH 2. NOR 000% NEXT to change the corresponding value fields la-
000 000 000:00.0 CH 3. NOR 000% INC beled  NOR  and  REV :
CH 4. NOR 000% RES
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 DEC
BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO
CH 5. NOR 000%
Touch CH 1. NOR 000%
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 CH 6. NOR 000%
MODELLNAME 1 CH 2. REV 000% NEXT
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 Press  NEXT  button on the right side of the display to CH 3. NOR 000% INC
000 000
scroll through the channel screens: CH 4. NOR 000% RES
From the BASE submenu display, press the REV/SUB CH 5. REV 000% DEC
icon: CH 6. NOR 000%
BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO
CH 7. NOR 000%
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM Whenever the travel direction of CH6 (in a helicop-
CH 8. NOR 000% NEXT
ter) or CH1 (in the other model types) is changed,
CH 9. NOR 000% INC
an Active Warning will be displayed:
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
CH 10. NOR 000% RES
CH 11. NOR 000% DEC BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO

Press CH 12. NOR 000% CH 1. NOR 000%

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
CH 2. Warning
UMK 000% NEXT

CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

CH 3. NORSURE?000% INC
CH 4. YES
NOR NO
000% RES
Notices
CH 5. REV 000% DEC
• Always begin by setting the direction in which
CH 6. NOR 000%
the servos have to move before setting the
other parameters! Press  NO  to terminate the procedure. Press  YES 
• The servo numbering refers to the servos to change the servo travel direction connected to
connected to the corresponding receiver out- CH1 or CH6.
puts,  providing that the  transmitter and re-
ceiver outputs have not been switched. This
allows for a change in the control mode that
will not change the numbering of the servos.

64 Base menu - Servo reverse/Servo center

Notice Notice BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO
Do not use the CH6 (helicopter) or CH1 (all other Move the trim control into the middle position CH 1. NOR 000%
models) servo reverse option to reverse the con- before changing the middle values. CH 2. NOR 000% NEXT
trol stick direction. The Thr.HOLD function ac- CH 3. NOR +012% INC
tive warning CH1-Pos does not follow this kind of re- CH 4. NOR 000% RES
verse control direction. Only use for situation adaptation. CH 5. NOR 000% DEC
To reverse the control direction, use the FUNCTION Programming
CH 6. NOR 000%
submenu PIT.CRV (page 154) for helicopters models To change the neutral position of a specific servo,
and THR.CRV (page 128) for all the other model types. press the corresponding SUB.TR button: To advance directly to the BASE submenu Servo
display, press the  SERVO  button in the top right
2. Setting the Center Stick Position BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO
corner of the screen. Alternatively, simultaneously
The servo middle position is for adapting servos CH 1. NOR 000%
press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the dis-
that are not standard (servo middle position with CH 2. NOR 000% NEXT
play (while no fields are highlighted) to also bring
a pulse length of 1.5 ms or 1500 μs ) as well as CH 3. NOR 000% INC
up the Servo display.
for minor adaptations, for example fine adjustment CH 4. NOR 000% RES
Press
to the neutral position of control surfaces on the CH 5. NOR 000% DEC
Press the   BACK  button to return to the REV/SUB
model. CH 6. NOR 000%
display screen.
Independent of trim controls and any mix settings,
The field highlights blue:
the center stick position can be shifted around
±125% within the maximum servo travel of ±150%. BACK REV SUB.TR SERVO
The servo is always adjusted independently of all CH 1. NOR 000%
other trim and mix settings. CH 2. NOR 000% NEXT
CH 3. NOR 000% INC
Notice CH 4. NOR 000% RES
Note that if the neu- Servo travel
CH 5. NOR 000% DEC
tral position  is ad- Cen
tre adjustment
CH 6. NOR 000%
justed  strongly,  ser-
vo travel on one side may Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge
be restricted  since the total of the display to increase/decrease the value of the
travel is limited to ±150% active field. Press the   RES  button to reset the
for electronic and mechani- changed value back to the default. Alternatively,
cal reasons. press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the dis-
play screen to achieve the same result:

Base menu - Servo reverse/Servo center 65

 Throttle Cut
Switchable Throttle Cut/Motor Off
ignated in the value field of the SET line and needs to
be determined through experimentation.
The speed controller or the throttle servo only utilizes
This submenu option is not available to motor-less glider the set position if a freely selectable switch has been
model types. activated:
• In the Motor OFF position, the speed controller or
governor is disabled until the selected switch is
not moved again.
The default preset value of the field in the SET line of
the idle or Motor Off position is -100% of the throttle/
brake or throttle/pitch control stick travel:
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CUT SERVO

• By moving the selected switch to the ON posi-

To set throttle cut, from the main display press the
tion the speed controller or the governor will be
BASE menu gear icon (green "B") to bring up the INC
reduced to the value which has been input in the  ACT INH
BASE submenu screen: CTL ON RES
SET line, independent of the actual position of the
000% 000%
 SET –100% DEC
throttle/brake or throttle/pitch control stick.
4.2V

000 000 000:00.0

mz Programming
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-1 000 Press
000 In models with an ICE: To change the default for the Motor OFF posi-
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 • If the set percentage in the SET line is less than tion, press the value field in the SET line:
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 the current servo position, that is, the current servo
000 000 BACK PHASE 1 THR.CUT SERVO
position (green arrow to the left of the bar graphic)
From the BASE submenu display, press the Motor or is above the switching threshold (red arrow to the
THR.CUT icon: right of the bar graphic), the speed controller re-
 ACT Press
INH INC
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM duces the motor speed, or the throttle servo closes
CTL ON RES
the carburetor as specified in the SET line once the
 SET –100% DEC
servo position falls below the switching threshold
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
of -66% when the switch is in the ON position.
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step
Press
Servo
• If the control stick position (green arrow on the left The field highlights blue:
of the bar graphic) is actually under the red arrow,
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CUT SERVO
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce the speed controller or governor increases the
motor speed or the throttle servo opens the car-
buretor as specified in the SET line after moving
Throttle Cut the switch to the ON position as soon as the con-  ACT INH INC
CTL ON RES
The  Throttle  Cut  option allows a speed controller to trol stick moves over +66% or under -66% of the
 SET –100% DEC
be shut off with a switch or move the throttle control switch threshold if the Motor OFF position is set in
servo to the pre-defined motor OFF  position (or idle the plus side.
position). Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
This option can be used as an emergency OFF func- the display to increase/decrease the value of the ac-
tion. The Motor OFF position (or idle position) is des- tive field. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed
value back to the default. Alternatively, press the ar-
66 Base menu - Motor stop
row keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to BACK PHASE 1 Thr.CUT SERVO
achieve the same result. This adjustment allows the
motor or engine to run at the desired idle speed or
switches the engine or motor off: INC
 ACT ON
The adjustment range is ±150%. CTL SW 6 RES

BACK PHASE 1 Thr.CUT Sv SET –123% DEC



To advance directly to the BASE submenu Servo dis-

ACT INH INC
 play, press the  SERVO  button in the top right corner
CTL ON RES
of the screen. Alternatively, simultaneously press the
SET –123% DEC
 arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display (while no
fields are highlighted) to also bring up the Servo dis-
play.
Notice

With an ICE, make sure that the throttle servo Press the  BACK  button to return to the BASE menu
does not mechanically over-travel. display:
BACK PHASE 1 Thr.CUT SERVO
Assign the required ON/OFF  switches (such as
SW6) to the CTL line as described in the Control and Press
Switch Assignment section (page 26):
 ACT ON INC
BACK PHASE 1 Thr.CUT SERVO CTL SW 6 RES
SET –123% DEC


 ACT INH INC

CTL SW 6 RES
SET –123% DEC


Press to change the field in the ACT line. Depending

on the switch position, the display of this field switch-
es to  ON  or  OFF .

Base menu - Motor stop 67

 Transmitter Setting
Transmitter Settings
Use this sub-menu to configure transmitter-specific BIND ON/OFF
functions: bind settings, receiver output, transmit- To establish a connection with the transmitter, the
ter settings, country settings, range test, transmitter Graupner HoTT receiver must first be bound to at least WARNING
modulation and auto-save option. one model memory in the assigned Graupner HoTT In Global Mode a receiver system
To configure the transmitter settings, from the main
display press the BASE menu gear icon (green "B") to
transmitter. This process is called binding and can
be repeated as needed. Receivers are usually bound ! turned on after a model memory
change will immediately react to all
bring up the BASE submenu screen: in the MODEL mode (model memory specific), but it control movements of the model memories
000% 000%
can be changed at any time to GLOBAL (transmitter bound in Global Mode as soon as a valid signal
4.2V specific); any model memory saved in the transmitter is emitted from the assigned transmitter.
000 000 000:00.0 can be changed via the BASE submenu Model Sel.
A detailed description of this process is available in • The HoTT synchronization process of a copied or
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Press
the HoTT Synchronization Methods Setting section imported model memory depends on many differ-
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 (page 39): ent factors. For more information, refer to sections
MODELLNAME 1
Import to SD Card (page 54) and Copy Model
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 BACK MODEL NAME 1 NEXT
000 000 Memory (page 58).
01 MODEL NAME 1 SEL
From the BASE submenu display, press the TX ctl
icon:
02 MODEL NAME 2 NEW Notices
03 MODEL NAME 3 IMP.M
• Re-bind all involved receivers after changing
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM 04 MODEL NAME 4 G EXP.M
Select model memory modes.
05 MODEL NAME 5 G global RES
• When binding, make sure the transmitter
06 MODEL NAME 6 G NO CPY
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT antenna is far enough away from the receiv-
•   MODEL  Memory specific synchronized receiv- er antenna. Maintain a distance of 3 feet (1
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
ers react exclusively to the signal coming from meter). Otherwise, there is a risk endangering
Press the specifically assigned model memory. It is not the connection with the feedback channel and
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
possible to use another non-specifically assigned causing malfunctions.
model memory. A receiver not bound to the model • Make sure that the receiver power supply is
memory will pass into Fail-safe mode. adequate. If the power supply is too low, the
The transmitter control display appears:
•   GLOBAL  Transmitter specific, synchronized receiver LEDs will react as though binding, but
BACK TX ctl
receivers react to the signals of all of the global the HoTT synchronization connection may not
RX1 RX2 bound model memories of the assigned transmit- be performed.
BIND ON/OFF OFF OFF ter. For safety reasons, making a model memory • When binding to a new receiver, note that
TX OUT SET SET SET change is only possible after switching off the re- any receiver that is turned on and previously
RF ON/OFF OFF RF TYPE NORMAL ceiver system! bound to the transmitter (and not directly af-
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec fected by the new binding process) will enter
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF Fail Safe Mode while the transmitter is per-
forming the new bind.

68 Base menu - Transmitter setting

Binding Multiple Receivers Per Model Tip BACK TX ctl

Multiple receivers can be bound to each model. In •  RX2  can only be bound a receiver if there is already RX1 RX2
compatible receivers, users can directly manage up a bound receiver on  RX1 . BIND ON/OFF CHK OFF
to two receivers bound to each active model memo- • If for any reason the binding of the   RX2  should TX OUT SET SET SET
ry and utilize a menu to distribute the 12 transmitter fail,  RX1  will automatically change to  OFF . Rebind RF ON/OFF OFF RF TYPE NORMAL
control channels between the two receivers, as de- a receiver to RX1 first, before binding the second RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
scribed in the subsequent sections. First, bind the two receiver to  RX2 . DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
receivers one-at-a-time, as described in the Binding
Transmitter and Receiver section below. Binding Transmitter and Receiver Binding takes about 10 seconds, and when com-
During operation, telemetry links with the transmitter plete the flashing red receiver LED shines green
Turn off the power supply to the receiver and the continuously. The model memory/receiver combi-
are only established with the receiver that was either
transmitter. Remove all propellers. nation is now operable. The  CHK  changes to the
last bound to the active model memory, or was as-
signed in the RX SELECT line in the BASE submenu • GR-16 and GR-24 and similar receivers receiver type abbreviation, for example the GR-24
Telemetry, as shown below: Turn on the transmitter. The active warning dis- will appear as  12CH , and the RF transmission (RF
play will prompt a bind if no receiver is detected. ON/OFF) automatically turns on, as shown below:
BACK Telemetry
Press SET to bring up the TX ctl menu. Other- TX ctl
BACK
RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
wise, select the model to be bound in the Mod-
>> RX1 RX2
SETTING & DATA VIEW el Sel menu. The active warning display will again
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
SENSOR >> INC prompt a bind. Press SET to bring up the TX ctl
TX OUT SET SET SET
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES menu.
>> DEC RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL
VOICE TRIGGER Turn on the receiver. The red LED flashes on the
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
receiver.
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
Telemetry sensors installed in the model must be con- Hold down the SET button on the receiver until for
nected to the assigned receiver; the transmitter will about 3 seconds. The flashing red LED flashes If the red receiver LED continues to flash for more
only indicate values coming from the back channel of red/green for about 3 seconds. Release the SET than 10 seconds, the binding process was un-
a receiver assigned in this line. The second receiver button on the receiver. As long as the LED is flash- successful. The   CHK  button in the BIND ON/
(and all other receivers) run independently and con- ing red/green, the receiver is in binding mode. OFF Line will automatically turn to  OFF . Change
currently in Slave Mode. Within this 3 second window, start binding the re- the antenna position and try the entire procedure
ceiver to the current model memory by pressing again.
the  RX1  button in the BIND ON/OFF line: • GR-12L and similar receivers
BACK TX ctl Turn on the transmitter. The active warning dis-
RX1 RX2 play will prompt a bind if no receiver is detected.
BIND ON/OFF OFF OFF Press SET to bring up the TX ctl menu. Other-
TX OUT SET SET SET wise, select the model to be bound in the Mod-
RF ON/OFF
Press
OFF RF TYPE NORMAL
el Sel menu. The active warning display will again
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
prompt a bind. Press SET to bring up the TX ctl
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
menu.
Turn on the receiver. The red LED shines solid.
The button will change from OFF to  CHK : Hold down the SET button on the receiver until,
Base menu - Transmitter setting 69
 after about 3 seconds, the red LED goes dark for • If there is no reaction other than a "beep", the RF Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
about 3 seconds. Release the SET button on the module is switched off. Switch the RF module on the display or the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the
receiver. As long as the LED is dark, the receiver is and repeat the process. display screen to increase/decrease the input channel
in binding mode. • If an active warning window appears, the RF mod- related transmitter output, for example:
As described in the above GR-16 and GR-24 bind ule of the transmitter is switched off but there is no BACK PHASE 1 Out.Swap SERVO
procedure, within the 3 second window, start bind- connection with the receiver: TX 1 CH >>OUT1 TX 7 CH >>OUT7 INC
ing the receiver to the current model memory by TX 2 CH >>OUT2 TX 8 CH >>OUT8 RES
Warning
touching one of the two buttons in the BIND ON/
TX 3 CH >>OUT3 TX 9 CH >>OUT9 DEC
OFF line. Can not receive data
TX 4 CH >>OUT4 TX 10 CH >>OUT10
Binding has been successful if  the receiver LED OK TX 5 CH >>OUT5 TX 11 CH >>OUT11
remains dark and the receiver display switches
TX 1 CH >>OUT6 TX 12 CH >>OUT12
to  6CH . Press OK. Turn the receiver system on and/or bind
If the red receiver LED shines red again, the bind- the receiver and repeat the process. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed output to
ing process was unsuccessful. The  CHK  button Channel Assignment Within a Receiver the default mapping.
in the BIND ON/OFF Line will automatically turn All modified values will be automatically transmitted
to  OFF . Change the antenna position and try the Users can distribute transmitter control channels (re- to the related receiver.
entire procedure again. ceiver inputs) to the outputs (servo connections), of
Press the BACK  button to return to the TX ctl sub-
the selected receiver. Select the desired output to
menu.
map by pressing on the related channel button:
TX OUT SET (Receiver Output)
BACK PHASE 1 Out.Swap SERVO
The mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter allows users to dis- TX 1 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC Notice
tribute the transmitter control channels within a re- TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES If for example you entered "2AILE" in the basic
ceiver as desired. In addition, users can distribute DEC settings for a fixed-wing model, the transmitter
TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9
the 12 receiver control channels to the two receivers assigns control function 2 (aileron) to control
TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10
as preferred. This distribution process is called "map- Press
channels 2+5 for the left and right aileron. The corre-
TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11
ping" or "channel mapping". sponding transmitter outputs (= receiver inputs) to be
TX 6 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12
Press the applicable receiver to be mapped in the TX mapped would in this case be channels 2+5 (see the
OUT SET line, in the example below RX1 is chosen: The field highlights blue: examples below).
BACK TX ctl BACK PHASE 1 Out.Swap SERVO
RX1 RX2 TX 1 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES
TX OUT SET SET SET TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9 DEC
RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10
Press
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF TX 6 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12

70 Base menu - Transmitter setting


Examples
• On a large model, you want to control each aileron
flap using two or more servos:
Assign the same input (control channel) to the rele-
vant outputs (servo connections). In this case, as-
sign one of the two default aileron control channels 2
The numbering of the outputs (servo connections) and RF TYPE (Country Setting)
the maximum number of available lines (outputs) cor- The specific RF type needs to be set to satisfy the
responds to the  maximum number of servos  that can relevant guidelines (FCC, ETSI, IC, etc.).
be connected to the respective receivers. Follow the To switch your transmitter's country setting be-
same procedure as above. tween  NORMAL  or AMERICA , press the button to
RF ON/OFF the right of the RF TYPE line:
Manually turn the transmitter's RF transmission off BACK TX ctl

+ 5 as an input depending on the left or right wing. and on while the transmitter is currently turned on. RX1 RX2
Use this function, for example, when changing model BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
• On a large model, you want to control the rudder memory or model type . TX OUT SET SET SET
using two or more servos:
RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL
Assign the same input (control channel) to the rele- Notice
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
vant outputs (servo connections). In this case, de- The next time the transmitter is turned on or a Press
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
fault rudder channel 4. model is switched, the OFF setting is reversed.

Notices To manually turn the high-frequency transmis- RANGE TEST

• The maximum number of available lines (out- sion of your transmitter on or off, touch the corre- The integrated range test reduces the transmitter out-
puts) corresponds to the maximum number of sponding button in the RF ON/OFF line: put so that you can perform a function test at a dis-
servos that can be connected to each receiv- tance of less then 330 ft (100 m).
BACK TX ctl
er. RX1 RX2
• You can use the Transmitter Output option BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
It is useful to have an assistant to help with the range
(page 96), of the mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter test.
TX OUT SET SET SET
to switch the transmitter control function as RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL
1. Install the receiver(s) already bound to the trans-
desired, or assign the same control function to RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
mitter into the model as described.
several outputs. For ease of use, it is strong- DSC OUTPUT
Press
PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
2. Turn the transmitter on and wait until the receiv-
ly recommended to only use one of the two er(s) indicate(s) a correct function connection. Ser-
options. vo movements can now be monitored.
Tip
3. Place the model on a flat surface (concrete, mowed
Alternatively, press the RF Switch icon on the transmit-
Assigning One Channel to Two Receivers lawn or ground) so that the receiver antennas are
ter main menu to bring up a function similar to the RF
Users can use the Receiver Output option to distrib- at least 6 inches (15 cm) above the ground. It may
Transmission:
ute the 12 control channels of the mz-24 HoTT Pro be necessary to place a support underneath the
transmitter to two receivers as desired.
000% 000% model during the test.
4.2V 4. Hold the transmitter at hip level at a slight distance
000:00.0 from your body. Do not point the antenna direct-
Press 000 000
ly at the model; rotate and/or bend the transmitter
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 antenna so that is it is approximately at a right an-
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 gle to the model.
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

Base menu - Transmitter setting 71

5. Activate the range test mode by touching the but- Simultaneously, the time display in the transmit- WARNING
ton to the right of the RANGE TEST line: ter display starts to count backwards and emits 2 Never start a range test on the transmit-
BACK
RX1
TX ctl

RX2
beeps every 2 seconds.
BACK TX ctl
! ter during normal model operation!

BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF RX1 RX2

TX OUT SET SET
Press SET BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL TX OUT SET SET SET DSC OUTPUT (Transmitter Modulation)
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL To set the modulation of your transmitter at the DSC
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF RANGE TEST OFF 78sec output, press the button with the current setting in the
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF DSC OUTPUT line (repeatedly if necessary) until the
The following active safety warning appears: desired modulation appears. Four types of modula-
TX ctl
5 seconds before the range test ends, 3 beeps are tion are available in this sequence: PPM10, PPM16,
BACK
emitted every second. After the 99-second range PPM18 and PPM24:
RX1 RX2
test, the transmitter switches back to full output,
Bind ON/OFF 12K Select
AUS
and the Graupner logo shines continuously. BACK TX ctl

TX OUT SET SET SET

Start range test?
RX1 RX2
6. During the range test, move away from the model
RF ON/OFF NO
YES HF-Typ
EIN NORMAL 12CH OFF
while moving the transmitter's control elements. If BIND ON/OFF
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
you detect an interruption in the link within a range TX OUT SET SET SET
DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
of about 164 ft (50 m) at any time, attempt to re- RF ON/OFF ON
Press RF TYPE NORMAL

Touch  NO  to terminate the procedure. Touch  YES  produce it. RANGE TEST OFF 99sec

7. If the model has a motor, turn it on to check inter- DSC OUTPUT PPM10 AUTOLOG OFF
to start the range test.
When the range test starts, the output of the trans- ference resistance.
BACK TX ctl
mitter  decreases significantly and the Graupner 8. Move further away from the model until it does not
RX1 RX2
logo below dials DV2 and DV3 will flash. respond perfectly.
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
9. Wait at this location for the remainder of the test
TX OUT SET SET SET
period. The model should still react properly to
RF ON/OFF ON RF-TYPE NORMAL
control commands once the range test is finished.
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec
If this is not always the case, do not use the sys-
DSC OUTPUT PPM18 AUTOLOG OFF
tem and contact the Graupner Service Center.
10. Perform a range test before each flight, simulat- The selected modulation primarily influences the
ing all servo movements that could occur during bandwidth and the number of available control chan-
the flight. In order to guarantee a safe model op- nels at the DSC socket for a connected flight simula-
eration, the range must always be at least 164 ft tor or trainer system. If PPM10 is selected, the avail-
(50 m) on the ground. able control channels are 1 - 5; with PPM16, channels
1 - 8, with PPM18, channels 1 - 9, and with PPM24,
channels 1 - 12.

72 Base menu - Transmitter setting

AUTOLOG (Auto-Save to SD Card)
Press the ON/OFF   button at the bottom right of the BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

display while RF module is switched off to activate/

deactivate the automatic data logging save feature: Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

BACK TX ctl

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo

RX1 RX2
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
TX OUT SET SET SET
RF ON/OFF ON RF-TYPE NORMAL
Press
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec

DSC OUTPUT PPM18 AUTOLOG OFF

BACK TX ctl

RX1 RX2
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
TX OUT SET SET SET
RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec

DSC OUTPUT PPM18 AUTOLOG ON

As soon as the RF transmission is turned on, the log

data starts recording the information to the inserted
memory card and will stop recording as soon as the
transmitter or the RF module is switched off.

Notice
The AUTOLOG option remains switched ON or
OFF as long as the actual setting is not changed
while the RF module is switched off.
Touch the BACK button at the top left of the display
to leave this submenu and return to the BASE menu.
BACK TX ctl

RX1 RX2
Press
BIND ON/OFF 12CH OFF
TX OUT SET SET SET
RF ON/OFF ON RF TYPE NORMAL
RANGE TEST OFF 99sec

DSC OUTPUT PPM18 AUTOLOG ON

Base menu - Transmitter setting 73

 Timers
Timer and Clock Settings
The mz-24 PRO comes with two forward/backward BACK Timer
Acoustic Signal Sequence
timers, alarm, battery and model timers and a date/ TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00 20 s before zero: 2 beeps
time clock. MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 NEXT Single beep every 2 seconds
There are four ways to access the BASE submenu START SW NULL INC 10 s before zero: single beep
Timer. Press the battery/model timer on the left side
of the main menu to bring up the battery/model set-
STOP SW NULL LAP SW NULL RES Single beep every second with a
ting screen. Press and hold either of the two large
RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC changed pitch
LAP ALARM OFF
forward/backward timers on the right side of the main 5 s before zero: single beep every second with re-
menu to bring up the timer displays (top timer for Tim- duced frequency
er1, bottom timer for Timer2). Or press the green gear Tip Zero: voice trigger
icon at the bottom of the screen to bring up the BASE Press the   NEXT  button at the  top right edge of the
submenu. Press the Timer icon to bring up the timer display to scroll through the setting screens: TIMER1, To set the desired time period, press the left minute
display. TIMER2 and DATE/TIME. field:
000% 000%
BACK Timer
4.2V TIMER1 and TIMER2
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00
Press
000 000 000:00.0 To program TIMER1 or TIMER2, begin by choosing MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 NEXT
mz direction in the MODE line. By default,  UP  = forward
Press 0:01:23 Press
000:00.0 START SW NULL INC
M-1 000 000
count-up and  DOWN  = backwards countdown. STOP SW
Press
NULL LAP SW NULL RES
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1
To proceed without setting an alarm, skip to the Start/ RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 Stop Timer1 and Timer2 section (page 77). LAP ALARM OFF
000 000

Press Alarm function

Or the right second field:
An alarm function can be activated for a forward-count-
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK Timer
ing and backward-counting timer by setting the de-
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00
sired time-frame in the minute and/or second field in
MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 NEXT
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT the ALARM line. A warning beep will sound during the
START SW NULL INC
last 20 seconds of the set duration so that users do Press
NULL LAP SW NULL RES
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo not have to continuously monitor the display during STOP SW

NULL >> DEC

flight. RESET SW LAP List
Press
Out.Swap Telemetry Announce LAP ALARM OFF
CTL Set

The field highlights blue:

Tip BACK Timer

TIMER1 T.RES 000 00

Quickly press or tap the main menu Timer1 and Tim- :

er2 buttons to reset to the default values of  000:00.0 . MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 NEXT

Press and hold timer buttons to be taken to the corre- START SW NULL INC

sponding timer setting display screen. STOP SW NULL LAP SW NULL RES
RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC
LAP ALARM OFF

74 Base menu - Timers

Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of Notice BACK PressTimer
the display or the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the If a timer is started, then stopped and switched
display screen to increase/decrease time (between from forward to backward counting (or vice ver- TIMER2 T.RES 000 : 00 NEXT
00:00 to maximum 59:59), as shown below: sa), only the remaining time on the timer is updat- MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC
BACK Timer
ed; the time is not reset. START SW SW 6 LAP SW
Press
NULL RES
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00 RESET SW NULL LAP LIST >> DEC
MODE UP ALARM 59 : 59 NEXT Start/Stop Timer1 and Timer2 LAP ALARM OFF
START SW NULL INC • Timer 1
STOP SW NULL LAP SW NULL RES
This timer can only be started through a switch as- Resetting Started Timers
>> DEC
RESET SW NULL LAP List signed in the START SW line. In the example be- 1. Both Timer 1 and Timer 2 can be reset to the de-
LAP ALARM OFF low, the S8 switch is assigned to start the timer fault value at any time by tapping on the related
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value and the S2 switch has been assigned to stop the timer field in the basic display
back to the default. timer. 000% 000%

4.2V
BACK Timer
Forward-counting timer ( UP ) Press
000 000 000:00.0
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00
Forward-counting timers start at 000:00. MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 SW 0:01:23 Press mz 000:00.0
START SW SW 8 INC M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
Backward-counting timer ( DOWN ) STOP SW SW 2 LAP SW NULL RES MODELLNAME 1
Backward-counting timers start at -000:00. Press the RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000

button in the MODE line to change to this option: LAP ALARM OFF
2. Both Timer 1 and Timer 2 can be reset to the de-
BACK Timer fault value at any time by pressing the  T.RES  but-
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00 Notice ton in the Timer1 and Timer2 displays:
MODE UP ALARM 59 : 59 NEXT Stopping Timer 1 also stops the data log re-
BACK Timer
START SW NULL INC cording to the SD memory card.
Press
STOP SW NULL LAP SW NULL RES TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT
RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC
LAP ALARM OFF
• Timer 2 Press
START SW SW 6 LAP SW NULL RES
This timer can be started and stopped by tapping
NULL >> DEC
BACK Timer on the minutes or seconds field or alternatively RESET SW LAP LIST

OFF
TIMER1 T.RES 000 : 00 through a switch assigned in the START SW line: LAP ALARM

MODE DOWN ALARM 59 : 59 NEXT

START SW NULL INC
STOP SW NULL LAP SW NULL RES
RESET SW NULL LAP List >> DEC
LAP ALARM OFF

Base menu - Timers 75

3. Both Timer 1 and Timer 2 can be reset to the de- LAP SW (Lap Switch) LAP LIST
fault value at any time by moving the switch as- Use this line function to count ground laps by follow- Press the  >>  button to switch to the list of lap times:
signed in the RESET SW line in the Timer1 and ing these steps:
BACK TIMER
Timer2 displays: 1. Choose the forward or backward direction in either
BACK Timer Timer 1 or Timer 2. TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT
2. Set the switches in the value fields of the line op- MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC
Press
TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT tions: START SW, RESET SW and LAP SW, as START SW SW 6 LAP SW SW 2 RES
MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC shown below: RESET SW NULL LAP LIST >> DEC
START SW SW 6 LAP SW NULL RES BACK Timer
LAP ALARM OFF
RESET SW SW 2 LAP List >> DEC
LAP ALARM OFF TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT Up to 100 laps can be recorded and are displayed 20
MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC to a screen. Scroll between screens using the  NEXT 
The Timer 1 data stream to the SD memory card and  PREV  buttons (forward/back):
START SW SW 6 LAP SW SW 2 RES
will not be severed or influenced by the reset of • If the lap counter starts at the same time that the
RESET SW SW 2 LAP LIST >> DEC
the Timer1. timer has been reset, the lap list will record times
LAP ALARM OFF
START SW (Start Switch) individually, as shown below:
In this example above, by pushing SW6 (assigned
Use this line function to assign switches to Timer 1 BACK
to START SW), Timer 2 will start and as soon as
or Timer 2 that start the selected timer. For more in- No LAP TIME No LAP TIME
SW6 is pushed again, the timer will stop.
formation on assigning switches, refer to the Control 1 04: 32. 1 11 00: 00. 0
PREV
and Switch Assignment section (page 26). SW2 is a 3-position intermittent switch. The first 2
3
04: 31. 2
04: 33. 5
12
13
00: 00. 0
00: 00. 0
flip of SW2, for example when marking a lap, will 4
5
04: 31. 9
04: 32. 8
14
15
00: 00. 0
00: 00. 0
STOP SW (Stop Switch) reset Timer 2 to 000.00. At the same time the 6 00: 00. 0 16 00: 00. 0 NEXT
7 00: 00. 0 17 00: 00. 0
Use this line function to assign a switch to Timer 1 chronometer for Lap 1 will start. 8 00: 00. 0 18 00: 00. 0
9 00: 00. 0 19 00: 00. 0
that stops the selected timer. For more information on CLR
Subsequent pushes on SW2 will increase the lap 10 00: 00. 0 20 00: 00. 0

assigning switches, refer to the Control and Switch counter by one and will stop (and save) the cur- • Conversely, if the lap counter starts WITHOUT the
Assignment section (page 26). rently running lap time. At the same time, SW2 timer being reset, the lap list will record times cu-
starts the timer for the next round, etc. mulatively, as shown below:
RESET SW (Reset Switch)
3. The elapsed time will be saved as cumulative lap
Use this line function to assign switches to Timer 1 or
times when SW2 is pushed if there is no switch as- BACK
Timer 2 that reset the selected timer to default values. No LAP TIME No LAP TIME
signed in the value field RESET SW, shown below
For more information on assigning switches, refer to 1 04: 32. 1 11 00: 00. 0
as NULL: 2 09: 03. 3 12 00: 00. 0 PREV
the Control and Switch Assignment section (page 3 13: 36. 8 13 00: 00. 0
4 18: 08. 9 14 00: 00. 0
26). BACK TIMER 5 22: 41. 5 15 00: 00. 0
NEXT
6 00: 00. 0 16 00: 00. 0
7 00: 00. 0 17 00: 00. 0
Tip TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT
8 00: 00. 0 18 00: 00. 0
9 00: 00. 0 19 00: 00. 0
CLR
When the reset switch (or  RES  button) is activated, the MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC
10 00: 00. 0 20 00: 00. 0

recorded time is automatically transferred to the TIMER START SW SW 6 LAP SW SW 2 RES

line. RESET SW NULL LAP LIST >> DEC
LAP ALARM OFF

76 Base menu - Timers

To reset the lap times to 00:00.0, press the  CLR  but- Date and Time The field highlights blue:
ton: The third display page of the Timer menu is the date BACK Timer

BACK and time clock.

No LAP TIME No LAP TIME
SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT
1 00: 00. 0 11 00: 00. 0 Tip
2 00: 00. 0 12 00: 00. 0 PREV TIME 15 : 51 : 15 INC
3 00: 00. 0 13 00: 00. 0 Press the model timer display from the main menu dis- DEC
4 00: 00. 0 14 00: 00. 0
5 00: 00. 0 15 00: 00. 0
NEXT
play to shortcut directly to this display.
6 00: 00. 0 16 00: 00. 0 BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
7 00: 00. 0 17 00: 00. 0
MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES
8
9
00: 00. 0
00: 00. 0
18
19
00: 00. 0
00: 00. 0
To set or change the date and/or time press the  SET 
CLR
10 00: 00. 0 20 00: 00. 0 button:
Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
To exit the lap times list, press the  BACK  button to BACK Timer the display or the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the
return to the Timer setting display: display screen to increase/decrease time, as shown
BACK Timer SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT below:

TIME 15 : 51 : 15 INC
Press BACK Timer
TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT DEC
MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT
START SW SW 6 LAP SW SW 2 RES MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES
TIME 15 : 50 : 15 INC
RESET SW SW 2 LAP LIST >> DEC
The button highlights blue: DEC
LAP ALARM OFF BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
BACK Timer
MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES
Lap Timer Alarm
Once lap times have been recorded, as described SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT Use the same procedure with the other values.
above, times can be saved, read and repeated after TIME 15 : 51 : 15 INC To save changes to the transmitter memory, press  SET 
the end of every lap. Press the  OFF  or ON  button on DEC again. The button returns to black:
the LAP ALARM line, activate or deactivate the voice BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
BACK Timer
trigger function: MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES

BACK Timer Press the value field to be set or changed. In the SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT

example below, the "minuets" field needs to be de- TIME 15 : 50 : 15 INC

TIMER2 T.RES 012 : 34 NEXT creased: DEC
MODE UP ALARM 00 : 00 INC BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
BACK Timer

START SW SW 6 LAP SW SW 2 RES MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES

Press
RESET SW SW 2 LAP LIST >> DEC SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT
The date and time have been saved and transferred to
LAP ALARM OFF TIME 15 : 51 : 15 INC
the transmitter memory.
DEC
BATT TIME 02
Press
: 07 : 34 B.RES Tip
MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES When the transmitter is connected to a PC, the date
and time can be updated via Firmware_Upgrade_gr-
Studio V4.x.
Base menu - Timers 77
BATT TIME and MODEL TIME
• BATT TIME
Use the BATT TIME meter to monitor the total op-
erating time of the transmitter battery. A switch
cannot be assigned.
When the transmitter is turned on and the battery
voltage is noticeably higher than before, the timer
is automatically reset to 00:00:00. This might oc-
cur, for example, after charging or exchanging the
battery.
• MODEL TIME
The MODEL TIME meter shows the overall record-
ed access time of the currently active model mem-
ory.
Neither timer can be assigned to a switch, but both
can be manually reset to 00:00:00 by pressing the  B.
RES  or the  M.RES  buttons. In the example below,
MODEL TIME needs to be reset:
BACK Timer

SET DATE 2016 / 11 / 30 NEXT

TIME 15 : 50 : 15 INC
DEC
Press
BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
MODEL TIME 00 : 12 : 34 M.RES

BACK Timer

SET DATE 2013 / 11 / 30 NEXT

TIME 15 : 50 : 15 INC
DEC
BATT TIME 02 : 07 : 34 B.RES
MODEL TIME 00 : 00 : 00 M.RES

Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display

to leave the Timer display screen and return to the
BASE submenu screen.

78 Base menu - Timers

Personal notes 79
 Fail Safe
In the Event of a Malfunction
The Fail Safe function determines the response of the eliminates intermittent disturbances, such as drops in Programming
receiver when the receiver system is turned on and if field strength, which would otherwise lead to "wob- To change between Hold and Fail Safe modes, press
there is an interruption in transmission between the bles" or servo output malfunctions such as retractable the  HOLD  or  F/S  button in the MODE column in
transmitter and receiver. Servo outputs can be pro- landing gear closing unexpectedly. the appropriate channel line:
grammed with pre-defined signals to prevent unwant-
Function description
ed events, e.g. retractable landing gear will not close BACK Press
Fail Safe

unexpectedly. The Fail Safe function determines the response of the CH MODE SET

To configure the fail safe settings, from the main dis- receiver when turning on the receiver system and if CH 1. HOLD NEXT

play press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to there is an interruption in transmission from the trans- CH 2. HOLD STO

bring up the BASE submenu screen: mitter to receiver. CH 3. HOLD

000% 000% The following options are available to the servos con- CH 4. HOLD

4.2V
nected to the receiver Outputs 1 to 12: Delay 0.25s SET

000:00.0 • When the receiver is powered on and until there

000 000
is no signal from the transmitter, defaults to the Tip
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 positions saved in the receiver independent from
Press Press the NEXT button to view the next two channel
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 receiver settings HOLD or F/S. display screens.
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
Notice By changing to  F/S , value field defaulting to 000%
From the BASE submenu display, press the Fail Safe Unless reprogrammed, the standard default appears in the SET column:
icon: setting is the central position.
BACK Fail Safe

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

CH MODE SET

• When transmission connection is interrupted or CH 1. F/S 000% NEXT

encounters interference: CH 2. HOLD STO

Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
CH 3. HOLD
1. HOLD - if transmission interference occurs, all
CH 4. HOLD
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo servos remain at their current position until a
Delay 0.25s SET
new, correct control signal is received by the
Press
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
receiver. To set the fail safe position, press to highlight the  F/S 
2. F/S - if the receiver is in the HOLD position and value field. In the example below, the fail safe for CH1
there is interruption in the transmission con- is being set:
Fail Safe nection for a specified amount of time, servos
BACK Fail Safe
The HoTT system provides greater reliability, when move to a previously programmed position.
CH MODE SET
compared to the classic PPM technology, because
CH 1. F/S 000% NEXT
the microprocessor in the HoTT receiver can process
both undistorted and distorted control signals from CH 2. HOLD STO

the transmitter. When the signals are excessively dis- CH 3. HOLD

torted or garbled, for example from noise, the proces- CH 4. HOLD

sor replaces them with saved control signals that will Delay 0.25s SET

place the receiver into Hold or Fail Safe Mode. This

80 Base menu - Fail safe

Move the control stick for this control channel into BACK Fail Safe WARNING
the desired position and press the  SET  button at the • The fail safe settings stored in the
!
CH MODE SET
bottom right of the display to transfer the position into CH 1. F/S -111% NEXT transmitter will not be automatical-
the value field, as shown below: ly transmitted to the receiver during
CH 2. F/S +55% STO
BACK Fail Safe CH 3. F/S -005% the operation! This transmission must
CH MODE SET CH 4. F/S 000%
Press
be manually performed within a ra-
CH 1. F/S -111% NEXT Delay 0.5s SET dio connection by tapping on the  STO 
CH 2. HOLD STO button!
CH 3. HOLD
The successful data storage is confirmed by the fol- • The fail safe settings stored in the
Press
lowing pop-up display: transmitter should be restored after
CH 4. HOLD
Delay 0.25s SET BACK Fail Safe
changing a receiver and should be de-
CH MODE SET leted in the previous receiver by Re-
Use same procedure to save additional fail safe po- CH 1. F/S -111% NEXT set.
sitions. CH 2. F/SPosition +55% STO
stored
• Use this safety option to program a
Finally, in the bottom Delay line, repeatedly press CH 3. F/S
FAILSAFE for the motor throttle posi-
the value field to choose the delay times. The fail CH 4. F/S tion in gas models while idling, or to
safe functions will not engage until the set time has Delay 0.5s SET program the motor function to STOP
elapsed: 0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s. In the example with electric models, or to HOLD with
below, a 0.5s delay was selected: At the same time the   F/S  value fields will be un-
helicopter models. This makes it more
marked again.
BACK Fail Safe difficult for the model to operate inde-
If the data is not successfully stored, check the radio
CH MODE SET pendently after switching on the re-
transmission between your transmitter and receiver
CH 1. F/S -111% NEXT ceiver system or in case of malfunc-
systems and repeat the process.
CH 2. F/S +55% STO tions and cause property damage and
Touch the  BACK  button to exit this display and re- injury. If necessary, ask for assistance
CH 3. F/S -005%
turn to the BASE submenu screen. from an experienced pilot.
CH 4. F/S 000%
Delay 0.5s SET

Notice
Fail safe settings are not applicable until saved to
the transmitter and transmitted to the receiver.

Turn on the receiver and transmit the selected   F/S 

values to the receiver by pressing the  STO  button:

Base menu - Fail safe 81

 Trim Settings
Trim Settings
Trimming allows models to fly straight and level with without looking at the display; when passing over To change the setting, press the CO or SE button
the control sticks in their central positions, and with middle position, a brief pause is inserted. the top left of the display:
no input from the pilot. Adjusting the trims during The current trimming values are automatically saved BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
each flying session is normal, as outside factors can when the model memories are changed. CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
affect flight characteristics. Set trims can be left alone The default factory original trim setting for the mz-24 STEP 04 04 04 04 INC
until the natural flight path of the model changes and Pro HoTT transmitter is automatically saved along Press
POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES
re-adjustment is required. with each model memory but can be changed by as- SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
To configure the trim settings, from the main display signing a different trim setting to each flight phase. D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to bring
up the BASE submenu screen: Phase Dependent Settings D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

000% 000% The phase display allows storage of phase-specific

values. Phase name is visible in green in the upper
4.2V
STEP Line (Trimming Step)
000:00.0 left side of the display, titled Phase #. Up to 6 phases
000 000
can be added and saved in the FUNCTION submenu With each click, the four digital trimming controls shift
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 PHASE (page 120). Change between the different the neutral position of the respective control stick by
M-1 000 Press
000
PHASE 1 phases by assigning switches. an adjustable increment (between 00 and 10) in each
MODELLNAME 1 direction. The maximum trimming path is always ap-
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO proximately ±30 % of the control path, independent of
000 000
CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW the selected number of trimming steps.
From the BASE submenu display, press the Trim Step STEP 04 04 04 04 INC
icon: POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES Notice
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC This setting is always Common, independent of
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET the CO or SE  setting.
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

CO / SE   Common/Single Option To change the current step incrementation of a trim

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
The Common (CO) or Single (SE) options allow users control, press the corresponding value field in the
to keep the same trim settings across all phases (com- STEP line:
Press
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
mon/phase dependent) or re-establish trim with each BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
phase (single/phase-specific). The throttle/brake or SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW

The two control sticks come with digital trimming. throttle/pitch control stick trim (control function CH1), STEP 04 04 04 04 INC

Trim can be adjusted incrementally by moving the is set as Common, while control functions CH 2 - 4 is POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES
control sticks in short bursts, or with increasing speed set as Single. SET 000% Press
000% 000% 000% DEC
by moving and holding the control stick in the desired D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
direction. D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
The current trimming positions are displayed in the
main display, and all adjustments are audible. It is
possible to find middle position during model use

82 Base menu - Trim setting

The field highlights blue: The example below shows controls T2, T3 and T4 The field highlights blue:
with trim position adjustments: BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW

INC STEP 04 02 04 04 INC

STEP 04 04 04 04 SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES STEP 04 02 04 04 INC POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES

000% 000% 000% 000% DEC POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
SET
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET

D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

Press the  SET  button at the bottom right of the dis-
Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge
play:
of the display to increase/decrease the value of SET Line (Saving Trim Positions)
the active field. Press the  RES  button to reset the This option saves the current position of the four dig-
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
changed value back to the default. Alternatively, ital trimmings so that they can be returned to POS SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display line of the display. After a model memory is changed, STEP 04 02 04 04 INC
screen to achieve the same result: or after long periods between flights, the last saved POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES
Press
DEC
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO trimming positions are visible in the SET line of the SET 000% 000% 000% 000%

SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW screen, as per the control function columns T1 - T4. D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
STEP 04 02 04 04 INC For example, a model is flown, landed and re-trimmed.
POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES The current trimming positions are displayed white in The trim value from the POS line to transferred to the
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC the POS line of the display. The value fields in the SET SET memory line:
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET line underneath show the saved trimming but since no
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON values have been saved, all value fields read 000%. BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO

The Trim Step display would look very much like the SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
Use the same procedure with the other trim controls. example above: current trim positions in the POS line, STEP 04 02 04 04 INC
saved settings in the SET line. POS 000% +13% 000% –07% RES
Tip
SET 000% 000% –006% 000% DEC
Trim controls are numbered T1 - T4  and refers exclu-
sively to control channels assignment 1 - 4.  Use the To save a trim value, press the field below the  trim D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET

SYSTEM submenu ST mode (page 208) to verify which setting to be transferred. In the example below, a D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

control mode channel relates to the trim control of the fixed-wing model elevator trim needs to be saved in
column T3: Use the same procedure for other trimming values.
left and right control sticks.
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
POS Line (Trim Position) SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
INC
The current trimming positions are shown in the POS STEP 04 02 04 04

line. (The trimming range is about ±30 % of the entire POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES

control path.) SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC

D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
Press
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

Base menu - Trim setting 83

Deleting Saved Trimming Positions Programming Tip
Press to highlight the field with the trimming value to Press the button in the line of the desired control. In Refer to the Programming Examples section (page
be deleted. In the example below, T3 needs to be the example below, D.TRIM 1 needs to be reassigned: 230) for trim setting examples.
reset:
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO Press the  VIEW  button on the top right of the display
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW to view and verify setting changes. All trim controls
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW STEP 04 02 04 04 INC are graphically displayed, as shown below:
STEP 04 02 04 04 INC POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES
Press BACK PHASE 1 STEP
POS 000% +13% 000% –07% RES SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
SET 000% 000% –006% 000% DEC 000% 000%
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
000% 000%
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
000% 000%
The field highlights blue:
Press the  RES  button to reset the highlighted field 000 000 000 000
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
back to the default value. In the example below, T3 000 000
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
has been reset to 000%:
STEP 04 02 04 04 INC The graphic display represents individual trim control-
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES lers according to the following schematic:
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
BACK PHASE 1 STEP
STEP 04 02 04 04 INC
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
POS 000% +13% 000% –07% RES DV1 000% 000% DV4
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
SL2 000% 000% SL1
SET
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM BLK SET Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of DT1 TRIM DT2
000% 000%
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON the display to increase/decrease the channels CH5 - DV2 DV3
CH12. Alternatively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to 000 000 000 000
Use the same procedure for other trimming values. the left of the display screen to achieve the same re- 000 TRIM 000

sult. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed val-

ue back to the default NONE . In the example below, Tip
Digital Trim 1 and 2
D.TRIM 1 needs to be reassigned to Channel 8: The main menu shortcut for this display can be reached
Independent of the trim control 1 - 4 settings de-
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO by pressing on the top central yellow bar graphics:
scribed above, the INC/DEC buttons DT1 and DT2
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW 000% 000%
on the transmitter (near switches S2 and S3) can be
STEP 04 02 04 04 INC TX RX
assigned to control channels 5 - 12 via the D.TRIM 4.2V
RX 05.5V
1 and D.TRIM 2 lines of this display. Depending on POS 000% +13% –06% –07% RES
000 000 000:00.0
the  CO  (common) or  SE  (single) setting at the top SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
0:01:23
Press
mz 000:00.0
left side of the display, follow the storage of their trim D.TRIM 1 CH8 AUTO TRIM INH SET
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
options accordingly CO (common) or SE (single). D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON
MODEL NAME 1
The possible trim amount is ±30 %. Use the same procedure for D.TRIM 2. BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

84 Base menu - Trim setting

 AUTO TRIM At the same time the control sticks can be released to
The AUTO TRIM function allows users to quickly and the normal position, as shown below:
easily to trim a model, for example during the first BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
flight or after large upgrades, repairs, etc. SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
During a model’s first flight, the previous ground per- STEP 04 02 04 04 INC
formed settings may not be applicable to the new POS 000% –12% +09% –29% RES
flight requirements. Correcting the attitude requires SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
users to simultaneously move the control sticks and D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM OFF SET
trim controls until the model flies straight. D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL SW 8
Once the required flight attitude is reached by moving
the control functions 2 - 4, the AUTO TRIM function Notices
can be activated by moving the assigned switch one
• For safety reasons never use the AUTO TRIM
time. This is typically a self-centering switch, such
option if the trim step is set to "0".
as the 3-position switch S8, which will return to the
center position after the switch is flipped to the ON • Control sticks 2 - 4 must be in central position
position. (For safety reasons it is highly recommended while the switch is assigned. Otherwise the
a self-centering switch is used, rather than a switch deviation percentage from the central position
with a permanent ON position). will already be stored as trim values in the trim
memory.
About one second after the AUTO TRIM switch is
pushed, the deviation percentage from center posi- • All AUTO TRIM switch activations are cumu-
tion of control stick positions 2 - 4 are stored as trim lative. For safety reasons it is highly recom-
value (within maximum ±30 %): mended to use the switch only once and to
deactivate it after the "AUTO TRIM flight" has
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
finished. Otherwise there is the risk that the
SE T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
AUTO TRIM function might be inadvertently
INC
STEP 04 02 04 04 activated.
POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES
• Never assign the AUTO TRIM function to a
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
"normal" position holding switch where the
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET
switch will need to be switched to the OFF po-
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL SW 8
sition after each AUTO TRIM process. Oth-
erwise, all other switch activations will
inhibit the AUTO TRIM process.
• Refer to the POS Line and SET Line settings
section (page 83) for additional information on
setting and storing these values.

Base menu - Trim setting 85

 Servo Monitor
Servo Positions / Servo Test Function Display
Use this display to check servo settings, program set- PHASE 1. (Additional phases will be named numer- Helicopter models
tings into different phases, and test and change servo ically, e.g. Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multi-
settings prior to use. ple phases, refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase Bar 1 Pitch or roll (2) or nick (2) servo
To configure the servo settings, from the main display section (page 120). Each new phase will need to be Bar 2 Roll (1) servo
press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to bring assigned to a different switch. To change the phases, Bar 3 Nick (1) servo
up the BASE submenu screen: activate the corresponding switch(es). Bar 4 Yaw servo (gyro)
000% 000%
Servo monitor Bar 5 Nick (2)-Servo / free channel
4.2V Bar 6 Throttle servo or governor
Current servo settings are displayed  precisely be-
000 000 000:00.0 tween -150% and +150% of the normal path, taking Bar 7 Gyro sensitivity / free channel
mz into account control and servo settings, dual rate/ Bar 8 Speed controller / free channel
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-1 000 Press
000 expo functions, the interaction between the linear and Bar 9 Free channel
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 curve mixes, etc. The middle position of the servo is Bar 10 Free channel
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 shown as 000%. Settings can be checked without Bar 11 Free channel
000 000
having to turn on the receiver. Carefully test all the Bar 12 Free channel
From the BASE submenu display, press the Servo program steps on the model before first use to make
icon: sure there are no errors. Fixed-wing models
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
BACK PHASE 1 Servo Bar 1 Throttle/brake servo
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST Bar 2 Aileron or left aileron
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT Bar 3 Elevator
Bar 4 Rudder
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
Bar 5 Aileron right
–100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
Bar 6 Flap (left) / free channel
Press
Bar 7 Flap (right) / free channel
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%

Bar 8 Free channel / second elevator servo

The display follows model-specific channel as- Bar 9 Free channel / AILE2 left
The Servo display can be accessed at any time by signments:
Bar 10 Free channel / Flap2 right
simultaneously pressing the arrow keys ( pq ) to the
Land and Water Models Bar 11 Free channel / AILE2 left
left of the display screen or by pressing the SERVO
Bar 12 Free channel / AILE2 right
button in the upper right hand corner of certain menu Refer to the model’s manual for channel assignments.
screens. Pressing the ESC key underneath the arrow
Drone Notices
keys brings up the previous screen.
• Model types Car, Drone and Boat have no
Phase Depending Displays Bar 1 Pitch (climb/sink)
established pre-assignment list.
Bar 2 Roll
The Servo submenu allows for different phase-spe- • The servo display channel assignments refer
Bar 3 Nick
cific values to be programmed. Phase names are dis- to the default servo sequence. It does not re-
Bar 4 Yaw
played in green in the upper left side of the screen fer to any changes to the outputs made in the
next to the BACK button. Standard defaults naming Bar 5 - 12 Open for user assignment
BASE submenus Out.Swap section (page
for the phases is usually displayed as NORMAL, or 96), or TX ctl (page 68).

86 Base menu - Servo monitor

• The number of channels displayed in this Servo test Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
menu refers to the maximum control chan- the display to increase/decrease the value in .05s in-
nels available in the transmitter. The number Notice crements. Alternatively, press the arrow keys ( pq )
of usable channels may be significantly low- Start servo tests in the appropriate model memo- to the left of the display screen to achieve the same
er depending on the type of receiver and the ry and without using a mixer. Otherwise, unfore- result. Press the   RES  button to reset the changed
number of connected servos. seeable servo deflections will occur. value back to the default (0.5s). In the example below,
• This display is useful while programming the the value is raised to +4.0s:
model since all transmitter settings can be To activate the servo test function, press the TEST
BACK PHASE 1 Servo
quickly and easily checked. Carefully test all button at the top right side of the Servo screen:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
model program steps before first use to make BACK PHASE 1 Servo +4.0s
sure there are no errors. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST INC
RES
Press
DEC
–100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% START

–100%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
000%
Start the servo test by touching the START button at
the bottom right corner of the screen:
Additional buttons will appear below the TEST button:
BACK PHASE 1 Servo

BACK PHASE 1 Servo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST +4.0s
+0.5s INC
INC RES
Press
RES DEC
DEC –100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
START
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
–100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% START
An active warning safety query will appear:
To change the default cycle time of 0.5 seconds, press
BACK PHASE 1 Servo
value field button underneath the TEST button.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
The field will highlight blue: Select +4.0s
BACK PHASE 1 Servo Start Servo Test? INC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
RES
+0.5s YES NO
DEC
INC –100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% START
RES
DEC
–100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% START

Base menu - Servo monitor 87

Touch  NO  to terminate the procedure.
Touch  YES  to start the servo test function. This func-
tion automatically controls the servos operating under
the assumption that the associated controls (starting
from the neutral position) will be simultaneously and
continuously moved back and forth between -100%
and +100% during the set period. All of the servos
that are active in the model memory move within the
set servo paths and servo path limits until the servo
test is stopped by touching the  STOP  button at the
bottom right corner of the screen:
BACK PHASE 1 Servo

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
+4.0s
INC
RES
Press
DEC
–100% –061% +100% –100% –100% –100%
–100% +061% –100% –100% –100% –100% STOP

88 Base menu - Servo monitor

Personal notes 89
 Base Menu - Control/Switch Setting
Control and Switch Assignment
Use this menu to set control sticks and assign switch- By contrast, a new model memory for a helicopter • Setting the control travel affects all outgoing
es for phase changes, trim adjustments, timers, fail model for servo 6, the aforementioned control ele- mixing and coupling functions. All servos that
safe, delays, etc. ments are initially inactive. are activated by the relevant control element
To configure the control/switch settings, from the Only the servos controlled by the two control sticks will be affected.
main display press the BASE menu gear icon (green can be moved when these systems are initially deliv- • Control direction of a glider’s brake
“B”) to bring up the BASE submenu screen: ered and a new model memory is initialized and bound control, generally the "front" position
000% 000% to the receiver. By contrast, the servos connected to of the CH1 control stick, is defined
4.2V different slots remain in their middle position. through the off-set value in the BUTTERFLY
000 000 000:00.0 Though inconvenient, it is the only way to freely se- OFF line of the FUNCTION submenu BUT-
lect from the other control elements of the transmit- TERFLY (page 202).
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Press
ter and avoid the deactivation of unnecessary control Conversion of a motor powered
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 elements. Any control element not needed and acci- model’s control direction of the throt-
MODELLNAME 1
dentally activated has no influence on the model if it is tle control stick (CH1) is described in
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 not assigned to any function. the FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV (page
From the BASE submenu display, press the CTL Set Use the CTL Set submenu to assign all of the afore- 128).
icon: mentioned control elements as needed within any Conversion of a helicopter’s control
function input without restriction. Each of these control direction of the throttle/pitch control
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
elements can be simultaneously assigned to several stick (CH1) is described in the FUNC-
functions as needed. For example, the same toggle TION submenu PIT.CRV (page 160).
switch assigned to an input in the CTL Set submenu
Model Sel
Press
Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
can also be assigned as a timer on/off switch in the Conversion of a car,
Timer submenu, etc. boat or drone control
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo
direction of the throt-
Notices tle control stick (CH1) is described in the
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce
• When assigning several functions to the same FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV (page 128).
Across the top of the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter are switch, note that incorrect responses may
the dials and switches for servos responding to con- arise, i.e. using the same switch to change
trol functions 1 - 4 and their trim controls: Phases and control Phase Trimming. To rem-
• 1 two-position switch with long handle (S6) edy the overlap, change switch assignments
for one of the conflicting functions.
• 1 three-position switch with long handle (S3)
• 4 three-position switches with a short handle (S1,
S4, S5 and S7)
• 2 one-side, self-neutralizing three-position switch-
es with long handle (S2 and S8)
• 2 INC/DEC buttons (DT1 and DT2)
• 2 rear proportional sliders (SL1 and SL2)
• 4 proportional dials (DV1 - DV4)

90 Base menu - Control/switch setting

CTL Column (Control/Switch) The active Select window appears: BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO

Assigning Switch or Control BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO Press

CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT
Tip CH 5. NONE
Select
000% 100% 100% NEXT CH 6. SL 2 000% +100% +100% INC
Channels 1 - 4 are located on the first page of this dis- CH 6. NONE
NO
000% +100% +100% INC CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
play screen, 5 - 8 on page 2, 9 - 12 on page three. The CH 7. NONE
CLR
000% +100% +100% RES CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
delay menu is on page 4. Press the  NEXT  button on CH 8. NONE
LOGIC
000% +100% +100% DEC CTL OFFSET – Travel +
the right side of the display to advance screens: CTL OFFSET – Travel +
The active Select window reappears:
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO Press NO  to terminate the procedure. BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
To assign the control or switch, activate the desired
CH 1. ST 1 NEXT Press control element. Remember that the dials and rotary CH 5. NONE
Select
000% 100% 100% NEXT
CH 2. ST 2 +100% +100% INC controls are only recognized after a pause and need CH 6. SL 2
NO
000% +100% +100% INC
CH 3. ST 3 +100% +100% RES to be activated for slightly longer than the switches. CH 7. NONE
CLR
000% +100% +100% RES
CH 4. ST 4 +100% +100% DEC Turn the dial in either direction to register the assign- CH 8. NONE
LOGIC
000% +100% +100% DEC
CTL OFFSET – Travel+ ment. Note that with an assigned 2-position switch,
CTL OFFSET – Travel +
the only option is to flip back-and-forth between the
end values (for example motor ON/OFF). The 3-posi- To delete the assigned control or switch, press CLR :
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
tion switch offers a middle position.
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
The field displays either the control name or the
CH 9. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
switch number. In the example below, CH6 has been Select
Press
CH 10. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT
assigned to SL2: NO
CH 11. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES CH 6. SL 2 000% +100% +100% INC
CLR
DEC BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
CH 12. NONE 000% +100% +100% LOGIC
CTL OFFSET – Travel + CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT CTL OFFSET – Travel +
To assign a control element, press on the value field in CH 6. SL 2 000% +100% +100% INC

the line of the desired control channel. In the example CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
The CH6 field returns to NONE:
below, CH6 needs to be assigned to switch SL2: CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
CTL OFFSET – Travel +
CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO Deleting Controls or Switches CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
Press Press the value field of the assignment to be delet- CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
ed. In the example below, the switch assigned to CH6 CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
needs to be cleared: CTL OFFSET – Travel +
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC Use the same procedure for the other settings.
CTL OFFSET – Travel +

Base menu - Control/switch setting 91

Notices Press the Offset value to be changed. In the example -TRAVEL+ Column
• The controllers assigned in this sub-menu below, the offset for CH8 needs to be increased: Use this column to set the travel of each control ele-
globally affect all the phases. Only the offset BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO ment.
in the second line and the Travel Setting (third Press the left value field in the corresponding line to
and fourth column) affect specific phases. CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT set a value to the minus side ( - ) of the control travel,
• Pay attention to default receiver channel as- CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC and/or on the right to set a value on the plus side (
Press
signments. For example, if a model with CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES + ) of the control travel. In the example below, both
flaps assigns  a control or switch  identified CH 8. DV 2 000% +100% +100% DEC the minus side of the travel distance needs to be de-
as FLAP(1L) to input 6, its function is depen- CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
creased. Press the value field in the appropriate col-
dent on the current setting in the ACT line umn of the Travel columns:
of the FUNCTION submenu Flap set (page The field highlights to blue:
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
196). If the value field to the right of the ACT BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
line is   INH  or   OFF  ,  then this control or
CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT
switch acts exclusively on servo 6 (and possi-
CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
bly 7), whose values are set in the FUNCTION Press
CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
submenu D/R,Exp (page 124).
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES CH 8. DV 2 +012% +100% +100% DEC
CH 8. DV 2 000% +100% +100% DEC CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
Phase Depending Settings
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
The CTL Set submenu allows for phase-specific sym- The field highlights to blue:
metrical delay values to be programmed in the OFF- The adjustment range is ±125%. Press the   INC 
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
SET and TRAVEL columns. or   DEC  button at the right edge of the display to
Phase names are displayed in green in the upper left increase/decrease the value. Alternatively, press the
CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT
side of the screen next to the BACK button. Standard arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to
CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
defaults naming for the phases is usually displayed achieve the same result:
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
as NORMAL/PHASE 1. Additional phases will be BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO CH 8. DV 2 +012% +100% +100% DEC
named numerically, e.g. Phase 2, Phase 3, etc. To CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
define multiple phases, refer to the FUNCTION sub- CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT
menu Phase section (page 120). Each new phase will CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC The adjustment range is ±125%. Press the INC 
need to be assigned to a different switch. To change CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES or   DEC  button at the right edge of the display to
the phases, activate the corresponding switch(es) CH 8. DV 2 +012% +100% +100% DEC increase/decrease the value. Alternatively, press the
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen to
OFFSET Column achieve the same result.
Use this column to change the center of each control Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
element, i.e. its zero point (or if desired with reference back to the default (+100%).
to a specific phase). Use the same procedure for the other settings.

92 Base menu - Control/switch setting

Use the same procedure for a value on the plus side The field highlights to blue: Notice
of the control travel, for example: Use this setting to set a symmetrical delay for the
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO CH 1. 0.0s CH 7. 0.0s
transmitter-side control signal  with the stan-
CH 2. 0.0s CH 8. 0.0s NEXT
dard labeling  0.0s . A delay set here affects the
CH 5. NONE 000% 100% 100% NEXT INC
servo with the same channel number of the delayed re-
CH 3. 0.0s CH 9. 0.0s
INC
ceiver connection as well as all servos controlled by the
CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% CH 4. 0.0s CH 10. 0.0s RES
control element assigned to specific control function.
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES CH 5. 0.0s CH 11. 0.0s DEC
CH 8. DV 2 +012% +089% +087% DEC CH 6. 0.0s CH 12. 0.0s
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
The maximum value adjustment range is 9.9 seconds.
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value Press the INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of the
back to the default (+100%). display to increase/decrease the value. Alternatively,
Use the same procedure for the other settings. press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display
screen to achieve the same result.
Symmetrical Delay
In the example below, CH8 has a 4.5s delay:
Use this screen to set a time delay for the selected
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
control signal. CTL Set

CH 1. 0.0s CH 7. 0.0s
Press the NEXT button on the right side of the screen
CH 2. 0.0s CH 8. 4.5s NEXT
to move to the delay screen of the CTL Set display:
CH 3. 0.0s CH 9. 0.0s INC
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
CH 4. 0.0s CH 10. 0.0s RES
CH 1. 0.0s CH 7. 0.0s DEC
CH 5. 0.0s CH 11. 0.0s
CH 2. 0.0s CH 8. 0.0s NEXT
CH 6. 0.0s CH 12. 0.0s
CH 3. 0.0s CH 9. 0.0s INC
CH 4. 0.0s CH 10. 0.0s RES Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
CH 5. 0.0s CH 11. 0.0s DEC back to the default (0.0s).
CH 6. 0.0s CH 12. 0.0s The Servo display can be accessed at any time by
pressing the SERVO button in the upper right hand
Press the 0.0s  value field in the appropriate channel corner the screen or by simultaneously pressing the
line. In the example below, CH8 requires a 4.5s delay: arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen or
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO by. Pressing the ESC key underneath the arrow keys
Press
CH 1. 0.0s CH 7. 0.0s brings up the previous screen.
CH 2. 0.0s CH 8. 0.0s NEXT
CH 3. 0.0s CH 9. 0.0s INC Use the same procedure for the other settings.
CH 4. 0.0s CH 10. 0.0s RES
CH 5. 0.0s CH 11. 0.0s DEC
CH 6. 0.0s CH 12. 0.0s

Base menu - Control/switch setting 93

 Throttle Limit Function

After initializing a helicopter as a new model memory, Meaning and Use of Throttle Limit In the BASE submenu CTL Set, the value of the
input channel 12 will provide Throttle Limit function- Unlike fixed-wing models, the performance of the (right) +plus side of the Travel column has to be large
ality. This function is deactivated by default and re- power unit for helicopters cannot be directly con- enough so that when the Throttle Limit Control is at its
mains so until a control switch is assigned. trolled with the CH1 control stick. Instead, it can maximum position the full throttle setting achievable
only be indirectly controlled by the gas curve settings by the throttle curve settings is not limited. Typically, a
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
(made in certain helicopter FUNCTION submenus), or value between +100 % and +125 % is set.
CH 9. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT by a governor, if the model has one. BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
CH 10. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
Tip
CH 11. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES CH 9. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
Individual gas curves can also be adjusted while pro-
CH 12. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC CH 10. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
gramming the different phases.
CTL OFFSET – Travel + CH 11. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
DEC
Both methods of controlling the output allows heli- CH 12. DV 2 000% +100% +125%

Notice copters to be reliably started and stopped without ad- CTL OFFSET – Travel +

This input cannot be used for any other use! The ditional intervention by preventing carburetor motors The value on the (left) -minus side of the Travel col-
throttle limit will remain deactivated until Ch 12 is from approaching idling during normal flight. umn should be set to allow an electric drive to be re-
free! The Throttle Limit function elegantly solves this prob- liably turned off with the Throttle Limit Control, or to
lem by limiting the position of the throttle servo or the allow a carburetor to be closed enough so that the
By assigning a control the Throttle Limit function will performance of a motor control unit. The Throttle Limit ICE engine can be turned off in conjunction with digi-
be activated and set according to the following de- Control makes it possible to turn the throttle down to tal CH1 trimming. This value is usually best when left
scription. In the example below, the DV2 dial has idle, allowing the trim control of the throttle/pitch con- at +100%.
been assigned to Ch 12: trol stick to assume control or to directly turn off an The variable limitation of the throttle travel allows the
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO electric drive. Conversely, the throttle servo or motor drive to be comfortably started and stopped. Gener-
control unit will only reach its full throttle position when ally this approach is much safer: for example, it could
CH 9. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
the Throttle Limit Control releases the entire travel. prevent the accidental activation of the CH1 control
CH 10. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC stick when a helicopter with an idling motor is being
CH 11. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES carried to the takeoff site.
CH 12. DV 2 000% +100% +100% DEC If the carburetor or motor control unit is too open, a
CTL OFFSET – Travel + beep sounds when you turn on the transmitter or af-
ter a model change, and the following active warning
The standard approach of other remote control sys- message appears:
tems is to program two phases: THR.HOLD and no
Warning
THR.HOLD. When Ch 12 has been assigned to a
Thr.HOLD Thr.CUT
switch and the settings adjusted, it is not necessary
Thr.POS PHASE
to program both phases.
Normal signal
Instead of THR.HOLD, the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmit- Please select RF ON/OFF
ter offers more precise options for adjustment, such ON OFF
as increasing the system speed below hovering to
increase flexibility.

94 Base menu - Control/switch setting | Throttle limit function

As long as the automatic switch on of the RF module Notice While the gas limiter is closed, adjust the carburetor
is inhibited, the throttle limit or the throttle/pitch con- The position of the throttle trimming lever is irrel- linkage so that the carburetor is completely closed.
trol stick lets the output signal of channel 6 be out of evant during the reset since it does not work Make sure that the throttle servo does not mechan-
idle range. when the throttle limiter is open. ically over-travel in the two extreme positions (full
throttle/motor OFF).
Tip Without starting the gas engine, completely open the Lastly, the setting range of idle trimming must be
Monitor the influence of the Throttle Limit Control carburetor by adjusting the throttle servo mechani- matched with Point L of the gas curve. On the Throt-
through the BASE submenu Servo. Remember that in cally and by adjusting the servo 6 travel in the BASE tle Curve display, adjust Point L to approximately +15
the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter that servo output 6 submenu E.P.A (page 62). to +18%, as shown in the example below:
controls the throttle servo. Next, completely close the throttle limiter by turning
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
the proportional dial DV2 all the way clockwise. Use
THR.Limit +125% TRIM
Idle Basic Settings the throttle/pitch control stick trimming control to
Curve OFF
Open the throttle limit all the way to the end point. move the trimming position mark into the Motor OFF
IN –100% INC
Move the throttle/pitch control stick to the maximum position.
OUT –067%
pitch position and activate the standard throttle curve Notice POINT L +016% DEC
through the FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV (page
The position of the throttle/pitch control stick is ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
160).
irrelevant when the gas limiter is closed.  If only To precisely adjust a seamless transition from idle
Throttle Curve using the throttle limiter when adjusting the car- trimming to the throttle curve: while the throttle limiter
Access the throttle curve settings display through the buretor linkage, the throttle/pitch control stick can re- is closed and idle trimming is completely open, move
FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV. main in the maximum pitch position while switching be- the pitch control stick back and forth slightly at the
If the standard gas curve has automatically been tween full throttle (limiter open) and motor OFF minimum stop. The throttle servo should not move.
changed after a model memory has been initialized, (limiter closed). Any subsequent adaptation of the gas curve must be
temporarily reset it to: POINT L = 000%, POINT 3 = done later during flight.
+050% and POINT H = +100%: The motor should always be started with the throttle
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO limiter completely closed. Only adjust the idle with the
THR.Limit +125% TRIM throttle/pitch control stick trimming control, and only
CURVE OFF
turn off the motor with digital trimming.
IN –100% INC
OFF –100%
POINT L 000% DEC
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT

Base menu - Control/switch setting | Throttle limit function 95

 Transmitter Output
Changing the Transmitter Outputs
The mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter programming pro- Remember that the in the BASE submenu Servo Use the same procedure for the other transmitter out-
vides maximum flexibility  in control channel receiver Monitor display, the control channels are set accord- puts, for example:
assignment allowing users to freely switch transmitter ing to the receiver assignment, and that the outputs
BACK Out.Swap SERVO
outputs 1 to 12 according to personal preference. are NOT changed.
TX 6 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC
To change the transmitter output settings, from the Programming TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES
main display press the BASE menu gear icon (green DEC
“B”) to bring up the BASE submenu screen: Press the value field in the line of the channel/output TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9

000% 000%
combination to be changed: TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10

TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11

4.2V BACK Out.Swap SERVO
TX 1 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12
000 000 000:00.0 TX 1 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC
TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 Notice
Press TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9 DEC
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10
Any subsequent changes to the settings, such as
Press
MODELLNAME 1 servo travel settings, dual rate/expo, mixer, etc.,
TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
must always correspond with the original receiver
000 000
TX 6 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12
assignment.
From the BASE submenu display, press the Out.
The field highlights blue:
Swap icon: Touch the BACK button at the top left of the display to
BACK Out.Swap SERVO
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
return to the BASE submenu:
TX 1 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC
TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9 DEC

Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

Press TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10

Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11

TX 6 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12

TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo

CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
the display to increase/decrease the value. Alterna- CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

Use this display to assign the 12 transmitter control tively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the
channels to transmitter outputs 1 - 12 according to display screen to achieve the same result.
personal preference: Example
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value In the helicopter program for the mz-24 Pro HoTT
BACK Out.Swap SERVO back to the default. transmitter, the outputs for a pitch servo and the throt-
TX 1 CH >> OUT1 TX 7 CH >> OUT7 INC tle servo have been changed from previous Graupner
TX 2 CH >> OUT2 TX 8 CH >> OUT8 RES transmitters. The throttle servo is now assigned to trans-
TX 3 CH >> OUT3 TX 9 CH >> OUT9 DEC mitter output 6, and the pitch servo is now assigned
TX 4 CH >> OUT4 TX 10 CH >> OUT10 to output 1. To keep the previous configuration, switch
TX 5 CH >> OUT5 TX 11 CH >> OUT11 channels 1 and 6 so that (control) channel 6 is at output
TX 6 CH >> OUT6 TX 12 CH >> OUT12 1 and vice versa.

96 Base menu - Transmitter output

Notice
The mz-24 Pro allows the 12 transmitter control
channels to be assigned according to personal
preference in both single receivers as well as mul-
tiple receivers. Refer to the Channel Mapping section
(page 104) of the BASE submenu Telemetry (page 98).

Base menu - Transmitter output 97

 Telemetry
Settings and Displays
Receiver settings and the displays and settings of the
connected telemetry sensors can be retrieved and
programmed in real time in the Telemetry menu. The
receiver connection is maintained by the feedback
channel integrated in the HoTT receivers.
Up to four sensors can be connected through a V or Y
cable at the telemetry connection of the HoTT receiv-
ers provided with actual firmware.
The Telemetry menus can be kept current by recent
and future updates, and allow for additional functions
or languages to be added and maintained.
Tip
Automatic update notifications will be sent by e-mail
once products are registered at http://www.graupneru-
sa.com/PRODUCT-REGISTRATION_ep_56-1.html.
Notes
• The following instructions are based on
the functions available at the time this
manual was drafted.
• As noted in the Binding Multiple Receivers
section (page 69), multiple receivers can be
bound to a single model. Users can directly
manage one or two receivers per model and
use a setup menu to distribute the 12 trans-
mitter control channels between the two re-
ceivers.
During subsequent operation, only the receiv-
er selected in the line RX SELECT of the Te-
lemetry menu can establish a telemetry con-
nection between the transmitter and the most
recently bound receiver.
98 Function menu - Telemetry
BACK Telemetry
The HoTT receiver should be reinitialized be-
RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
fore use in another model. Refer to the Re-
SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
ceiver Start Up and Reset section (page 14)
>> INC
for more information.
SENSOR
Only program the servo rotation direction, ser-
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC vo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc. in the
transmitter with the model-specified standard
menu. Settings will overlap different transmit-
Only these receivers can be addressed by ters, causing operation failure.
the Telemetry menu. The selection may have • Transmitter control channels can be assigned
to change before settings can be made to a according to personal preference within single
specific receiver. This is because the second or multiple receivers using the  receiver-side
and subsequent receivers work in parallel in channel assignment function called Channel
the Slave Mode. Mapping (page 104). Additionally, multiple
• The telemetry data exchange between trans- receiver outputs can be assigned the same
mitter and receiver normally takes place after control function. This is useful, for example,
the four large RC data-packs are transmitted, if using two servos (instead of one) to actuate
resulting in a delay of control button reactions each aileron, etc.
or setting changes. This does not constitute
an error.
WARNING
• When adjusting the remote control, make sure
that the transmitter antenna is a minimum • To avoid malfunctions from the feed-
!
distance of 3 feet (1 meter) from the receiver back channel when operating towed
antennas. Antennas too close to one anoth- models,  maintain a minimum distance
er may cause an interruption in the feedback of approximately 20 inches (50 cm) be-
channel connection. tween the participating receivers or
their antennas. Using the satellite re-
• All settings that have been made using the Te-
ceiver is an option.
lemetry menu (i.e. fail safe, servo rotation di-
rection reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve
settings, etc.) are saved in the receiver and are
only transferred to other models when the re-
ceiver is changed.
• To avoid accidental starts, models and Telemetry If you have bound a receiver as RX1 or RX2 in the
sensors should only be programmed To change the telemetry settings, from the main dis- BASE submenu TX ctl, then designate one of the two
when the model is on the ground with play press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to receivers as the "telemetry-receiver" by changing the
the motor turned off or the drive bat- bring up the BASE submenu screen: value of the field to the right of  RX1  in the RX SE-
tery disconnected. 000% 000% LECT line. It is standard practice to default to the
For example, a servo test that acci- 4.2V
most recent receiver bound. To change the default
dentally activates the receiver could setting  ALWAYS , press to highlight the field blue:
000 000 000:00.0
cause the model to crash and cause BACK Telemetry
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
injury or property damage. RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
Press
M-1 000 000
• Consult the safety instructions con- PHASE 1 SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
MODELLNAME 1
tained in the Part 1 of the manual in- BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
SENSOR >> INC
cluded in the transmitter packaging. 000 000
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
From the BASE submenu display, press the Teleme- VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC
try icon:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of
the display to change the value. Alternatively, press
the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the display screen
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT
to achieve the same result.
Press
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default (ALWAYS).
Value Explanation
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce

BACK Telemetry  ALWAYS  The transmitter reacts to the

RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
back-channel of the selected receiver
SETTING & DATA VIEW >> with normal/standard functionality.
SENSOR >> INC  4TIME  The transmitter reacts to the
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES  8TIME  back-channel of the selected receiver
VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC with the selected delay.
 OFF  The transmitter telemetry functions
are turned off.
Basic operation
The Telemetry menu corresponds to the other menus Notice
of the mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter; the few deviations
Using settings other than the ALWAYS  default is
are described below:
only suggested if two non-connected receivers
are bound to two different transmitters for close
distance use, as the back-channel of one of the two re-
ceivers is often disrupted.

Function menu - Telemetry 99

Specifically, there is the possibility of back-channels re-
ciprocal interference, e.g. a camera drone with separate
camera and drone control or a towing model for mod-
el-parachute.
Scroll between the individual Telemetry menu pages
by pressing the  ENT  (forward) and  ESC  (reverse)
buttons. Angled brackets “>” and “<” will appear on
the RX line indicating the direction of additional pag-
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons to change the value
within the selected range. Press the  SET  button to
confirm and store to the receiver memory.
Press the  ESC  button at the top right of the display
to return to the previous page; press the BACK but-
ton at the top left of the Telemetry display to return to
the BASE submenu screen:
BACK Telemetry

es: RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS

SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
BACK Telemetry
SENSOR >> INC
RX SERVO V6.35<> RECV ESC
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
>OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
REVERSE : OFF VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC
CENTER : 1500µsec EAM INC
TRIM : –000µsec
LIMIT– : 150% VARIO ENT
LIMIT+ : 150% GPS SET
PERIOD : 20msec Notices
ESC
• If an active warning message appears instead
If only one angled bracket is showing, this indicates of the desired Telemetry page menu, then
the first or final menu page; scroll only in the direction there is no connection with the receiver. Turn
indicated. on the receiver system, bind the receiver or
To change parameters on a menu lines, move the activate it in the RX SELECT line as described
left-hand line bracket (seen above to the left of the above in the Basic Operation section (page
OUTPUT CH line). Press the  INC  or  DEC  button to 99).
move the “>” pointer up or down one line. The brack- • If an active warning message appears un-
et will automatically skip menu lines which cannot be expectedly while the Telemetry page menu
changed. is being programmed, the connection to the
To change a parameter, place the pointer on the menu receiver system has been suddenly lost. Turn
line and press the   SET  button at the right edge of the receiver system off and on again, or find
the screen. The parameter to be changed highlights the origin of the connection failure, or re-bind
white: the receiver.
BACK Telemetry

RX SERVO V6.35 < > RECV ESC

OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
REVERSE : OFF
> CENTER : 1500µsec EAM INC
TRIM : –000µsec
LIMIT– : 150% VARIO ENT
LIMIT+ : 150% GPS SET
PERIOD : 0msec
ESC

100 Function menu - Telemetry

SETTINGS AND DISPLAYS

SETTING & DATA VIEW L.R-VOLT Last receiver current operating volt- Consequently, the reception shown in dBm in the dis-
Press the “>>” brackets in the SETTING & DATA VIEW age since the previous time the re- play is generally negative. The higher the number after
line of the BASE submenu Telemetry main display: ceiver was turned on the minus sign, the worse the reception. This is im-
portant to remember while performing a Range Test.
BACK Telemetry SENSOR1 Sensor 1 additional telemetry voltage
Perform a Range Test (page 71) before each flight,
RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS and temperature in °C
and simulate all servo movements that could occur
SETTING & DATA VIEW >> SENSOR2 Sensor 2 additional telemetry voltage during the flight. The range must be at least 164 feet
SENSOR >> INC and temperature in °C (50 m) on the ground in an activated range test. At
Press
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
this distance, a value no less than -80dBm may be
>> DEC
VOICE TRIGGER displayed in the RX DATAVIEW display in the S-dBm
S-QUA (Signal Quality) line to ensure safe operation. If the value is lower, e.g.
-85 dBm, do not operate the model. Check the receiv-
This screen is for informational purposes only and not This percentage represents the quality of the signal er installation and antenna position.
for making or adjusting settings: packages sent from the transmitter arriving at the re-
During operation, if the reception falls below -90 dBm,
ceiver’s microprocessor.
BACK Telemetry
immediately reduce the distance between the trans-
RX DATAVIEW V6.35 > RECV ESC This evaluation is shown live on the transmitter's dis- mitter and the model. Typically, before this level is
S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBm
GAM DEC play via the receiver's feedback channel. reached the acoustic range warning is triggered (1
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C
L PACK TIME 00010msec EAM INC
S-dBm (Reception Level) beep per second). The acoustic range warning re-
R-VOLT : 05.0V
L.R-VOLT : 04.5V VARIO ENT flects the signal strength of the feedback channel to
dBm is a logarithmic value used to quantify power ra-
SENSOR1 : 00.0V 00°C GPS SET ensure safe operation.
SENSOR2 : 00.0V 00°C tios in decibels. Here, it provides a comparative over-
ESC
view of the extreme differences in radio and receiver S-STR (Signal Strength)
levels. A level of 0 dBm = 1 mW. The dBm is positive The signal strength is displayed in a percentage. In
Value Explanation
for an output of >1 mW and negative for an output of general, an acoustic range warning (1 beep per sec-
V#.## Receiver firmware version <1 mW. ond) is emitted once the receiver signal in the feed-
S-QUA Signal quality percentage from trans- Specifically, this means that in typical remote con- back channel becomes too weak. Since the transmit-
mitter to receiver trol systems, generally less than 1 mW (or <0 dBm) ter's output is significantly higher than the receiver,
S-dBm Signal decibel-milliwatt level percent- is received by the receiver from a 100 mW output of the model can always be operated safely. The model
age from transmitter to receiver a standard transmitter (or 20 dBm). This is because distance should nevertheless be reduced for safety
radio waves fan out from the transmitter, which weak- reasons until the warning tone stops.
S-STR Signal strength percentage from the
ens the signal as it travels to the receiver.
transmitter to receiver
R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °C
L PACK Lost package duration in milliseconds
TIME showing longest duration in which
data packs were lost during transmis-
sion
R-VOLT Receiver current operating voltage

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 101

R-TEM. (Receiver Temperature) CAUTION Value Explanation Settings
The receiver temperature must remain within an ac- Always keep an eye on the receiver's op- V#.## Receiver firmware None
ceptable range during all flight conditions (ideally be-
tween -10° to +55 °C).
! erating voltage. If it is too low, do not op-
erate or start the model.
OUTPUT
version
Selected channel 1+ (depending
The receiver temperature threshold triggers a warning, CH on the receiver
which can be set in the submenu RX SERVO TEST L.R-VOLT (Lowest Receiver Operating Voltage)
under ALARM TEMP+ (50 to 80°C) and ALARM REVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ON
L.R-VOLT shows the lowest operating voltage of the
TEMP- (-20 to +10°C). When the temperature is too CENTER Servo center in µs Currently set
receiver since the last time the receiver was turned on.
high or too low, a continuous warning tone sounds, "servo neutral
and TEMP.E appears in red at the top right in the re- Attention position"
ceiver menu RX. In the RX DATAVIEW display, the If this voltage differs significantly from the current TRIM Trim position in µs -120 µs to
parameter R-VOLT is displayed in white. operating voltage R-VOLT, the drain on the re- deviation from the +120 µs
L PACK TIME (Data Packages) ceiver battery from the servos may be too much CENTER position
and/or the resistance of the wiring is too high. In this LIMIT– Limit (in percentage 30% to 150 %
This indicates the longest period in milliseconds in
case, check and correct the power supply to maximize of servo travel) the
which data packages are lost when transmitted from
operating safety. -minus side of the
the transmitter to receiver. In practice, this is the lon-
gest period in which the remote control system enters servo travel
fail safe mode. Sensors 1 & 2 LIMIT+ Limit (in percentage 30% to 150 %
Indicates the voltage and temperature in °C of the op- of servo travel) the
R-VOLT (Receiver Operating Voltage) +plus side of the
tional telemetry sensors 1 and 2.
The receiver low-voltage warning can be set in the servo travel
submenu RX SERVO TEST under ALARM VOLT be- RX SERVO
PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 ms or 20 ms
tween 3.0 and 7.5 V. When it is too low, a continuous BACK Telemetry

warning tone sounds, and VOLT.E appears in red or RX SERVO V6.35<> RECV ESC
white at the top right in the receiver menu RX. In the >OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
OUTPUT CH (Selected Channel)
REVERSE : OFF
submenu RX DATAVIEW, the parameter R-VOLT is CENTER : 1500µsec EAM INC Select with the bracket the OUTPUT CH line by press-
displayed in white. TRIM : –000µsec
VARIO ENT ing the   INC  or   DEC  buttons and press the   SET 
LIMIT– : 150%
The current receiver battery voltage is displayed in the LIMIT+ : 150% GPS SET button in the lower right side of the display. The pa-
receiver menu. PERIOD : 20msec
ESC rameter is displayed in white:

Before changing settings on this display page, refer to

the Notices at the beginning of the BASE submenu Te-
lemetry section (page 98).

102 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

 BACK Telemetry BACK Telemetry
A separate adjustment for both directions can be en-
RX SERVO V6.35 < > RECV ESC RX SERVO V6.35 < > RECV ESC
tered between 30% to 150%.
>OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC Default factory setting: 150%.
REVERSE : OFF REVERSE : OFF
CENTER : 1500µsec EAM INC > CENTER : 1500µsec EAM INC PERIOD (Cycle Time)
TRIM : –000µsec TRIM : –000µsec
VARIO ENT VARIO ENT
LIMIT– : 150% LIMIT– : 150% Use this option to specify the periods for the individ-
LIMIT+ : 150% GPS SET LIMIT+ : 150% GPS SET
PERIOD : 20msec PERIOD : 0msec ual channel pulses. This setting is transferred for all
ESC ESC
control channels.
Select the desired receiver servo connection (such as Now move the corresponding control, control stick When using digital servos, set a cycle time of 10 ms.
01) using the  INC  or  DEC  buttons. and/or trimming control into the desired position and
Attention
press the  SET  button again. This position is saved as
Notice the new neutral position. For systems that includes some analogue servos
The following parameters refer to the example (or use them exclusively), always select 20 ms or
The new value displayed is determined by the current
connection as shown in the above graphic. the analogue servos may overload and respond
position of the control influencing this control channel,
by "jittering" or "growling".
and the position of the trim (where applicable) when
the  SET  button was pressed.
RX FAIL SAFE
Reverse (Servo Reverse) TRIM (Trimming Position)
BACK Telemetry

When the value field is active, this sets the rotation di- Use the TRIM line to sensitively adjust the neutral po-
RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
rection of the servo connected to the selected control sition in 1-μs increments of a servo connected to the >OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
channel: Servo Reverse ON / OFF control channel selected in the OUTPUT CH line. Se- INPUT CH : 01
MODE : HOLD EAM INC
lect with the bracket the TRIM line and activate the F.S.POS : 1500µsec
CENTER (Servo Center) value field by pressing the  SET  button at the bottom DELAY : 0.25sec VARIO ENT
FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET
In the CENTER line, the currently saved pulse time for right of the display. The TRIM parameter is displayed POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC
the servo center of the control channel selected in the in white. The TRIM value set here can be adjusted
OUTPUT CH line is displayed in μs. The set channel ±120 µs with the  INC  or  DEC  buttons. Regarding the Fail Safe function, please note:
pulse time of 1500 µs is the standard center position Default factory setting: 0 μs.
and hence the normal servo center. Failure to set this function is not recommended. HOLD
LIMIT–/+ (Side-Dependent Limit -/+)
To change this value, select with the bracket the CEN- is the default setting in the base menu of all the HoTT re-
TER line and press the   SET  button at the bottom Use this option to adjust a side-dependent limit of the ceivers. This allows the receiver to hold the last position
right of the display. The value field is displayed in servo travel (rudder deflection) of the servo connect- in the event of transmission disconnection.
white: ed to the receiver output selected in the OUTPUT CH Ideally, in the event of a malfunction a flying model will
line. fly straight for a certain amount of time and then land
without causing too much damage. Failing to set the fail
safe function may cause the airplane to become uncon-
trollable and buzz the flight field, endangering pilots and
spectators.

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 103

At the least, it is recommended to program Motor OFF INPUT CH Input channel 1 to max. 12 Note: only the receivers selected in the RECEIVER
to prevent such risks. Consult with an experienced pilot (transmitter con- SELECT line can be programmed by the Telemetry
for settings tailored to the specific model being used. trol channel) menu.
The Switch-On Fail Safe function should always be The 12 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mz-24 Pro
MODE Fail safe mode HOLD
utilized; if after turning the receiver system on and no can be similarly set by assigning the servo connec-
FAIL SAFE
valid signal from the transmitter is received, all servo out- tion of the receiver selected in the OUTPUT CH line to
OFF
puts will default to pre-defined signals so that, for exam- the INPUT CH of another control channel by channel
ple, retractable landing gear will not close unexpectedly F.S.POS Fail-Safe position 1000 to 2000 µs mapping.
or other unwanted actions could occur. DELAY Reaction time 0.25, 0.50, 0.75
and 1.00 s Notice
The easiest way to program fail safe settings is to use For example, if you entered 2AILE in the basic
FAIL SAFE Save the fail safe NO
the BASE submenu Fail Safe. settings for a model memory, the transmitter as-
ALL positions of all SAVE
A slightly more involved method is the FAIL SAFE signs control function 2 (aileron) to control chan-
control channels
ALL option (page 105-106), which will achieve the nels 2+5 for the left and right aileron. The correspond-
POSITION Display the saved between approx- ing INPUT CH of the receiver to be mapped would in
same results.
fail safe position imately 1000 and this case be channels 02 + 05 (see the example below).
A relatively complex method of individual adjustments 2000 µs
is the set through the RX FAIL SAFE menu of the Te-
lemetry screen. Refer to the MODE, F.S.POS and OUTPUT CH (Servo Connection) Examples
DELAY sections (page 104-105) for a description of • On a large model, you want to control each aileron
this option. Use the OUTPUT CH line to set the receiver servo
flap using two or more servos:
connection.
Value Explanation Settings Assign the relevant OUTPUT CH (receiver servo con-
INPUT CH (Channel Mapping) nections) as the INPUT CH to one of the two default
V#.## Receiver firmware None
version As mentioned in the Notices at the begin of the BASE aileron control channels 2 or 5 depending on the left
submenu Telemetry section (page 98), the 12 control or right wing.
OUTPUT Output channel 1 + (depending
channels of the 12-channel mz-24 Pro HoTT  trans- • On a large model, you want to control the rudder
CH (receiver servo on the receiver)
mitter can be distributed according to personal prefer- using two or more servos:
connection)
ence within a receiver, or to several receivers, or sev- Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) to the
eral receiver inputs can be assigned the same control relevant OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connections). In
function. This function is useful, for example, to con- this case, default rudder channel 4.
trol each aileron with two servos instead of just one, or
to control a large rudder with coupled servos instead
MODE (Methods)
of a single servo.
Distributing the control functions to several HoTT re- Setting the MODE, F.S.POS and DELAY options de-
ceivers is recommended for large models to avoid, for termine the receiver response when there is an inter-
example, requiring long servo cables. ruption in transmission between the transmitter and
receiver.

104 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

The setting programmed under MODE always refers The setting is made in 10-μs increments, as shown FAIL SAFE ALL (Global Fail Safe Setting)
to the channel set in the line OUTPUT CH. below: This selection allows you to easily determine the ser-
The default factory setting for all servos is HOLD. BACK Telemetry vos fail safe positions in a manner similar to the BASE
For each selected OUTPUT CH (receiver servo chan- RX FAIL SAFE V6.35<> RECV ESC submenu Fail Safe:
nel), choose between the following: OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at right of the display
INPUT CH : 01
• FAI-SAFE (Fail Safe) MODE : HOLD EAM INC to move the bracket to the FAIL SAFE ALL line and
In the event of a malfunction, a delay (as set in the >F.S.POS
DELAY :
: 1150µsec
0.25sec VARIO ENT press the  SET  button to activate the value field. The
DELAY line) will occur, and the corresponding ser- FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET current setting highlights white. Change the param-
vo will move into the position displayed (in µs) in POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC eter by pressing the  INC  or  DEC  buttons until the
the POSITION line. The servo will remain in this SAVE option appears.
position for the duration of the malfunction. Default factory setting: 1500 μs (servo center). Simultaneously, use the transmitter control elements
• HOLD to move all the servos: those assigned in the MODE:
Attention
In the event of a malfunction, the servo remains in FAI-SAFE line, any others programmed to take a spe-
In all three modes OFF, HOLD and FAI-SAFE (fail cific position during the switch-on phase of the re-
the last servo position successfully received. safe), the function F.S.POS is particularly import- ceiver system, and those with a set fail-safe position.
• OFF ant when waiting for a valid signal after turning on
In the bottom POSITION line, the current servo po-
In the event of a malfunction, the receiver stops the receiver because the servo automatically moves into
sition is displayed for the selected OUTPUT CH, as
transmitting (buffered) control pulses for the rel- the fail safe positions set in the POSITION line. This pre-
shown in the example below:
evant servo output and the receiver switches the vents unwanted or incorrect actions to occur whenever
pulse line off. the receiver is accidentally turned on while the transmit- BACK Telemetry

ter is off. In normal model operation, during a malfunc- RX FAIL SAFE V6.35<> RECV ESC
Notice tion the corresponding servo acts according to the OUTPUT CH : 01
GAM DEC
INPUT CH : 01
Analogue servos and many digital servos no MODE setting. MODE : HOLD EAM INC
longer experience resistance  to the ongoing F.S.POS : 1150µsec
VARIO ENT
control pressure after control pulses stop and DELAY (Fail Safe Reaction Time or Delay) DELAY : 0.25sec
>FAIL SAFE ALL : SAVE GPS SET
are  moved out of their position at greater or lesser Set the time delay between when the signal is inter- POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC
speed. rupted and when the servos move to their set posi-
tions. This setting is adopted by all the channels and Press the   INC  or   DEC  button to change the line
F.S.POS (Fail-Safe Position) only affects the servos programmed for FAI-SAFE (fail option from SAVE to NO.
safe) mode. This saves the positions of all of the servos affected
For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection), set
Default factory setting: 0.75 s. by these measures and simultaneously transfers them
the fail safe position for the servo to assume in a mal-
to the F.S.POS line so that the receiver can access
function in the F.S.POS line by using the  INC  or  DEC 
them during a malfunction.
buttons.
Release the control elements of the transmitter.

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 105

 BACK Telemetry
BACK Telemetry
RX FREE MIXER
RX FAIL SAFE V6.35<> RECV ESC RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC BACK Telemetry
>OUTPUT CH : 01 >OUTPUT CH : 08
GAM DEC GAM DEC
INPUT CH : 01 INPUT CH : 04 RX FREE MIXER V6.35 < > RECV ESC
MODE : HOLD EAM INC MODE : HOLD EAM INC >MIXER : 1
GAM DEC
F.S.POS : 1234µsec F.S.POS : 1500µsec MASTER CH : 00
DELAY : 0.25sec VARIO ENT VARIO ENT
DELAY : 0.25sec SLAVE CH : 00 EAM INC
FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET S-TRAVEL– : 100
S-TRAVEL+ : 100 VARIO ENT
POSITION : 1234µsec POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC ESC RX WING MIXER GPS SET
TAIL TYPE : NORMAL
ESC
Turn off the transmitter and verify the fail safe posi- The INPUT CH 04 determines the fail safe behavior
tions by checking the servo travel. of these three servos connected to control channel
4 fully independent of the settings of the respective Value Explanation Settings
Fail Safe in Combination With Channel Mapping V#.## Receiver firmware None
OUTPUT CH:
Make sure that mapped servos (controlled by com- version
BACK Telemetry
mon control channels) react in the same way during MIXER Mixer selection 1 to 5
RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
a malfunction. Use the corresponding settings of the OUTPUT CH : 04
GAM DEC MASTER Signal source or 0, 1 + depending
INPUT CH to manage the mapped servo behavior. INPUT CH : 04
>MODE : FAI-SAFE EAM INC CH source channel on the receiver
F.S.POS : 1500µsec
In the example below, receiver servo connections 06, DELAY : 0.25sec VARIO ENT SLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 + depending
07 and 08 are mapped by assigning the same control
FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET on the receiver
POSITION : 1500µsec
channel 04 as the INPUT CH to OUTPUT CH (receiver
ESC
S-TRAVEL– Mixing (in percent- 0% to 100 %
servo connections): This is also true when INPUT CH 01 is used for map- age of servo travel)
ping: the -minus side of
BACK Telemetry
the servo travel
RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC BACK Telemetry
>OUTPUT CH : 06
GAM DEC
S-TRAVEL+ Mixing (in percent- 0% to 100 %
INPUT CH : 04 RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
MODE : HOLD INC OUTPUT CH : 04 age of servo travel)
EAM GAM DEC
F.S.POS : 1500µsec >INPUT CH : 01 the +plus side of
DELAY : 0.25sec VARIO ENT MODE : FAI-SAFE EAM INC
F.S.POS : 1500µsec
the servo travel
FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET VARIO ENT
DELAY : 0.25sec
POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC FAIL SAFE ALL : NO
RX WING Tail type NORMAL,
GPS SET
POSITION : 1500µsec MIXER V-TAIL (V-LW)
ESC
BACK Telemetry TAIL TYPE ELEVON
RX FAIL SAFE V6.35 < > RECV ESC In this case, servo connection 04 reacts according to (elevator/aileron
>OUTPUT CH : 07
GAM DEC the fail safe settings of CH 01. mixer for delta
INPUT CH : 04
MODE : HOLD EAM INC The reaction time or delay set in the DELAY line con- and flying wing)
F.S.POS : 1500µsec
VARIO ENT trastingly applies uniformly to all channels set to mode
DELAY : 0.25sec MIXER
FAIL SAFE ALL : NO GPS SET FAI-SAFE (fail safe).
POSITION : 1500µsec
ESC
Up to five mixers can be programmed in the MIXER-
line by selecting one of mixers 1 to 5.
The settings programmed in this display only relate to
the mixers selected in the MIXER line.
106 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS
Notice • NORMAL RX CURVE
If you have already programmed mixer functions This setting corresponds to the classic airplane With the RX CURVE function, you can administer con-
in the FUNCTION submenus Wing MIX or Prog. type with a rear tail and separate rudder and ele- trol characteristics for up to three servos:
MIX, pay special attention to ensure that these vator. No mixing function is required for this mod-
BACK Telemetry
mixers do not overlap with those in the RX FREE MIXER el type.
RX CURVE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
menu! • V-TAIL >CURVE1 CH : 02
GAM DEC
TYPE : B
With this model type, the control functions of the CURVE2 CH : 03 EAM INC
elevator and rudder are linked to each other so that TYPE : B
VARIO ENT
CURVE3 CH : 04
MASTER CH (Source Channel) each of the two tail flaps assumes the elevator and TYPE : B GPS SET
According to the same principles described in the rudder function controlled by a separate servo.
ESC
General Information on Programmable Mixers sec- The servos are normally connected to the receiv-
tion (page 133), the signal at MASTER CH (source) can er as follows:
Value Explanation Settings
be mixed with the SLAVE CH (target) to an adjustable OUTPUT CH 3: V-tail servo, left
amount. OUTPUT CH 4: V-tail servo, right V#.## Receiver firm- None
ware version
Select 00 if you do not require the mixer. Often the installation of servo and rudder linkag-
es are different. If the rudder travel is not as de- CURVE 1, 2 Channel as- 1 + depending on
SLAVE CH (Target Channel) or 3 CH signment of the the receiver
scribed above, refer to the Receiver Configu-
The signal of the MASTER CH (source) is proportion- ration instructions on how to setup servos with respective curve
ately mixed with the SLAVE CH (target). The level of wrong rotation direction (page 33). setting
mixing is determined by the percentages entered in TYPE Curve type A, B, C
• ELEVON (Delta/Flying Wing Models)
the TRAVEL– and TRAVEL+ lines. (see figure below)
The servos connected to outputs 2 and 3 assume
Select 00 if you do not require the mixer.
an aileron and elevator function. The servos are TYPE A TYPE C
Expo = –100% TYPE B Expo = +100%
TRAVEL–/+ (Level of Mixing in %) normally connected to the receiver as follows: DR = 125% linear DR = 70%
With the settings of these two lines, the percentage OUTPUT CH 2: Aileron/elevator, left

+100%

+100%
+100%
of mixing is specified separately for both directions in OUTPUT CH 3: Aileron/elevator, right

Servo travel

Servo travel
Servo travel
relation to the MASTER signal. Often the installation of servo and rudder linkag-
es are different. If the rudder travel is not as de-

0
0
RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (Tail Type)
scribed above, refer to the Receiver Configu-

–100%

–100%
–100%
ration instructions on how to setup servos with
Notice
wrong rotation direction (page 33). –100% 0 +100% –100% 0 +100% –100% 0 +100%
The following details are also programmable in Control travel Control travel Control travel
the BASE submenus Model Sel and Model Type
menu and should preferably be preset there. In
this case, always leave the TAIL TYPE at NORMAL.

To use the mixers integrated in the receiver, select the

preset mixer functions for the corresponding model
type:

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 107

Generally, a nonlinear control function is used for the The servo reacts strongly to control stick move- In order for the connected device to be correctly iden-
aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder ment around the neutral position. The curve be- tified by the receiver, servo connection 5 MUST be
(channel 4). These channel settings also correspond comes flatter as the rudder deflection increases to switched from SERVO to SENSOR and vice versa.
to the default factory setting. about 125% of the servo travel. Press the  INC  or  DEC  button to move the bracket
B Linear setting. to the 5CH FUNCTION line, and press the  SET  but-
Note ton at the bottom right of the display. The field high-
The Servo follows the control stick travel in a linear
This assignment is only applicable to tail types manner in case of unchanged servo travel. lights white:
other than V-wing or 2ElevSv 3+8, or flaps other
C EXP = +100 % and D/R = 70%
than 2AILE or 2/4AILE 2/4FLAP. Otherwise, the BACK Telemetry

control function 3 (elevator) is split to control channels The servo reacts weakly to control stick movement RX CURVE V6.35 < > RECV ESC

3 + 8 in the transmitter, and control functions 2 (aile- around the neutral position. The curve becomes CURVE1 CH : 02
GAM DEC
TYPE : B
ron) is split to control channels 2 + 5 for the left and steeper as the rudder deflection reduces to about CURVE2 CH : 03 EAM INC

right aileron. In these two cases, the corresponding 70% of the servo travel. TYPE : B
VARIO ENT
CURVE3 CH : 04
control channels (INPUT CH) of the receiver would be Notice
TYPE : B GPS SET
>5CH FUNCTION : SERVO
channels 03 + 08 and 02 + 05. ESC

Set two curves, for example, if a model’s flaps are The control characteristics that are programmed Use the  INC  or  DEC  button to select the alternative
specified as 2AILE and  pilots wish use the  RX here affect the all mapped receiver outputs. setting SENSOR:
CURVE option instead of the individually programma- BACK Telemetry
ble FUNCTION submenu D/R,EXP (page 124). Other- 5CH FUNCTION: SERVO or SENSOR RX CURVE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
wise, the left and right aileron have different control CURVE1 CH : 02
GAM DEC
BACK Telemetry TYPE : B
characteristics: CURVE2 CH : 03 EAM INC
RX CURVE V6.35 < > RECV ESC
>CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : B
BACK Telemetry GAM DEC CURVE3 CH : 04 VARIO ENT
TYPE : B
RX CURVE V6.35 < > RECV ESC CURVE2 CH : 03 EAM INC TYPE : B GPS SET
CURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : B >5CH FUNCTION : SENSOR
GAM DEC VARIO ENT ESC
TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04
>CURVE2 CH : 05 EAM INC TYPE : B GPS SET
TYPE : B 5CH FUNCTION: SERVO
Press the  SET  button again to save the selection. To
VARIO ENT ESC
CURVE3 CH : 04 return to the main display of the transmitter, repeat-
TYPE : B GPS SET
With certain receivers, a certain servo connection is edly press the   BACK  button at the top left of the
ESC
designed to be switchable instead of an independent display.
CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH telemetry connection. For example, with the GR-12L
receiver a telemetry sensor can also be connected to
Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH). servo connection 5 (identified as 5T):
The following setting in TYPE only affects the selected
control channel. Servo
OR
Sensor
TYPE
Select the servo curve: No.S1012 L
A EXP = -100 % and D/R = 125% Connect the servo with either the receiver update
adapter cable (No. 7168.6S) or a telemetry sensor.
108 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS
RX SERVO TEST ALARM Alarm threshold when -20 to +10 °C BACK Telemetry

With the RX SERVO TEST function, you can test the TEMP– the receiver tempera- default factory RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC
servos connected to the currently active receiver: ture is too low setting: -10 °C ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
BACK Telemetry CH OUT- Channel sequence ONCE, SAME, >TEST : STOP EAM INC
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC PUT TYPE or type of aggregate SUMI, SUMO ALARM TEMP + : 55°C VARIO ENT
>ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC symbol and SUMD ALARM TEMP – : –10°C GPS SET
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
TEST : STOP EAM INC ESC
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
ALL-MAX (Servo Travel +plus Side)
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C Use the  INC  or  DEC  button to select the START
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET In this line, set the maximum servo travel on the plus setting:
CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ESC side of the control travel for the servo test.
2000 μs corresponds to a full deflection on the +plus BACK Telemetry

Value Explanation Settings side of the servo travel, and 1500 μs corresponds to RX SERVO TEST V6.35< RECV ESC
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
V#.## Receiver firmware None the neutral position. ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
GAM DEC

Make sure that the servos do not strike anything >TEST : START EAM INC
version ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
during the test routine. ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C VARIO ENT
ALL-MAX Servo travel (+plus 1500 to ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
side) for all servo out- 2000 µs ALL-MIN (Servo Travel -minus Side) CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ESC
puts for the servo test In this line, set the maximum servo travel on the -mi-
ALL-MIN Servo travel (-minus 1500 to nus side of the control travel for the servo test. Press the  SET  button again to save the selection. To
side) for all servo out- 1000 µs return to the main display to start the test. The entry
1000 μs corresponds to a full deflection on the -minus
puts for the servo test field returns to normal (yellow):
side of the servo travel, and 1500 μs corresponds to
TEST Test procedure START / STOP the neutral position. BACK Telemetry

ALARM Alarm threshold for the 3.0 to 7.5 V Make sure that the servos do not strike anything RX SERVO TEST V6.35< RECV ESC
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
VOLT receiver’s low voltage default factory during the test routine. ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
GAM DEC

warning setting: 3.8 V TEST (Start/Stop)

>TEST : START EAM INC
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
ALARM Alarm threshold when 50 to 80 °C Use this line to start and stop the servo test integrat-
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
TEMP+ the receiver tempera- default factory ed in the receiver. Press the  INC  or  DEC  button to CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ESC
ture is too high setting: 55 °C move the bracket to the TEST line, and press the  SET 
button at the bottom right of the display. The field To stop the servo test, reactivate the entry field as de-
highlights white: scribed above, choose STOP and confirm by press-
ing the  SET  button.
ALARM VOLT (Receiver Low Voltage Warning)
Through the ALARM VOLT line the operating voltage
of the receiver is monitored. The alarm threshold can
be set between 3.0 and 7.5 Volts in 0.1 Volt incre-
ments.

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 109

When the voltage falls below the set alarm threshold, CH OUTPUT TYPE (Connection Type) This is recommended for digital servos when sev-
a warning tone sounds, and VOLT.E appears in white In this line, select the type of servo control or signal eral servos are used for a single function (i.e. an ai-
at the top right in all RX displays: type of the aggregate signal output: leron) so that the servos are fully synchronized.
When exclusively digital servos are used, it is rec-
BACK Telemetry
• ONCE
RX SERVO TEST VOLT.E RECV ESC
ommendable to set 10 ms in the PERIOD line of
>ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
BACK Telemetry the RX SERVO display to increase digital servo re-
ALL-MIN
TEST
: 1200µsec
: STOP EAM INC
RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC action time. When analogue servos or mixed oper-
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
GAM DEC ation is used, select 20 ms.
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
TEST : STOP EAM INC
GPS SET
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C
CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
Attention
ESC ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET When this setting is used, use increased re-
In the RX DATAVIEW display, the parameter R-VOLT is >CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ESC
ceiver power supply. The four servos are al-
displayed in white: ways triggered simultaneously in the SAME
The servo connections of the receiver are actuat- setting, causing greater drain on the power supply.
BACK Telemetry
ed sequentially; recommended for analog servos.
RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E RECV
S–QUA100% S–dBM–030dBm
ESC
With this setting, the servos are automatically op- • SUMO (Aggregate Signal OUT)
GAM DEC
S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C erated at a cycle of 20 ms (30 ms for a 12 chan- A HoTT receiver configured as SUMO always gen-
EAM INC
L PACK TIME 00010msec
R-VOLT : 03.7V
nel GR-24 receiver (No. 33512) regardless of what erates an aggregate signal from the control signals
L.R-VOLT : 04.5V VARIO ENT is set or displayed in the RX SERVO display in the of all its controls channels, and forwards this to
SENSOR1 : 00.0V 00°C
SENSOR2 : 00.0V 00°C
GPS SET line PERIOD. servo connection 8 of the GR-16 (No. 33508) and
ESC
• SAME GR-24 receiver (No. 33512).
With receivers that have a two-digit number to the
ALARM TEMP +/- (Receiver Temperature BACK Telemetry
right of SUMO line in their display, the selection
Monitoring) RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC
determines the highest control channels within the
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
These two options monitor the receiver temperature: ALL-MIN : 1200µsec SUMO signal.
TEST : STOP EAM INC
program the bottom threshold ALARM TEMP- (-20 ALARM VOLT : 3.8V Press the  INC  or  DEC  button to move the brack-
VARIO ENT
to +10°C) and the upper threshold ALARM TEMP+ ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C et to the CH OUT TYPE line, and press the  SET 
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
(+50 to +80°C). If the upper or lower thresholds are >CH OUT TYPE : SAME
button at the bottom right of the display. The field
exceeded, a continuous warning tone sounds, and ESC
highlights white. Use the  INC  or  DEC  button to
TEMP.E appears in white at the top right in all receiver The servo connections of the receiver are actuat- select the SUMO setting:
displays. On the display page RX DATAVIEW, the pa- ed simultaneously in blocks: servos connected to
rameter R-TEM is also displayed in red or white. connections 1 to 4 as well as 5 to 8 can be simul- BACK Telemetry
Make sure that the temperature of the receiver re- taneously supplied with their control signals with a RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC
mains within the permissible range under all operating GR-16 receiver (No. 33508), and the servos con- ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
conditions (ideally between -10 and +55°C). nected to connections 1 to 4, 5 to 8 as well as 9 to ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
TEST : STOP EAM INC
12 can be simultaneously supplied with their con- ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
trol signals with a GR-24 receiver (No. 33512). ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
>CH OUT TYPE : SUMO 08
ESC

110 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

Press  SET  again to confirm selection and move By contrast, GR-32 DUAL receivers (No. 33516) This receiver configuration is recommended when
to the channel selection field: have their own aggregate signal connection at the flight direction can restrict range, for example, if
BACK Telemetry bottom left identified with - + S. one of the two receivers is installed in the model
RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC With this connection, all of the channels selected at a location with poor reception or where nozzles,
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC in the CH OUT TYPE line of the HoTT receiver con- carbon fiber material, etc. may weaken reception.
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
TEST : STOP EAM INC figured as a SUMO and identified as the satellite The most important control function should be as-
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT receiver are continuously transferred to the second sociated with the main receiver programmed as
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET HoTT receiver (main receiver). The main receiv- SUMI so that, in case of a malfunction, the model
>CH OUT TYPE : SUMO 08
ESC
er needs to be programmed as SUMI (see below). can still be controlled if the SUMO satellite receiv-
• SUMI (Aggregate Signal IN) er no longer receives a good signal.
Use the  INC  or  DEC  buttons to select one of the This setting allows the signal to always run in the Connect telemetry sensors with the SUMO satel-
other channels between 04 and 09 or 12 and con- direction of the SUMI: lite receiver and then select this receiver in the RE-
firm it with  SET . CEIVER SELECT line of the Telemetry menu (RX 1
The sum signals of the channel 1 to x will be gen- BACK Telemetry
to 2), as explained in the beginning of the Teleme-
erated in a 20 ms cycle to the related output (the RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC
try section (page 107).
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GR-32 DUAL receiver (No. 33516) uses a 30 ms cy- ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
GAM DEC
Each receiver should be connected to the com-
cle) if the RX SERVO display page PERIOD line is TEST : STOP EAM INC
mon power supply with its own cable. With receiv-
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
set to 10 ms. ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C VARIO ENT
ers subject to high current load, it may be neces-
This function is primarily utilized for the satellite ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET sary to connect them to the common power supply
>CH OUT TYPE : SUMI
operation of two HoTT receivers (see below). The ESC with two cables.
aggregate signal that is generated by the receiver If each of the two receivers are connected to their
When reception fails, the receiver defined as SUMI
and defined as SUMO can also be used to control own power supply, the middle cable should be re-
only uses the aggregate signal coming from SUMO
a flybar system, providing that it has an appropri- moved from one of the two plugs of the satellite
if at least one channel is programmed as fail safe
ate input, or it can be used to control flight simula- cable:
in the SUMI. red
tors with adapter cable (No. 33310). 1
If the programmed SUMO satellite receiver re-
Satellite Mode ception fails, the servo(s) connected to this re- 2
3

In Satellite Mode, two HoTT receivers are connect-
ed to each other with a 300mm (No. 33700.1) or
100mm 33700.2 3-wire connecting cable to servo
connections for specific receiver types. For exam-
ple, GR-16 receivers (No. 33508) and GR-24 (No.
33512) are connected to each other through ser-
vo output 8.
ceiver assume the fail safe positions that are pro-
grammed in the satellite receiver independent of
the main receiver. For additional programming, such as fail safe set-
If reception fails for both receivers at the same tings, disconnect the 3-pin satellite connection be-
time, then the fail safe settings of the SUMO are tween the two receivers and only turn on the rel-
assumed in the most recent receiver software that evant receiver. The binding sequence may also
was current when these instructions were revised. need to be changed.
Notice
In individual cases, interactions may occur. It
is strongly recommended that  relevant tests
be performed before starting the model. 

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 111

• SUMD (Digital Sum Signal) BACK Telemetry BACK Telemetry
A HoTT receiver configured as SUMD always gen- RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC
erates a digital aggregate signal from the control ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
signals of a selectable number of its controls chan- TEST : STOP EAM INC TEST : STOP EAM INC
nels and forwards this to servo connection 8 in the ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
GR-16 and GR-24 receivers. Refer to the SUMO ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
section (page 110) for more information. >CH OUT TYPE : SUMDHD12 >CH OUT TYPE : SUMDHD12
ESC ESC
At the time of this writing, this type of signal is be-
ing used by several of the latest electronic appli- • HD (Hold)
Tip
cations of flybarless systems, power supplies, etc. The last recognized signal is retained at the
Connected devices normally do not require a value
output (hold).
Notice greater than 12.
Consult the setting instructions for any at- • FS (Fail Safe)
tached device to ensure the model will be able The pre-selected fail safe position signals are
to fly. provided at the output. Refer to the Fail Safe
section (page 80).
BACK Telemetry • OF (OFF)
RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC No signals are supplied during reception loss.
ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec Attention
TEST : STOP EAM INC
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT
Analogue servos and many digital servos
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
no longer experience resistance to the on-
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
>CH OUT TYPE : SUMDHD12 going control pressure after control pulses
ESC
stop and are moved out of their position at great-
After confirming SUMD by touching the  SET  but- er or lesser speed.
ton at the bottom right in the display, the active val-
ue field moves right and highlights the next field. Finally, switch the active field to channel selec-
In the event of reception loss, choose one of the tion by touching the  SET  button. With the selec-
three possible receiver reactions (fail safe): tion, you determine the highest transmitter chan-
nels within the SUMD signal.

112 Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

 SENSOR
Active/Inactive Sensor Display
SENSOR SETTINGS and DISPLAYS The field highlights blue: To open the sensor submenu, press the button in the
If one or more sensors are connected to a receiver SENSOR line:
BACK Telemetry

and a telemetry link exists with this receiver, retrieve RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC BACK Telemetry
the sensor display and change its settings in the RX >ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
SERVO TEST screen (page 109). TEST : STOP EAM INC SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V
VARIO ENT SENSOR >> INC
Tip ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
The mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitters automatically recog- CH OUT TYPE : ONCE Press
ESC VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC
nize any sensor(s) connected to a switched on receiver
or sensor(s) that have been connected after the power If a sensor was recognized by the receiver after it
supply is turned on. was turned on, an angled bracket ( ) appears. Press
the  ENT  button and check or change its settings as Notice
If at least one sensor connected to the telemetry re- described in the instructions that came with the sen- The mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitters automatically
ceiver and it has firmware from the same Vx firmware sor. recognize any sensor(s) connected to a switched
package as the receiver, change directly between the on receiver or sensor(s) that have been connect-
individual devices by pressing a selection button. ed after the power supply is turned on.
• The abbreviations on the selection buttons stand
for the following: BACK Telemetry

RECV  = Receiver RECEIVER ON

 GAM  = General Air Module GAM ON

 EAM  = Electric Air Module EAM OFF

VARIO
 VARIO  = Vario Module OFF
GPS ON
 GPS  = GPS Module
ESC OFF
 ESC  = Electronic Speed Controller
Press to highlight the selection button: In this submenu, active or inactive sensors are auto-
BACK Telemetry matically  labeled as ON or OFF, provided that a te-
RX SERVO TEST V6.35 < RECV ESC lemetry link exists. Manual sensor selection is then
>ALL-MAX : 2000µsec
GAM DEC unnecessary and impossible.
ALL-MIN : 1200µsec
TEST : STOP EAM INC
ALARM VOLT : 3.8V Press
ALARM TEMP+ : 55°C VARIO ENT
ALARM TEMP– : –10°C GPS SET
CH OUT TYPE : ONCE
ESC

Base menu - Telemetry | SETTINGS/DISPLAYS 113

RF Status Display

To open the RF Status submenu, press the button in Value Explanation

the RF STATUS VIEW line:
QU Quality (in percent) of the signal packages
BACK Telemetry
from the receiver arriving at the transmitter
RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
STR Quality (in percent) of the signal packages
SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
from the transmitter arriving at the receiver
SENSOR >> INC
TD Level in dBm (in percent) of the receiver
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
signal arriving at the transmitter
VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC
Touch ERR Shows the longest time (in increments of
10 ms) in which data packages were lost
This display graphically represents the connection when transmitting from the transmitter to
quality between transmitter and receiver: receiver
BACK Telemetry RD Level in dBm (in percentage) of the trans-
QU 100% mitter signal arriving at the receiver
STR 090% Vc Current receiver operating voltage
TD –60dB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Vm Lowest operating voltage of the receiver
ERR 0010ms
since the last time the receiver was turned
RD –5dB on
5.3 Vc 3.6 Vm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Top row: Level of channels 1 to 75 coming from

the receiver on the 2.4 GHz band (in
dBm) at the transmitter.
Bottom row: Level of channels 1 to 75 coming from
the transmitter  of the 2.4 GHz band
(in dBm) at the receiver.

Tips
• The height of the bar is a measure of the reception
level represented as logarithmic values with the unit
dBm (1 mW = 0 dBm).
• 0 dBm corresponds to the two baselines in the above
graph; high bars have poor levels and low bars have
strong levels. Refer to the S-dBm Reception Level
section (page 101).

In addition to the graphic display of the reception lev-

el, additional numeric information is provided to the
left. The abbreviations have the following meaning:
114 Function menu - Telemetry | Display of RF status
Personal notes 115
VOICE TRIGGER

To open the Voice Trigger submenu, press the button An active display box appears: • As soon as the transmitter and/or the receiver have
in the VOICE TRIGGER line: been switched on, the system starts to search the
BACK Telemetry
connected sensors. To change the value field in the
BACK Telemetry REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO
Select TONE line, 30 seconds must pass so the system
RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS TRIGGER NEIN VARIO NULL
NO can complete the sensor search. If a value other
SETTING & DATA VIEW >> TRANSMITTER >> R EIVER >> INC
CLR than   ALWAYS  has been selected in the RX SE-
SENSOR >> INC GENERAL MOD >> EAMOD >> RES
Press LOGIC LECT line, such as  4x  or  8x , then the process will
RF STATUS VIEW >> RES VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC
take longer:
VOICE TRIGGER >> DEC ESC MOD >>
BACK Telemetry
The active switch will play the reproduced message RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
The following display opens: and repeat it at the time intervals selected in the first SETTINGS & DATA VIEW >>
field of the REPEAT line. SENSOR >> INC
BACK Telemetry

REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO TONE (Module Select) RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
>> DEC
TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL If the transmitter recognizes multiple Vario sensors, VOICE TRIGGER
TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC (e.g. both a General Electric and a GPS module are
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES installed in the model and connected to the receiver),
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC after pressing the value field in the TONE line, use
ESC MOD >> the  INC  or  DEC  buttons to scroll through vario an-
nounce options: TRIGGER (NEXT ANNOUNCE)
REPEAT • Manual
BACK Telemetry
To start audio reproduction in the REPEAT line a 10s NULL TONE AUTO
When a switch is assigned to this line, users can
REPEAT
switch must be assigned. Refer to the Control and incrementally cycle between the TRANSMITTER
TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL
Switch Assignment section (page 26) for information Press and RECEIVER options (page 117) and the voice
TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC
on how to assign switches. Press the second field in triggers selected under the Sensors display (page
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES
the REPEAT line to assign or reassign a switch: Press 113). It is recommended to chose a self-neutral-
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC
BACK Telemetry
izing switch: S2 or S8. Refer to the Control and
ESC MOD >>
REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO
Switch Assignment section (page 26) for informa-
TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL The following options are available: VARIO, GAM, tion on how to assign switches.
TRANSMITTER
Press
>> RECEIVER >> INC EAM, GPS and AUTO. (In the AUTO position the sen- BACK Telemetry

GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES sors order will be selected as per the aforementioned REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC list.) TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL
ESC MOD >> TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC
Tips Press
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES
• To recall the vario tones, assign a switch in the fol-
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC
lowing VARIO value field.
ESC MOD >>

116 Function menu - Telemetry | Voice Trigger

• Automatic Sequential TRANSMITTER RECEIVER
If switches assigned to the REPEAT and TRIGGER Press the bracket button in the TRANSMITTER line: Press the bracket button in the RECEIVER line:
lines are activated, all the announcements includ-
BACK Telemetry BACK Telemetry
ed in this menu and its submenus will be repeat-
REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO
ed within the time interval selected in the REPEAT
TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL
line:
TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC
BACK Telemetry
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES
REPEAT 10s SW 2 TONE AUTO Press Press
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC
TRIGGER SW 3 VARIO NULL ESC MOD >> ESC MOD >>
TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >> RES The transmitter display opens: The receiver display opens:
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC
BACK Telemetry BACK Telemetry
ESC MOD >>

TX-VOLT TIMER 2 TEMP

VARIO MODELTIME CURR. TIME STRENGTH
If the SENSOR submenu VARIO line is ON (page BATT TIME RX VOLT
113), the switches assigned to this line can be used TIMER 1 L-VOLT
to retrieve vario-specific voice triggers such as "slow-
ly ascending/descending" through the transmitter's
headphones independent of the other voice triggers, Use this submenu to activate and deactivate the voice Use this submenu to activate and deactivate the voice
i.e., voice triggers triggered by a change in height. triggers available for each selection in the value fields: triggers available for each selection in the value fields.
BACK Telemetry BACK Telemetry Sensors
REPEAT 10s NULL TONE AUTO The displays for selecting sensor-specific voice trig-
TRIGGER NULL VARIO NULL TX VOLT TIMER 2 gers should only be opened when the sensors con-
TRANSMITTER >> RECEIVER >> INC MODELTIME CURR. TIME nected to the receivers are recognized after the re-
Press
GENERAL MOD >> ELEC MOD >>
Press
RES BATT TIME ceiver is switched on. Three corresponding voice
VARIO MOD >> GPS MOD >> DEC TIMER 1 triggers are selected as described above.
ESC MOD >>

Refer to the Control and Switch Assignment section

(page 26) for information on how to assign switches.

Function menu - Telemetry | Voice Trigger 117

 Announce
User Voice Recordings
To change the voice recording settings, from the main Phase Depending Settings PHASE Column
display press the BASE menu gear icon (green “B”) to This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- In this column changes between CO (common), model
bring up the BASE submenu screen: ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed memory specific, and SE (single), phase specific an-
000% 000%
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to nounce. Press the value field of the value to change:
4.2V
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the BACK PHASE 1 Announce SERVO
000 000 000:00.0 phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE CTL PHASE ANNOUNCEMENT
mz 1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
0:01:23 000:00.0 1. SW 3 CO NEXT
M-1 Press Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, INC
000 000
PHASE 1 2. NULL CO
MODELLNAME 1
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page Press
3. NULL CO RES
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
4. NULL CO DEC
000 000
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
5. NULL CO
From the BASE submenu display, press the An- corresponding switch(es).
nounce icon:
CTL Column BACK PHASE 1 Announce SERVO

Use this column to assign a switch to the announce- CTL PHASE Announcement
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM ment: 1. SW 3 SE NEXT
2. NULL CO INC
BACK PHASE 1 Announce SERVO
3. NULL CO RES
Model Sel Model Type E.P.A REV/SUB THR.CUT CTL PHASE ANNOUNCEMENT
4. NULL CO DEC
Press 1. SW 3 CO NEXT
5. NULL CO
TX ctl Timer Fail Safe Trim Step Servo 2. NULL CO INC
3. NULL CO RES
ANNOUNCEMENT Column
CTL Set Out.Swap Telemetry Announce 4. NULL CO DEC
5. NULL CO
Use this column to activate, according to the switch
position and phase, a User_Voice announcement.
Saved in the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter memory, Press the value field in the ANNOUNCEMENT col-
Refer to the Control and Switch Assignment section
near the datafiles for the other transmitter announce- umn:
(page 26) for information on how to assign switches.
ments, are the User-Voice-Files, numbered from
285 to 294. These special announcements can be Notices BACK PHASE 1 Announce
Press
SERVO

replaced by user-created .wav files via the Firmware_ Free switch assignment is only possible when the CTL PHASE Announcement

Upgrade_grStudio. All voice files can be assigned as value field of the PHASE column is CO. When the 1. SW 3 SE NEXT
phase-specific or phase-crossing in the BASE sub- PHASE value is SE, only switches that are not 2. NULL CO INC
menu Announces. already assigned to a model memory phase will be avail- 3. NULL CO RES
DEC
able. This prevents error functions. 4. NULL CO
5. NULL CO

The field highlights blue:

118 Base menu - Announces

 FUNCTION Menu 

BACK PHASE 1 Announce SERVO

CTL PHASE ANNOUNCEMENT

1. SW 3 SE NEXT
2. NULL CO INC
3. NULL CO RES
4. NULL CO DEC
5. NULL CO

Press the  INC or  DEC  buttons to scroll through the

voice file list:
BACK PHASE 1 Announce SERVO
CTL PHASE ANNOUNCEMENT

1. SW 3 CO 285_User_Voice_ NEXT
2. NULL SE INC
3. NULL SE RES
4. NULL SE DEC
5. NULL SE

Repeat this process with each switch position and on

other lines to assign additional voice announcements.
Press the  RES  button to reset the field to the default
value (blank).

Tip
To set announcements 6 to 10, press the  NEXT  but-
ton to bring up the next screen.

Base menu - Announces 119

 Phase 
Phase Settings
Referred to as Q.Links in previous Graupner radios,
Note that individual switches have allocation priority
flight phases allow users to switch between different
towards flight phases. The underlying schema is de-
sets of trim settings according to the flight phase (i.e.
scribed as follows:
takeoff, landing, etc.). The mz-24 PRO HoTT trans- Phase display for all models (except helicopters):
mitter also allows phases to be linked to mixers. In • If all flight phase switches, if any, are open (i.e.
the Phase menu, up to 6 different settings for different BACK Phase SET NEXT OFF position), the flight phase NORMAL is active:
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
flight phases can be set within a model memory.
1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM BACK
To change the phase settings, from the main display
2. PHASE 2 CPY
press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to  OFF
3. PHASE 3 DEL
bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen:
4. PHASE 4 INC
000% 000%
SW 6
5. PHASE 5 DEC
4.2V

000 000 000:00.0 ON

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
M-1 000 000 Press
PHASE 1
• If only one switch is closed (i.e. ON position), then
Phase display for helicopters: the flight phase that has been assigned to the cur-
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 BACK Phase SET NEXT rently closed switch is active:
000 000

PHASE SLOW CTL NEW BACK

From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the
1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
Phase icon:
2. AUTOROT CPY OFF
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM 3. RPM 1 DEL
INC SW 6
4. RPM 2
5. RPM 3 DEC
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
 ON
Press
For all models (including helicopters) always start with
Logical sw Sequence
PHASE 1 of the NORMAL link. NORMAL/PHASE1 is
the default when no Phase switch is set, or when no
Phase has been assigned to specific switch combi- • If two or more switches are closed, the flight
Phase names are displayed in green in the top center nations. phase with the lower phase number is active.
of the screen. Standard default naming for phases
is usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE 1. (Addi-
tional phases will be named numerically, e.g. Phase
2, Phase 3, etc.) Each new phase will need to be as-
signed to a different switch. To change the phases,
activate the corresponding switch(es).
The six settings do not have to be sequential and
phase lines can be left empty.

120 Function menu | general - Phase

Phase Setup Value fields appear in the SLOW and CTL columns: •  CPY  button (Copy)
• PHASE Column BACK PHASE SET NEXT The phase setting fields of any phase line high-
To set up the first phase, press the appropriate PHASE SLOW CTL NEW lighted blue can be copied to any another phase
field line in the PHASE column. In the example be- 1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM line by pressing the  CPY  button at the right of the
low, Line 2, titled PHASE 2, is being programmed: 2. PHASE 2 0.0s NULL CPY display:
3. PHASE 3 DEL BACK Phase SET NEXT
BACK Phase SET NEXT
4. PHASE 4 INC PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
5. PHASE 5 DEC 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM
2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
2. PHASE 2 CPY •  NAM  Button (Name)
3. PHASE 3 DEL
3. PHASE 3 DEL Name or rename the existing phase title by press- Press
INC
Press 4. PHASE 4
4. PHASE 4 INC ing the NAM  button at the right of the display. A
5. PHASE 5 DEC
5. PHASE 5 DEC red keypad screen will appear. Refer to the Model
Name section (page 42) for instructions on using An active warning window appears to verify the
The field highlights blue:
this display. In the example below, Phase 2 was source/target selection:
BACK Phase SET NEXT renamed "START":
BACK PHASE SET NEXT
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
BACK PHASE SET NEXT PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW COPY
1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
2. PHASE 2 CPY SOURCE TARGET
1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM 2. START 0.0s KEIN CPY
3. PHASE 3 DEL NORMAL PHASE 2
Press
2. START 0.0s NONE CPY 3. PHASE 3 DEL
4. PHASE 4 INC YES NO
3. PHASE 3 DEL 4. PHASE 4 INC
5. PHASE 5 DEC
4. PHASE 4 INC 5. PHASE 5 DEC
5. PHASE 5 DEC
Tip Press  NO  to terminate the procedure.
Phase 6 is on the following screen. Press the  NEXT  Rename Phase 1 so that announcements can be To change the target field, repeatedly press the
button to view the next screen. assigned. In the example below, it has been re- button in the TARGET column until the desired
named "NORMAL": phase line appears:
•  NEW   Button BACK Phase SET NEXT BACK PHASE SET NEXT
Press the   NEW  button to bring up additional PHASE SLOW CTL NEW PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
fields for the active phase line: 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM 1. NORMAL
COPY
0.0s NAM
SOURCE TARGET
BACK Phase SET NEXT 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY 2. START 0.0s KEIN CPY
NORMAL PHASE 2
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW 3. PHASE 3 DEL 3. PHASE 3 DEL
YES NO
1. PHASE 1 0.0s NAM 4. PHASE 4 INC 4. PHASE 4 Press INC
Press
2. PHASE 2 CPY 5. PHASE 5 DEC 5. PHASE 5 DEC
3. PHASE 3 DEL
4. PHASE 4 INC
5. PHASE 5 DEC

Function menu | general - Phase 121

 In the example below, the target field was •  DEL   Button (Delete) To set the delay time, press the field for the appro-
changed from PHASE 2 to PHASE 4: The phase information of any phase line highlight- priate phase in the SLOW column:
BACK PHASE SET NEXT
ed blue can be deleted by pressing the  DEL  but- BACK PHASE SET NEXT
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
ton at the right of the display. In the example be- PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
1. NORMAL
COPY
0.0s NAM
low, the Phase 4 information needs to be cleared: 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
SOURCE TARGET
2. START 0.0s
NORMAL
KEIN
PHASE 4
CPY BACK PHASE SET NEXT 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
Press
3. PHASE 3 YES NO DEL PHASE SLOW CTL NEW 3. PHASE 3 DEL
4. PHASE 4 INC 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM 4. PHASE 4 INC
5. PHASE 5 DEC 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY 5. PHASE 5 DEC
3. PHASE 3 DEL
Press  NO  to terminate the procedure. Press  YES  INC
The field highlights blue:
4. PHASE 4 0.0s NULL
to continue. The source phase information is dupli- Press
5. PHASE 5 DEC BACK PHASE SET NEXT
cated to the selected target line:
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
BACK PHASE SET NEXT
The Phase 4 settings disappear: 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW BACK PHASE SET NEXT 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM PHASE SLOW CTL NEW 3. PHASE 3 DEL
2. START 0.0s NULL CPY 1. NORMAL 0.0s NAM 4. PHASE 4 INC
3. PHASE 3 DEL 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY 5. PHASE 5 DEC
4. PHASE 4 0.0s NULL INC 3. PHASE 3 DEL
5. PHASE 5 DEC INC
Raise or lower the value with the INC   or  DEL 
4. PHASE 4
buttons at the right edge. The delay switchover
5. PHASE 5 DEC
Change the copied phase line name information by time can be set anywhere from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds.
using the NAM Button (page 121), and/or adapt • SLOW Column (Delay) In the example below, the NORMAL phase delay is
the transferred delay or transferred switch as de- Use this setting to set a delay for a smooth tran- set for 1.2s:
scribed in the SLOW Column section (page 122) sition between phases. It is possible to set differ- BACK PHASE SET NEXT
and CTL Column section (page 123). ent delays for changing between different phases. PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
For example, the time delay when moving from a 1. NORMAL 1.2s NAM
phase into Phase 3 can differ from when moving 2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
to Phase 1. 3. PHASE 3 DEL
4. PHASE 4 INC
5. PHASE 5 DEC

Use the same procedure with the other phase.

122 Function menu | general - Phase

 An active display pops up: The following display appears:
BACK PHASE SET NEXT BACK PHASE 1 Phase

PHASE SLOW CTL NEW PH. VOICE 1

Select
Attention 1. NORMAL 1.2s NAM PH. VOICE 2
NO
In the helicopter AUTOROT phase, always 2. START 0.0s
CLR
NULL CPY PH. VOICE 3 INC

leave the standard delay time as 0.0s. For 3. PHASE 3

LOGIC
DEL PH. VOICE 4 RES
safety reasons, if a switchover is necessary 4. PHASE 4 INC PH. VOICE 5 DEC
the phase can be changed immediately and without 5. PHASE 5 DEC PH. VOICE 6
delay.
Press NO to terminate the process. Press CLR Press to highlight the appropriate phase voice val-
to clear any existing values. Press LOGIC to ue field. Scroll through the list of available voice
assign a switch to perform this function. Refer to announcements by pressing the INC   or   DEC 
Control and Switch Assignment section (page buttons at the right edge. Press the  RES  button
26) for more information on assigning switches. to clear any selection. In the example below, Voice
Notice Announcement #254 has been selected:
For all models, the switchover time set here Notices
BACK PHASE 1 Phase
acts uniformly across all phase-specific set- • NORMAL/Phase1 is the default when PH. VOICE 1 254_Normal_22k
tings and all active mixers. The switchover none of the assigned phase switches are
PH. VOICE 2
between phase-dependent mixers should proceed in the ON position.
INC
smoothly. PH. VOICE 3
• To avoid function errors, never assign a PH. VOICE 4 RES
switch to both a User Voice Recording and
• CTL Column (Control/Switch) PH. VOICE 5 DEC
a Phase function.
Use this function to change between phases. PH. VOICE 6

Press the field for the appropriate phase in the CTL •  SET  Button Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the dis-
column: play to return to the main Phase display.
To assign individual voice announcements to the
BACK PHASE SET NEXT different phases, press the  SET  button at the up-
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW per right of the display:
1. NORMAL 1.2s NAM
BACK PHASE SET NEXT
2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
PHASE SLOW CTL NEW
3. PHASE 3 DEL Press
Press 1. NORMAL 1.2s NAM
4. PHASE 4 INC
2. START 0.0s NULL CPY
5. PHASE 5 DEC
3. PHASE 3 DEL
4. PHASE 4 INC
5. PHASE 5 DEC

Function menu | general - Phase 123

 D/R,EXP 
Control Attitude Settings for Control Functions 2, 3 and 4
The dual rate/expo function allows users to assign
switches and phases to change or influence the con-
trol deflections and characteristics of channels 2, 3
and 4. For all CARS, BOATS or DRONES, the channel set- For all AIRPLANES or GLIDERS, the channel setting
To change these settings, from the main display press ting pages of this submenu are labeled CH2, CH3 and pages of this submenu are labeled AILE (CH2), ELEV
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up CH4, as shown below: (CH3) and RUDD (CH4), for aileron, elevator and rud-
the FUNCTION submenu screen: der, as shown below:
000% 000%
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
4.2V CH AILE

000 000 000:00.0

D/R +100% +100% INC
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Press EXP 000% 000% RES
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 CTL NULL DEC
MODELLNAME 1
SYM OFF
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the Tip

D/R,EXP icon: The 7 individual characteristic curve points for control
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM function CH1 (throttle/brake) can be set in the follow-
For all HELICOPTERS, the channel setting pages of ing sections: all models except helicopters FUNCTION
this submenu are labeled ROLL (CH2), NICK (CH3) submenu THR.CRV (page 128), and helicopter models
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
and TAIL (CH4), as shown below: FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV (page 160).
Press BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
Logical sw Sequence
CH ROLL
Dual Rate enable the control surface deflection limits
to be changed while still retaining full stick movement,
D/R +100% +100% INC
i.e. ‘normal’ deflection plus a setting for decreased/
This procedure is identical for all models, but the EXP 000% 000% RES
increased deflection limits at full stick movement. D/R
channel page labeling differs between models. Refer CTL NULL DEC
acts independently from functions that associate a
to the model type to understand the different values in single servo or are actuated thorough a complex mix-
SYM OFF
the field to the right of the CH line. er or coupling function by multiple servos. (Refer to
the BASE submenu CTL Set (page 90) or Definition
of Terms Control Function (page 24) for additional
information.)
The control deflections can be set for each switch
position between 0 and 125% of the normal control
travel.
EXP allows users to adjust the sensitivity of the con-
trol surface deflection around smaller stick move-
ments. For example, the elevators are barely moved
when the stick moves around its central position, but
124 Function menu | general - DR/Expo
full deflection is allowed when the stick is moved to BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
its limit. CH CH 3
Conversely, the effect of the control around center po-
sition increases for values less than 0% and decreas- D/R +100% +100% INC
es in the direction of full deflection. The progression EXP 000% 000% RES Press
can be set from -100% to +100%; 0% corresponds to CTL NULL DEC
the normal linear control characteristic.
SYM OFF
For the most common rotary servos, the rudder con-
trol is nonlinear since the rudder deflection from the BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
servo linkage becomes increasingly smaller as the an- CH CH 4 CH AILE
gle of rotation of the connecting pulley or cantilever
increases. When EXP values are greater than 0%, this INC INC
D/R +100% +100% D/R +100% +100%
effect can be counteracted so that the angle of rota-
EXP 000% 000% RES EXP 000% 000% RES
tion increases disproportionately as the control stick
CTL NULL DEC CTL NULL DEC
deflection increases.
SYM OFF SYM ON
The EXP setting always acts directly on the  corre-
sponding control function independent of whether Phase Depending Dual-Rate/Expo Settings D/R Function
it affects the individual servo or several servos by
means of complex mixing and coupling functions. This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- Setting Symmetrical Dual Rate Values
The D/R and EXP functions can be switched together ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to To change between the different versions, assign a
by a single control if the control has been correspond- control, 2- or 3-way switch or logical switch in the
ingly assigned. It is possible to link the dual rate and the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE CTL line as described in the Control and Switch As-
EXP functions: this can be advantageous, especially signment section (page 26):
with fast models. 1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
In the display graphic the green vertical line moves to-
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page CH AILE
gether with the related control stick to allow a clearer SELECT
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
evaluation of the curve characteristics related to the NO
different switch. To change the phases, activate the D/R +100% +100% INC
control travel. CLR
corresponding switch(es). EXP 000% 000% RES
To change between the display screens of individual LOGIC
setting options, press the value field in the CH line:  SYM  Button CTL NULL DEC
SYM ON
The SYM function allows a symmetrical, simultane-
ous, field adjustment of both control sides. Turn this
function  OFF  or  ON  by pressing the button in the
Press SYM line.

Function menu | general - DR/Expo 125

 BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
Setting Asymmetrical Dual Rate Values Exponential Function
CH AILE To set individual dual rate values, make sure the SYM Set the exponential function the same way as the dual
line value button is   OFF  . Then press to highlight rate function.
D/R +100% +100% INC the value fields in the D/R line one at a time. Use the To set simultaneous exponential values, make sure
EXP 000% 000% RES left-side column to set the dual rate to the minus side the SYM line value button is  ON . Then press a val-
CTL L1 DEC of the control travel and use the right-side column to ue field in the EXP line. Both value fields highlight
SYM ON set the dual rate to the plus side of the control travel: blue. Press the   INC  or   DEC  button at the right
edge of the display to increase/decrease the values.
To set simultaneous dual rate values, make sure the Alternatively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of
SYM line value button is   ON  . Then press a value BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
the display screen to achieve the same result. Press
field in the D/R line: CH AILE
the  RES  button to reset the changed value back to
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
the default.
D/R +050% +125% INC
CH AILE To set individual, asymmetrical exponential values,
Press EXP 000% 000% RES
make sure the SYM line value button is  OFF . Then
CTL L1 DEC
D/R +100% +100% INC press the value fields in the EXP line one at a time:
SYM OFF
EXP 000% 000% RES
CTL L1 DEC Press the   INC  or   DEC  button or the at the right
SYM ON edge of the display to increase/decrease the values.
Press
Alternatively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of
Both value fields highlight blue: the display screen to achieve the same result.
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
CH AILE back to the default.
The dual rate curve is automatically displayed in the The field highlights blue:
D/R +100% +100% INC
graph.
BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
EXP 000% 000% RES
CTL L 1v DEC
Attention CH AILE

SYM ON
For safety reasons, the dual rate value  should D/R +100% +100% INC
Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of not fall below 20%. EXP 000% 000% RES
the display to increase/decrease the values. Alterna- CTL L1 DEC
tively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the SYM OFF
display screen to achieve the same result.
Use the left-side column to set the expo value to the
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
minus side of the control travel and use the right-side
back to the default.
column to set the expo value to the plus side of the
The adjustment range is ±125%. control travel.

126 Function menu | general - DR/Expo

 BACK PHASE 1 D/R,EXP SERVO
CH AILE

D/R +100% +100% INC

EXP +025% –050% RES
CTL L1 DEC
SYM OFF

Press the  INC  or  DEC  button at the right edge of

the display to increase/decrease the values. Alterna-
tively, press the arrow keys ( pq ) to the left of the
display screen to achieve the same result.
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
The adjustment range is ±100%.
The exponential curve is automatically displayed in
the graph.

Notice
The curve shown in the example above is only for
demonstration purposes and does not represent
an actual exponential curve.

Function menu | general - DR/Expo 127

 THR.CRV
Throttle Control Stick Characteristic Settings
Phase Dependent Settings The control stick position is also displayed numerical-
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- ly in the IN line (-100 % to +100 %).
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed Move the throttle to one of the two end positions. In
This submenu icon is not available for motor-less gliders. in green in the upper left side of the screen next to the example below, the throttle is moved to the front
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the position and the green line moves the right, disap-
Use this submenu to change the control character- pearing under the white frame, and the color of the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
istic of the throttle and control stick independent of top point changes from green to red:
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
whether the control function acts directly on a servo
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
connected to control channel 1, or via a number of BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
mixers on multiple servos. Also use this submenu to
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
adjust the idle LOW or “motor off” throttle position. CURVE OFF
different switch. To change the phases, activate the IN +100% INC
corresponding switch(es). OUT +100%
To change these settings, from the main display press
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up Changing the Control Direction POINT L +100% DEC

the FUNCTION submenu screen: In the mz-24 PRO transmitter, all fixed-wing rear ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

000% 000% throttle positions default to Motor OFF when using Press the  DEC  button or the down arrow key ( q )
4.2V electric drives. The throttle control stick control di- to move the red point down to a value of 000% in the
000 000 000:00.0 rection can be inverted through the throttle curve from POINT line:
"accelerate from back to front" to "accelerate from
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Press
front to back". BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 To make adjustments to this function, turn on the
MODELLNAME 1
control stick position graphic/numerical display by CURVE OFF
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 pressing the ST OFF  button at the bottom left of IN +100% INC

From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the the display to change the value to ST ON  . Acti- OUT –100%

THR.CRV icon: vate the Y-coordinate adjustment option by pressing POINT H 000% DEC

the  Y-axis  button: ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
BACK PHASE 1 TRH.CRV SERVO Move the throttle to the opposite end position. In the
example below, the throttle is moved to the rear posi-
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
CURVE OFF tion and the green line moves to the left, disappearing
Press IN –100% INC under the white frame, and the point at the end of the
Logical sw Sequence
OUT –100% yellow horizontal line change from green to red:
POINT L 000% DEC
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

Use the throttle to move the vertical green line be-

tween the two endpoints L and H in the graphic.

128 Function menu | general - Curve CH 1

 BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
The graphic display makes it much easier to specify
the support points and their adjustment. However, it
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
Curve OFF
is recommended to start with fewer support points.
IN –100% INC
In the basic setting of the program, 2 support points Curve OFF
OUT –100%
describe a linear characteristic, that is, the two end- INC
IN +050%
POINT L 000% DEC
points at the bottom control stick stop L (low = -100%
OUT +050%
control travel) and at the top control stick stop H (high
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT POINT ? 000% DEC
= +100 % control travel).
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
Press the   INC  button or the up arrow key ( p ) to BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
move the red point up to a value of +100% in the Between the two endpoints L and H, up to 5 ad-
POINT line: ditional support points can be set, though the dis-
Curve OFF
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
IN –100% INC
tance between support points may not be less
OUT –100%
than 25%.
Curve OFF POINT L 000% DEC • ENT  Button
IN –100% INC
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT Move the control stick. Support points can be set
OUT +100% by touching the  ENT  button whenever a question
POINT L +100% DEC •  ST OFF  or  ST ON  Button mark ? shows in the POINT line. A green point ap-
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT Touch this button to turn on or off the graphic and pears at the intersection of the yellow and green
numeric display of the control stick position. lines:
The inverted control signal shown above acts on all
When ST ON on is selected and the control el-
subsequent mixing and coupling functions and the BACK PHASE 1 THR-CRV SERVO
ements (throttle control stick) is moved, a verti-
active Power OFF time of the throttle position.
cal green line moves synchronously in the graph
Repeat as needed to change in every phase. between the two endpoints L and H. The control
Curve OFF
IN +050% INC
Notice stick position is also displayed numerically in the
OUT +050%
IN line (-100 % to +100 %). The intersection of this Press
Never reverse the rotation direction of the control POINT ? 000% DEC
line with the curve is identified as OUT and can be
channel CH1 of the BASIC submenu REV/SUB ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
varied at the support points between -125% and
(page 64) to reverse the control direction of the
+125%. Control signals changed in this way affect
related control sticks. The switch-on warning CH1-Pos
all of the subsequent mixing and coupling func-
of the Thr.HOLD function (page 66) do not follow this
tions.
kind of reverse control direction.
In the example below, the control stick is exact-
ly halfway between the middle and end of its path,
Setting Support Points
at +50% of the control path, and generates an out-
The pitch control curve can be specified by up to 7 put signal that is also +50% due to the linear char-
points (termed “support points”) along the entire con- acteristic:
trol stick travel.

Function menu | general - Curve CH 1 129

 When the control stick is moved and the green line Press the  ENT  button to remove the point: Notices
moves off the green point, the point will turn red, • Moving the red point  horizontally away
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
the ? is replaced with a number, and the point val- from the current control position will cause
ue appears in the value field to the right of the sup- the point to become  green after a short
CURVE OFF
port point number: while, and a ? will appear in the Point line.
IN 000% INC
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
This question mark does not relate to the
OUT 000%
Press point which has been moved, rather, it in-
POINT 2 +050% DEC
CURVE OFF
dicates that another point can be set at the
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
INC
current control position.
IN +050%
OUT +050%
The red point disappears: • Remember that the percentages in the in-
POINT 1 +050% DEC BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
put (IN) and output (OUT) line always refer
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
to the temporary position of the control
stick and not to the position of the point.
CURVE OFF
The 5 support points between the L and H end- •  Y-axis  Button (Y-axis)
IN 000% INC
points can be created in any order; support points
OUT 000% Activate this function, press to highlight the button
are automatically renumbered sequentially from
POINT ? 000% DEC at the bottom edge of the display.
left to right after points are set or deleted. In the
example below, the red point at left near the L end- ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT Move the active (red) point up by pressing the  INC 
point is now considered Point 1: button or down with the  DEC  button, as shown
Changing the Support Point Value below:
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO
•  X-axis  Button (X-axis) BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO

CURVE OFF
Activate this function, press to highlight the button
INC
at the bottom edge of the display. CURVE OFF
IN –050%
OUT –050%
Move the active (red) point to the right by pressing IN –030% INC

POINT 1 –025% DEC

the  INC  button or to the left with the  DEC  but- OUT +035%

Y-axis
ton, as shown below: POINT 2 +067% DEC
ST ON X-axis ENT
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO

Deleting a Support Point Press the  Y-axis  button again to deactivate the
To remove a set support point, move the control
CURVE OFF function.
IN 000% INC
stick until the vertical green line aligns with the
OUT +018% Notice
point to be deleted. The support point will turn red
POINT 2 000% DEC Remember that the percentages in the input
and its number and associated value will appear in
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT (IN) and output (OUT) line always refer to the
the POINT line.
momentary position of the control stick and
Press the  X-axis  button again to deactivate the not to the position of the point.
function.

130 Function menu | general - Curve CH 1

Rounding Off the Throttle Curve
• CURVE Line  ON/OFF  Button
Curve profiles are angeled by default. Automati-
cally round off the lines by turning ON the round-
ing function in the CURVE line:
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO

CURVE OFF
IN –030% INC
Press
OUT +035%
POINT 2 +067% DEC
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

The angled curve lines are rounded:

BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO

CURVE ON
IN –030% INC
OUT +035%
POINT 2 +067% DEC
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

Attention
The curves shown above are only for demon-
stration purposes and do not represent actual
throttle curves.

Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display

to return to the menu selection.

Function menu | general - Curve CH 1 131

Mixer - Basic Functions

Mixing allows multiple functions to be controlled si- functions in which two (or more) control channels are
multaneously by a single signal. There are two main mixed with each other. The example mixer cited can
types of mixing: control function mixing and channel be activated by selecting the V-tail option during the
mixing. initial model selection. Refer to the BASE submenu
Control function mixing allows a single pair of con- Model Sel section (page 38) for additional informa-
trol signals to act as two separate pairs. For example: tion.
when coupling elevator and aileron, the transmitter Each fixed-wing and helicopter model memory pro-
operates as a single function but the single pair of gram has five programmable linear mixers and three
control signals combine the two different deflections curve mixers in each of the 30 model memories per
in accordance with the control stick movements, thus programmed phase in which users can define inputs
moving together (as elevators move) and individually and outputs as well as the degree of desired mixing.
(as ailerons move) at the same time. (Refer to the FUNCTION submenu Prog.MIX (page
Control channel mixing allows separate channels to 134) for additional information.)
work in conjunction with one another. For example,
the coupling of two servos with the same function,
such as two rudders, to be controlled by a single ser-
vo.
When mixed, the control function signals flow from
the transmitter output and branch at a point in which
the transmitter options (i.e. D/R,EXP, CTL Set, THR.
CRV etc.) are contained within a signal that relays an-
other control channel’s specific input, allowing anoth-
er receiver to output the settings.

Example: V-tail Mixer

elevator stick
4,8 V

3 3
Best.-Nr. 4101
C 577
Servo
ele
control function inputs

ele der
or
vat

(receiver outputs)
vat

control channels
rud

rudder / elevator left

r o

V-tail mixer
rud ator
ele
r

rudder / elevator right

de

de
v
rud

4,8 V

4 4
Best.-Nr. 4101
C 577
Servo

rudder stick

The program of the mz-24 Pro HoTT transmitter al-

ready contains numerous preprogrammed coupling
132 What is a mixer?
Programmable Mixers - General Information

Each fixed-wing and helicopter model memory pro- Essential Mixer Parameters
gram has five programmable linear mixers and three • Mixing degree that determines the level of influ-
curve mixers in each of the 30 model memories per ence of the input signal on the control channel
programmed phase in which users can define inputs connected to the mixer output.
and outputs as well as the degree of desired mixing.
(Refer to the FUNCTION submenu Prog.MIX (page With linear mixers, the mixing level can be adjust-
134) for additional information.) This maximum of 48 ed  symmetrically or asymmetrically. With curve 
mixers per model memory should be sufficient for tak- mixers, the mixing level can also be  configured
ing advantage of pre-programmed coupling functions according to user specifications by up to 7 points 
options. to produce  extremely nonlinear mixer guide lines.
The input signal for a control function (1 to 12) is used • Neutral point of a linear mixer, also termed the
as the input signal for programmable mixers. The con- offset.
trol channel signal functions relayed to the mixer input The offset is the point along the travel of a con-
are determined by its control element and the char- trol element (control stick, proportional  control or
acteristics specified via the D/R,EXP, CTL Set, and switch) at which the mixer no longer influences the
THR.CRV submenu settings. control channel connected to its output. Normally,
The mixer output acts on a selectable control channel this is the middle position of the control. The offset
(1 to a maximum of 12, depending on the transmitter can also be located at any other position along the
and receiver). The signal functions relayed to the ser- servo travel. Since curve mixers can be individual-
vo are determined by the characteristics specified via ly configured, it is recommended to specify a mix-
the REV/SUB, CTL Set, E.P.A, and Out.Swap sub- er neutral point for the 5 linear mixers.
menu settings.
One control function may be used simultaneously for
any number of mixer inputs when, for example, mixers
are to be parallel-connected.
Any number of mixer outputs can affect the same
control channel. However, make sure that the affected
servo does not reach its mechanical limit when sever-
al mixing signals combine into one which is too large.
To be safe, a corresponding travel limit should be set
in the BASE submenu E.P.A (page 62).
By default, all programmable mixers are initially
blocked and will need to be turned on during pro-
gramming. Additionally, mixers can also be assigned
an ON/OFF switch. Pay attention to the multiple
switch functions available to be assigned; do not un-
intentionally assign one switch two functions.

General information on programmable mixers 133

 Programmable Mixers
Programmable Linear and Curve Mixers
In addition to the different model types,  per each Page Change The Master >> Slave (source >> target) selection dis-
set-up phase there are  five linear mixers and three Linear mixers (1 to 5) are shown on the first display play page for the mixer appears:
7-point  curve mixers  in each of the 30 model mem- page. Press the  NEXT  button to view the curve mix- BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
ories. er display (6 to 8): NONE >> NONE
To change these settings, from the main display press
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
the FUNCTION submenu screen: ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
000% 000%
1. INH NONE >> NONE NEXT
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
2. INH NONE >> NONE
4.2V
Press
3. INH NONE >> NONE
000 000 000:00.0
4. INH NONE >> NONE
mz • MST
0:01:23 000:00.0 5. INH NONE >> NONE
M-1 000 000 Press To choose the source (master) channel for mixer
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
input, press the first (left)  NONE  button:
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000
ACT MST SLV SET CRV.MIX BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
6. INH NONE >> NONE NEXT NONE >> NONE
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the
7. INH NONE >> NONE
Prog.MIX icon: Press
8. INH NONE >> NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer

Mixer Setup
The button highlights blue:
Logical sw Sequence
Press Change to the appropriate phase.
Choose a number line to assign the mixer and press BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
the  NONE  button. In the example below, the mixer NONE >> NONE
is being assigned to Line 1:
Phase-Dependent Settings of Programmable CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
Mixers BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
1. INH NONE >> NONE NEXT
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
2. INH NONE >> NONE
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to Press
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
3. INH NONE >> NONE Press to select control function 1 to 12. In the ex-
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE 4. INH NONE >> NONE ample below, CH1 needs to be assigned:
INH NONE >> NONE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. 5.

Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,

refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
corresponding switch(es).

134 Function menu | general - Free mixer

 BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
The button highlights blue: To store the selected settings, press the BACK  but-
NONE >> NONE
ton at the top left of the display:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
CH1 >> NONE BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR CH1 >> CH3
Press
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
Press
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
As soon as the control function is selected, its val-
ue is transferred to the active MST field: Press to select control function 1 to 12. In the ex-
BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
ample below, CH3 needs to be assigned: The Prog.MIX display screen appears with the mixer
CH1 NONE
selections showing in Line 1:
>> BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
CH1 >> NONE BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX

CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR 1. INH CH1 >> CH3 >> NEXT
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 2. INH NONE >> NONE
Press
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 3. INH NONE >> NONE
4. INH NONE >> NONE
Press the  CLR  button to reset the default value in
5. INH NONE >> NONE
the blue field ( NONE ). As soon as the control function is selected, its val-
ue is transferred to the active SLV field:
Notice
BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
Do not forget to assign switches to the select-
CH1 >> CH3
ed control functions 5 to 12 in the BASE sub-
menu CTL Set (page 90).
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
• SLV
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
To choose the target (slave) channel for mixer out-
put, press the second (right)  NONE  button:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO Press the  CLR  button to reset the default value in
CH1 >> NONE the blue field ( NONE ).

CH1 CH2
Press
CH3 CH4 CLR
Tip
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 A mixer programmed with the same input and output
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 channels (such as CH1 >> CH1) allows for special
effects when turning programmable mixers on and
off as desired.

Function menu | general - Free mixer 135

Activating and Deactivating Mixers Both the MST and SLV column buttons will open the Press the  CLR  button to reset both default values in
To activate (ON) or deactivate (INH) a mixer that has channel selection display screen: the blue and black MST and SLV fields:
been setup as described above, press the value field BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
in the ACT column of the appropriate mixer. In the CH7 >> CH8 CH7 >> CH8
example below, the mixer assigned to Line 1 needs to
be activated: CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR

CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
Press
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX

1. INH CH1 >> CH3 >> NEXT

2. INH NONE >> NONE The fields have been reset to default:
Press Press either the MST or SLV channel buttons in the
3. INH NONE >> NONE
top left of the screen. When cleared, both fields will BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
4. INH NONE >> NONE
return to their default settings so it doesn’t matter NONE >> NONE
5. INH NONE >> NONE
which field is chosen. In the example below,   CH8 
The Line 1 mixer is now activated (ON): will be highlighted: CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR

BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO
CH7 >> CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX

1. ON CH1 >> CH3 >> NEXT

Press
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
2. INH NONE >> NONE Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
3. INH NONE >> NONE to return to the mixer selection.
4. INH NONE >> NONE CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

5. INH NONE >> NONE

Linear (1 to 5) Mixer Setup

The button highlights blue: To set linear mixers 1-5, press the brackets  >>  but-
Deleting Mixers ton in the SET column in the appropriate mixer line:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
To reset a mixer, press either the MST or SLV column BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
CH7 CH8
button of the appropriate mixer line. In the example >>
ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX
below, the mixer assigned to Line 4 needs to be de- 1. ON CH1 >> CH3 >> NEXT
leted: CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CLR
2. ON CH6 >> CH3 >>
CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Press
BACK PHASE 1 Prog. MIX SERVO 3. ON CH3 >> CH8 >>
CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12
ACT MST SLV SET LIN.MIX 4. INH NONE >> NONE

1. ON CH1 >> CH3 >> NEXT 5. INH NONE >> NONE

2. ON CH6 >> CH3 >>

Press
3. ON CH3 >> CH8 >>
4. ON CH7 >> CH8 >>
5. INH NONE >> NONE

136 Function menu | general - Free mixer

The mixer settings display page appears: TRIM Line The field highlights blue:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog MIX SERVO It is standard that the digital trim of control functions BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON 1-4 act on the mixer input. The digital trim for con- CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON trol functions 5-12 also act on the mixer input. In the ACT ON CTL ON
A 000% B 000% INC event that the functions have been assigned to one of A 000% B 000% INC
OFFSET X 000% RES the INC/DEC buttons (DT1 or DT2), the trim influence OFFSET X 000% RES
OFFSET Y 000% DEC can be switched off by pressing the  ON/OFF  button OFFSET Y 000% DEC
SYM OFF
in the TRIM line: SYM OFF
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
The vertical green line represents the present position CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
of the control at input 1. ACT ON CTL ON
( pq ) to increase/decrease the values. The adjust-
The horizontal line (left half red, right half blue) indi- A 000% B
Press
000% INC
ment range is ±125%.
cates a mixing level that is currently zero throughout OFFSET X 000% RES
Use the same procedure for a value on the right of the
the entire control travel. The elevator will not respond OFFSET Y 000% DEC
neutral point.
to the actuation of the CH1 transmitter. SYM ON Symmetrical and asymmetrical values can be set, for
First, define the Mixing Levels. example:
Mixing levels BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM OFF
Define mixing levels above and below the mixer neu- CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON
tral point beginning from its current position. ACT ON CTL ON
A 000% B 000% INC INC
A +050% B +125%
Setting Symmetrical or Asymmetrical Values OFFSET X 000% RES OFFSET X 000% RES
By default, the values are set separately for each con- OFFSET Y 000% DEC
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
trol side. To set the values simultaneously, turn ON the SYM ON SYM OFF
symmetrical function by pressing the  ON/OFF  but-
ton in the SYM line: Programming Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO To set the mixing value to be left of the 0% control
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON travel and reset the central position in the middle of Offset (Mixer Central Point)
ACT ON CTL ON
the graph, press the value field in the A line: The offset mixer central point is the point along the
A 000% B 000% INC BACK PHASE 1 Prog MIX SERVO control travel at which the mixer does NOT influence
OFFSET X 000% RES CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON the control channel connected to an output. By de-
OFFSET Y 000% DEC ACT ON CTL ON
fault is precisely in the middle of the control range.
SYM ON A 000% B 000% INC This point can be moved under the following two cir-
OFFSET X 000% RES
cumstances (Offset X and Offset Y):
Press
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
SYM OFF

Function menu | general - Free mixer 137

• OFFSET X Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
A value unequal to 000% entered in the OFFSET back to the default. back to the default.
X line causes the offset to shift horizontally by a • OFFSET Y
maximum of ±100%. Attention
A value unequal to 000% entered in the OFFSET Y
In the following example, the offset point needs to The curve shown above is for demonstration
line causes the offset to shift vertically by a maxi-
be moved 30% to the right. Press the value field in purposes only and does not represent an ac-
mum of ±100%.
the OFFSET X line: tual mixer guide line.
In the following example, the offset point needs
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO to be moved 50% to the bottom. Press the value
Prog.MIX
Mixer Switch
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON field in OFFSET Y line:
Once a mixer is activated, the value fields in the ACT
ACT ON CTL ON BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
Prog.MIX
and CTL lines automatically change to   ON  . This
A +050% B +125% INC >> CH3 TRIM
CH1 ON activates the relevant mixer and turns it on perma-
OFFSET X 000% RES ACT ON CTL ON nently in the current phase. Refer to the Activating
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
Press
A +050% B +125%
Press
INC and Deactivating Mixers section (page 136) for more
SYM OFF OFFSET X +030% RES information.
DEC
The field highlights blue: OFFSET Y 000% Each mixer can be turned on and off by assigning it
SYM OFF a switch that has not been assigned other functions.
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
The field highlights blue: Press the value field in the CTL line:
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO Press
INC CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
A +050% B +125% CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
OFFSET X 000% RES ACT ON CTL ON
ACT ON CTL ON
DEC A +050% B +125% INC
OFFSET Y 000% A +050% B +125% INC
SYM OFF OFFSET X +030% RES
OFFSET X +030% RES
OFFSET Y –050% DEC
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
Press the  INC  button or the up arrow key ( p ) to SYM OFF
SYM OFF
move the offset point 30% to the right of the cur-
rently set mixer end point: Next, press the   DEC  button or the down arrow
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
key ( q ) to move the offset point 50% below the
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
currently set mixer point:
ACT ON CTL ON BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
A +050% B +125% INC CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON
OFFSET X +030% RES ACT ON CTL ON
OFFSET Y 000% DEC A +050% B +125% INC
SYM OFF OFFSET X +030% RES
OFFSET Y –050% DEC
SYM OFF

138 Function menu | general - Free mixer

An active window pops up: CH8 is assigned to the side proportional rotary control Move the green line via the related control. To set a
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO SL1.) To show the green line, press the  ST OFF  but- support point, press the  ENT  button:
CH1 >> CH3 TRIM ON ton at the bottom left to activate the switch:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
Select
AKT EIN CTL ON BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON
NO
A +050% B +125% INC CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON ACT ON CTL ON
CLR
OFFSET X +030% RES ACT ON CTL ON IN –045% INC
LOGIC
OFFSET Y –050% DEC IN –100% INC OUT 000%
Press
SYM OFF OUT 000% POINT ? 000% DEC
Press
POINT L 000% DEC ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
Assign a switch or control switch as described in sec-
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
tion Control and Switch Assignment (page 26). A red dot appears at the intersection between the two
Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display The value field changes to  ST ON , the green vertical lines. At the same time, the ? in the POINT line is re-
to return to the mixer selection. line representing the temporary control position ap- placed with a point number, and the value field to the
Curve (6 to 8) Mixer Setup pears in the graph and the control position is numeri- right shows the current output value:
cally displayed in the input IN line.
These three curve mixers make it possible to define In the example below, the control at input CH8 is at
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO

extremely nonlinear mixer guide lines with up to five -045% of the control travel. The output signal remains
CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON

freely positionable points between the two endpoints 000% since a value has not been entered:
ACT ON CTL ON

along the control travel: L (low = -100% control travel) IN –045% INC

and H (high = +100% control travel) . BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO OUT 000%
CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON POINT 1 000% DEC
Programming Details
ACT ON CTL ON ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
The control curve can be specified by up to 7 points, IN –045% INC
(termed “support points”) along the entire control stick OUT 000%
The set point can be moved horizontally with
travel. In the basic program setting, 2 support points POINT ? 000% DEC
the  X-axis  function within a range of approximately
describe a linear characteristic; the two endpoints at ± 90%, and vertically with the  Y-axis  function within
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
the bottom control stick stop L and at the top control a range of ±125%. Refer to the Changing the Sup-
stick stop H. The intersection of this line with the mixer curve is port Point Value section (page 140) for additional in-
identified as output in the OUT line and can be var- formation.
Notice ied at the support points within a range of ± 125%.
Notice
This alters the control signal which affects the mixer
The following examples are for demonstration Remember that the percentages in the input (IN)
output.
purposes only and do not  represent a realistic and output (OUT) line always refer to the tempo-
mixer guide line. Up to five additional support points can be set be-
rary position of the control stick and not to the
tween the L and H endpoints; the distance between
position of the point.
each support points must be a minimum of 25%.
Setting Support Points
A green vertical line, normally hidden, appears and Use the same procedure to set the other support
moves synchronously in the graphic between the two points. The 5 support points between the L and H
mixer input control endpoints once the control switch endpoints can be created in any order; support points
is activated. (In the example below, control function
Function menu | general - Free mixer 139
are automatically renumbered sequentially from left to BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
right after points are set or deleted. CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON
Deleting a Support Point ACT ON CTL ON ACT ON CTL ON
INC INC
To remove a set support point, move the control stick IN +050% IN +050%

until the vertical green line aligns with the point to be OUT 000% OUT +050%

deleted. The support point will turn red and its number POINT 2 000% DEC POINT 2 +050% DEC

and associated value will appear in the POINT line. To ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

clear the point, press the  ENT  button:

Press the  X-axis  button to deactivate the func- Press the   Y-axis  button to deactivate the func-
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO tion. The button changes back to black. tion. The button changes back to black.
CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON
Notices Notice
IN –085% INC • Moving the red point  horizontally away Remember that the percentages in the input
OUT 000%
from the current control position will cause (IN) and output (OUT) line always refer to the
POINT 1 000%
Press
DEC
the point to become  green after a short temporary position of the control stick and not
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
while, and a ? will appear in the Point line. to the position of the point.
This question mark does not relate to the
The red point disappears: point which has been moved, rather, it in- Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display
dicates that another point can be set at the to return to the mixer selection.
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
current control position. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
CH8 >> CH10 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON • Remember that the percentages in the in-
IN –085% INC
put (IN) and output (OUT) line always refer
OUT 000%
to the temporary position of the control Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer

POINT ? 000% DEC

stick and not to the position of the point.
Logical sw Sequence

ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT •  Y-axis  Button (Y-axis)

Activate this function, press to highlight the  Y-ax-
Changing the Support Point Value is  button at the bottom edge of the display. Point
•  X-axis  Button (X-axis) values can be changed only when the button is
Activate this function, press to highlight the  X-ax- blue.
is  button at the bottom edge of the display. Point Move the active (red) point to the right by pressing
values can be changed only when the button is the  INC  button or to the left with the  DEC  but-
blue. ton:
Move the active (red) point to the right by pressing
the  INC  button or to the left with the  DEC  but-
ton. In the example below, Point 1 (set at -45%)
and Point 2 (set at +45%) is moved and placed
precisely between the end position and middle po-
sition:

140 Function menu | general - Free mixer

 Trainer
Dual Transmitter Connection With DSC Cable
An mz-24 Pro HoTT TEACH transmitter can be con- Notice To transfer any of the control function inputs 1 - 12 to
nected to any suitable PUPIL transmitter, including The previous graphic shows the default status of the PUPIL, press the  TEACH  button. The inputs will
transmitters with a classic 35/40 MHz range. Use the this submenu. PUPIL control has not been re- be assigned as  PUPIL :
DSC port on the back of the transmitter to establish a leased; neither has a switch been assigned. BACK Trainer SERVO
cable-linked trainer system.
CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
To establish these settings, from the main display Transmitter Settings - TEACH CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH NONE
press the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND
bring up the FUNCTION submenu screen:
The PUPIL-controlled model must be programmed CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF
000% 000%
with all its functions including trimming and any mix- CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
4.2V
er functions in a model memory of the TEACH trans- CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
000 000 000:00.0 mitter. The receiver of the pupil-model must also be
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 bound to the TEACH transmitter since that receiver
M-1 000 000 Press is responsible for controlling the model even in PUPIL
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 mode.
Following the standard conventions for model types
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 Transfer up to 12 function inputs (see Definition of
000 000 Airplane, Glider and Helicopter when assigning con-
Terms, page 24) of the TEACH transmitter to the PU-
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the trol functions.
PIL transmitter,  either individually or in any desired
Trainer icon: combination. Channel Function
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM The  TEACH  labeling value field or button follows the 1 Motor/airbrake or pitch
standard control stick function assignment for func- 2 Aileron or Roll
tion inputs 1 - 4 found in all model types. Function
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
inputs 5 - 12 are typically free, or open, inputs. Refer 3 Elevator or Nick
Press to the BASE submenu CTL Set (page 90). 4 Rudder or Yaw
Logical sw Sequence

Notice
It does not matter which specific controls are as-
signed to the control function inputs to be trans-
BACK Trainer SERVO To change between teacher and pupil, a train-
ferred to the PUPIL. Inputs can only be assigned
CH 1. TEACH CH 7. TEACH CTL er-switch must be assigned in the value field in the
in the BASE submenu CTL Set (page 90) when the
CH 2. TEACH CH 8. TEACH NULL CTL column, as described in section Control and
trainer connection is turned OFF.
CH 3. TEACH CH 9. TEACH BIND Switch Assignment (page 26).
CH 4. TEACH CH 10. TEACH OFF
CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF

Function menu | general - Trainer 141

Using an intermittent switch, such as S8, is highly rec- Transmitter Settings - PUPIL For transmitters in the mz-18 and mz-24 series, press
ommended so that control can be easily withdrawn The PUPIL-controlled model must be programmed the value field in the TYPE column at the bottom of
from the trainer at any time: with all its functions including trimming and any mix- the FUNCTION submenu Trainer display. Change
er functions in a model memory of the TEACH trans- to  DSC-S  and change the rear DSC transmitter con-
BACK Trainer SERVO
mitter. The receiver of the pupil-model must also be nection to "signal output":
CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8 bound to the TEACH transmitter since that receiver BACK Trainer SERVO

CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND

is responsible for controlling the model even in PUPIL CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL

CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF

mode. A suitable PUPIL transmitter can be connected CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8

CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE

CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
Since the trainer system programming an operable
PUPIL transmitter will not be connected to a TEACH
transmitter, the transmitter will react with acoustical
alarms to switches connected during the switch as-
signment. A warning message flashes every second
at the top left in the transmitter's main display. Open
the switch that has just been assigned.
To change the DSC connection to “signal input,” press
the value field in the TYPE column. The default  RF  The specified cable is used to connect to the TEACH
will change to  DSC-T :
BACK Trainer SERVO
CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8
CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND
CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF
CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH DSC-T
If the connection to the PUPIL is made with anything
other than a two-pin DSC  socket, e.g. a  three-pin
T/P jack by Graupner, the connection to the PUPIL
transmitter will not work. Change the modulation type
PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) must be set in the PUPIL trans-
mitter independently from the modulation type used in
the TEACH transmitter.
to any TEACH transmitter, including transmitters with
a classic 35/40 MHz range since the required PPM
signal required by the TEACH transmitter is normally
applied to the DSC socket of a HoTT transmitter.
Almost any transmitter from the past and current
Graupner product line with at least 4 control functions
can be used as the PUPIL transmitter. The PUPIL
transmitter must be equipped with the current con-
nection module for PUPIL transmitters. The module
must be connected to the transmitter board in accor-
dance with the provided installation instructions.
transmitter. Refer to the Trainer Cable section (page
143) for more information.
The control functions of the PUPIL transmitter must
act directly on the control channels without any inter-
mediate mixers, i.e. receiver outputs.
With Graupner transmitter series mc, mx, or mz it is
recommended that student models be named “PU-
PIL” in the model memory line. Assign the correct
model type and adapt the control arrangement (mode
1 - 4) and throttle/pitch to the PUPIL preferences. All
other settings, including mixing and coupling func-
tions, are made in the TEACH transmitter and are
transmitted by the TEACH transmitter to the receiver.
CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND
CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF
CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH DSC-S
With a mx-20, mc-16, mc-20 or mc-32 PUPIL trans-
mitter, adapt the modulation types to the number of
control channels to be transferred in the DSC OUT-
PUT line of the BASE submenu TX ctl. For exam-
ple, the signal package with modulation type PPM10
only contains control channels 1 - 5, and channels 6
and higher are not included. In order for the PUPIL
to use one or more of channels 5 and above, select
one of the modulation types that includes the required
channels. If PUPIL mode is to be used with an existing
model memory, instead of one newly initialized in the
PUPIL transmitter, make sure to enter "HoTT" in the
"Module" line of the BASE submenu. Otherwise, the
PPM signal at the DSC socket may be inverted.
To assign control functions other than the two con-
trol sticks functions (1 - 4) to the TEACH transmitter,
assign control elements to the inputs in the BASE
submenu CTL Set of the PUPIL transmitter that cor-
respond to the released function inputs 5 - 12 in the
Trainer submenu of the TEACH transmitter.

142 Function menu | general - Trainer

With older transmitters of the D and FM type, check
the servo direction and control mode and change
them if necessary by switching the corresponding ca-
bles. If necessary, turn off all the mixers or set them
to zero.
Notices
• Failure to assign a control in the PUPIL trans-
mitter will result in the relevant servo(s) remain-
ing in middle position after transferring control
functions to the PUPIL transmitter.
• Regardless of the type of RF link between
the TEACH transmitter and model, the PUPIL
transmitter should always be operated in nor-
mal PPM mode.
Teacher/Pupil Function
Both transmitters are connected to each other using
an appropriate cable. Refer to the Trainer Cable sec-
tion (page 143). Insert the plug identified as M (mas-
ter)  in the TEACH transmitter socket, and insert the
plug with S (student) in the PUPIL transmitter socket
(this many vary depending on the cable).
Attention
BEFORE starting trainer mode for the operational
model, always make sure all functions have been
correctly transferred.
Notice
Do not insert a 3-pin jack plug trainer cable into
the DSC system socket; it is not designed for this
purpose. The DSC socket can only be used for
cables with a 2-pin jack plug.
Trainer Cable
4179.1 Trainer cable to connect any two Graupner
transmitters with a DSC socket. This cable
has a 2-pin jack plug on both ends.
3290.7 Trainer cable to connect a TEACH transmit-
ter with a DSC socket to a Graupner PUPIL
transmitter with a PUPIL socket for the op-
toelectronic system. This cable has a 2-pin
jack plug on the M side and a 3-pin jack
plug on the S side. (Example: an mz-24 Pro
to an mc-16, or a transmitter retrofitted with
a DSC module - order No. 3290.24)
3290.8 Trainer cable to connect a TEACH trans-
mitter having a socket for the optoelectron-
ic system to a Graupner PUPIL transmitter
with a DSC socket. This cable has a 3-pin
jack plug on the M side and a 2-pin jack
plug on the S side. (Example: an mc-16 to
an mz-24 Pro, or a transmitter retrofitted
with a DSC module - order No. 3290.24)
Additional information on the cables and modules
mentioned in this  section for the TEACH and PUPIL
transmitters can be found in the relevant transmitter
instructions in the main Graupner FS catalogue, and
on the Internet at www.graupnerusa.com.
Function menu | general - Trainer 143
Connecting Schema
The following connecting schema represent all transmitter combinations possible at the time this manual was created.

Pupil transmitter mz-24 Pro HoTT Teacher transmitter mz-24 Pro HoTT

DSC cable M Trainer cable S

No. 4179.1 No. 4179.1

Trainer cable Trainer cable

No. 3290.8 No. 3290.7

Trainer transmitter PUPIL transmitter with PU-

TEACH transmitter PUPIL transmitter
with TEACH module No. PIL module, No. 3290.3,
with DSC socket with DSC socket
3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22 3290.10, 3290.33

mc-16 HoTT mc-19 to mc-24 mc-16 HoTT D 14

mc-20 HoTT mx-22(iFS) mc-20 HoTT FM 414
mc-32 HoTT mx-24s mc-32 HoTT FM 4014
mx-12 HoTT mx-12 HoTT FM 6014
mx-16 HoTT mx-16 HoTT mc-10 to mc-24
mx-20 HoTT mx-20 HoTT mx-22(iFS)
mz-10 HoTT mz-10 HoTT mx-24s
mz-12 HoTT mz-12 HoTT
mz-18 HoTT mz-18 HoTT
mz-24 HoTT Pro mz-24 HoTT Pro

144 Function menu | general - Trainer

Wireless HoTT System

The mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter trainer system can tions, are made in the TEACH transmitter and are Preparing TEACH and PUPIL Transmitters
be operated remotely. Configuration two available transmitted by the TEACH transmitter to the receiver. Bind the training model to the PUPIL transmitter, then
transmitters in the FUNCTION submenu Trainer dis- turn on the TEACH transmitter and open the FUNC-
play via the BIND option. Refer to the Binding PUPIL TION submenu Trainer display on both transmitters:
Transmitter to TEACH Transmitter section (page
BACK Trainer SERVO
146) for more information. Following the standard conventions for model types
CH 1. TEACH CH 7. TEACH CTL
Airplane, Glider and Helicopter when assigning con-
Preparing for Training Mode CH 2. TEACH CH 8. TEACH NULL
trol functions.
CH 3. TEACH CH 9. TEACH BIND
TEACH Transmitter
Channel Function CH 4. TEACH CH 10. TEACH OFF
The training model functions must be programmed 1 Motor/airbrake or pitch CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
entirely including trimming and any mixers in a model
memory of the TEACH transmitter. 2 Aileron or Roll CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF

Attention
The model provided for training must be com-
pletely controllable by the TEACH transmitter and
remain connected to the teacher transmitter for
the duration of the training phase.
Notice
If the PUPIL transmitter is a mx-10 with firmware
version V 1a20, regardless of the teacher trans-
mitter firmware version, the training model MUST
ALWAYS be linked to the pupil transmitter. In addition,
for correct functionality, in the model memory of the
teacher transmitter, both option buttons in the BIND
ON/OFF line of the BASE submenu TX ctl be set
to  OFF . In other words, there should be no link to a
receiver in this model memory under either RX1 or RX2.
PUPIL Transmitter
With Graupner transmitter series mc, mx, or mz it is
recommended that student models be named “PU-
PIL” in the model memory line. Assign the correct
model type and adapt the control arrangement (mode
1 - 4) and throttle/pitch to the PUPIL preferences. All
other settings, including mixing and coupling func-
3 Elevator or Nick
4 Rudder or Yaw
To assign control functions other than the two con-
trol sticks functions (1 - 4) to the TEACH transmitter,
assign control elements to the inputs in the BASE
submenu CTL Set of the PUPIL transmitter that cor-
respond to the released function inputs 5 - 12 in the
Trainer submenu of the TEACH transmitter.
Notice
Failure to assign a control in the PUPIL transmit-
ter will result in the relevant servo(s) remaining in
middle position after transferring control func-
tions to the PUPIL transmitter.
The above graphic shows the default layout of the sub-
menu.
Notice
Note the value field  under TYPE column at the
bottom of the display is set to  RF  in  both the
PUPIL and TEACH transmitter.
PUPIL Transmitter
Verify that the display is configured identically with the
above screen-shot graphic.
TEACH Transmitter
Transfer up to twelve function inputs of an mz-24 Pro
TEACH transmitter to the PUPIL transmitter, either in-
dividually or in any desired combination.
Notice
It does not matter which specific controls are as-
signed to the control function inputs to be trans-
ferred to the PUPIL. Inputs can only be assigned
in the BASE submenu CTL Set (page 90) when the
trainer connection is turned OFF.

Function menu | general - Trainer 145

 BACK Trainer SERVO
Immediately press the same button on the  TEACH
CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
transmitter:
CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8 BACK Trainer SERVO
Following the standard conventions for model types
CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
Airplane, Glider and Helicopter when assigning con-
CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8
trol functions.
CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND
Channel Function CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF

1 Motor/airbrake or pitch CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE

Since the trainer system programming an operable Press
CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
2 Aileron or Roll PUPIL transmitter will not be connected to a TEACH
3 Elevator or Nick transmitter, the transmitter will react with acoustical The value field shows ON in both displays:
4 Rudder or Yaw alarms to switches connected during the switch as-
BACK Trainer SERVO
signment. A warning message flashes every second
CH 1. TEACH CH 7. TEACH CTL
at the top left in the transmitter’s main display. Open
CH 2. TEACH CH 8. TEACH NULL
the switch that has just been assigned.
CH 3. TEACH CH 9. TEACH BIND
Select by pressing the control function inputs 1 to 12 Binding PUPIL Transmitter to TEACH Transmitter CH 4. TEACH CH 10. TEACH ON
to be transferred to the PUPIL. In the example below, CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
inputs 1 - 4 have been transferred to the pupil: Notice CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
During binding, the transmitters cannot be too far
BACK Trainer SERVO
apart. If binding fails, bring the two transmitters BACK Trainer SERVO
CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
closer together, and restart the binding process. CH 1. PUPIL CH 7. TEACH CTL
CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH NONE
CH 2. PUPIL CH 8. TEACH SW 8
CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND Start the binding process in the PUPIL transmitter by
CH 3. PUPIL CH 9. TEACH BIND
CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH OFF pressing the value field button in the BIND column:
CH 4. PUPIL CH 10. TEACH ON
CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
BACK Trainer SERVO CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYP
CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
CH 1. TEACH CH 7. TEACH CTL CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH DSC-S
To change between teacher and pupil a trainer-switch CH 2. TEACH CH 8. TEACH NULL
The transmitters are now bound. Both transmitters
must be assigned in the CTL column value field. Re- CH 3. TEACH CH 9. TEACH BIND
can now return to the basic display  and commence
fer to the Control and Switch Assignment section CH 4. TEACH CH 10. TEACH OFF
training after a thorough check of all functions.
(page 26). CH 5. TEACH CH 11. TEACH TYPE
Press Bind has failed if only one (or neither) transmitter dis-
Using an intermittent switch, such as S8, is highly rec- CH 6. TEACH CH 12. TEACH RF
plays ON in the BIND column. Bring the two trans-
ommended so that control can be easily withdrawn
mitters closer together, and restart the binding pro-
from the trainer at any time:
cess.

Attention
BEFORE starting trainer mode for the operational
model, always make sure all functions have been
correctly transferred.
146 Function menu | general - Trainer
 000% 000%

TX RX 4.2V
Training Mode No pupilRX 05.5V
signal
000 000 000:00.0
During training, the teacher and pupil can maintain a
comfortable distance. Do not exceed a distance of 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
164 feet (50 m). No one should be between the teach- M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
er and pupil: this reduces the feedback channel range STARLET

used to connect the two transmitters. BATT TIME

000
00: 01: 23
000

While in Training Mode, the main display of the TEACH In both examples, bring both transmitters closer to-
transmitter may look like the example graphic below: gether. If does not restore the connection, immediate-
000% 000%
ly stop using the model and troubleshoot the connec-
TX RX 4.2V tion problem.
RX 05.5V
000 000 000:00.0 Restarting the Trainer Mode
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 If one of both transmitters have been turned off, the
M-1
following active warning will appear in the TEACH
000 000
PHASE 1
STARLET
transmitter once the transmitter(s) is turned on:
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 000% 000%
000 000
TX RX Warning
The  PUPIL transmitter may look like the example 4.2V
RX 00.0V
graphic below:
Thr.HOLD
000 000 000:00.0
Thr.CUT

Thr.-POS PHASE
000% 000%
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
TEACHER SIGNAL
4.2V M-1 000 000
Please select RF ON/OFF PHASE 1
000 000 000:00.0 STARLET
ON OFF
BATT TIME00: 01: 23
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 000 000

M-1 000 000

PHASE 1 The following active warning will appear in the PUPIL
PUPIL transmitter once the transmitter(s) is turned on:
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 000% 000%
000 000
Warning
If connection between TEACH and PUPIL transmit- 4.2V

ters is lost during training, the TEACH transmitter au-

Thr.HOLD
000 000 000:00.0
Thr.CUT

Thr.POS PHASE
tomatically assumes control of the model. 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
PUPIL SIGNAL
If connection is lost and the trainer-switch is in the M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
PLEASE select RF ON/OFF
pupil position, acoustic warnings sound, and a warn- SCHÜLER
ON OFF
ing message flashes every second at the top left of BATT TIME00: 01: 23
000 000
the display:
Pressing the  ON  button confirms the Trainer Mode is
active. Pressing  OFF  stops the training mode.

Function menu | general - Trainer 147

 Logical Switch
Logical Switch Setup
This function allows two switches, controls and/or log-
ical switches (or any combination thereof) to be inter-
connected in an AND or OR switch. Logical switches
activate when certain conditions are met: two switch
conditions must be met to activate an AND switch;
conversely, functions can activate an OR switch if one
of two conditions are met.
The result of a logical switch is that it can be used as AND / OR
alternative switch function. The ON/OFF column in Changing the switch connection between   AND 
the display shows when the switch function has been and  OR  can be done by pressing the button in the
activated. center column of the display for the appropriate logi-
cal switch line:
Programming
Assigning the required switch for a logical connection BACK Logical sw

To setup a logical switch, from the main display press is performed with both value fields on one line. Press Logical switches

the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up the left value field of the appropriate line to assign L1 SW 6 OR SW 3 OFF NEXT

the FUNCTION submenu screen: switches. In the example below, switches S6 and S3 L2 NULL AND
Press
NULL OFF

000% 000%
need to be assigned to L1: L3 NULL AND NULL OFF
L4 NULL AND NULL OFF
4.2V BACK Logical sw

000 000 000:00.0 Logical switches

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
L1 NULL AND NULL OFF NEXT • AND
L2 NULL AND NULL OFF
M-1 000 000 Press
Press
A logical switch is activated only when both
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1
L3 NULL AND NULL OFF switches are activated.
L4 NULL AND NULL OFF
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
• OR
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the A logical switch is activated when one of the two
Logical sw icon: An active window appears: assigned switches activated.
The actual switch position of the logical switches is
BACK Logical sw
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM displayed in the right column:
Logical switches
Select
L1 NULL UND NULL OFF NEXT BACK Logical sw
NO
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer L2 NULL UND NULL OFF Logical switches
CLR
L3 NULL UND NULL OFF L1 SW 6 AND SW 3 OFF NEXT
Logical sw Sequence
LOGIC
L4 NULL AND NULL OFF L2 NULL AND NULL OFF

Press L3 NULL AND NULL OFF

L4 NULL AND NULL OFF
A total amount of 8 logical switches, L1 - L8, can be Press  NO  to terminate the procedure.
programmed: Assign a switch following the instructions in the Con-
trol and Switch Assignment section (page 26): BACK Logical sw
BACK Logical sw
BACK Logical sw Logical switches
Logical switches
Logical switches L1 SW 6 AND SW 3 ON NEXT
L1 NULL AND NULL OFF NEXT
L1 SW 6 AND SW 3 OFF NEXT L2 NULL AND NULL OFF
L2 NULL AND NULL OFF
L2 NULL AND NULL OFF L3 NULL AND NULL OFF
L3 NULL AND NULL OFF
L3 NULL AND NULL OFF L4 NULL AND NULL OFF
L4 NULL AND NULL OFF
L4 NULL AND NULL OFF

148 Function menu | general - Logical switches

Once the parameters are established in the FUNC-
TION submenu Logical sw display, assign the logical
switches to a switch. In many submenus there is a
CTL option. By pressing any CTL field the following
active window will appear:
Select

NO
Press
CLR
LOGIC

Pressing the  LOGIC  button will bring up the logical

switch menu:
BACK
Select logical switch
L1 L2 L3 L4
L5 L6 L7 L8
L1i L2i L3i L4i
L5i L6i L7i L8i

Press the logical switch to assign to the related value

field.

Tip
Selecting an inverted switch, e.g. "L3i" instead of "L3",
note that only the switch direction of this specific switch
will be reversed and not the logical switch itself!
If a specific “L” switch activates a function (i.e. a timer),
the “i” (inverted) setting will activate the function regard-
less whether the switch is in the ON or OFF position.
Therefore, a possible use-case scenario might include
using the same switch to activate one function while de-
activating another function and vice versa.

Function menu | general - Logical switches 149

 Sequencer
Logical Switch Setup
A sequence allows up to three servos to perform up to Through the Sequence display, one common switch • Activation / Deactivation
nine steps during a 30-second period. For example, can be assigned to activate up to three servos per- The control channels specifically required for the
sequencing can allow the cover doors to open while forming up to 9 precisely determined steps within 30 channel sequencing are activated and deactivat-
folding landing gear descends the fuselage, then close seconds. ed by pressing the  INH  buttons next to the chan-
again when the landing gear leg has extended. Alter- nel fields to change to  ON  and vice versa. In the
Selection and Control Channel Activation
natively, sequencing can allow the canopy to open, example below, all channels have been changed
the pilot turn his head and wave his hand. All of these • Channel Selection to ON:
actions must first be divided into a logical sequence The three pre-set channels CH9, CH10 and CH11
BACK Sequence SERVO
of single movements. can be changed by pressing the value field:
CH6 ON CH7 ON CH8 ON
To set a sequence, from the main display press the BACK Sequence SERVO STEP
FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up the CH9 INH CH10 INH CH11 INH 0 INC
FUNCTION submenu screen: STEP CTL RES
000% 000% Press
0 INC NULL DEC
4.2V
CTL RES TIME 00.0s POS 000
000 000 000:00.0 NULL DEC

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 TIME 00.0s POS 000

Notice
Press
M-1
All control functions activated in the FUNC-
000 000
PHASE 1 The field highlights blue. Press the  INC  or  DEC 
MODELLNAME 1
button or the arrow keys ( pq ) to scroll through TION submenu Sequence are unavailable for
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 the available channels (5 - 12). In the example be- other uses.
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the Se- low, the default CH9 field is changed to CH6:
quence icon: BACK Sequencer SERVO
Sequencing
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM CH6 INH CH10 INH CH11 INH • STEP 0: Setting the Output Position
STEP The output position can be activated in one of two
0 INC ways. Press any channel field to highlight the but-
Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Trainer
CTL RES ton blue. The corresponding output position line
NULL DEC highlights green. Or, press any output position
Logical sw Sequence
TIME 00.0s POS 000 line to highlight green. The corresponding channel
Press field button highlights blue:
Use the same procedure with the other channel
BACK Sequence SERVO
value fields.
BACK Sequence SERVO CH6 ON CH7 ON CH8 ON
CH10 INH CH11 INH
Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
CH9 INH STEP
back to the default. Press
STEP 0 INC
0 INC CTL RES
CTL RES Press NULL DEC
NULL DEC TIME 00.0s POS 000
TIME 00.0s POS 000

150 Function menu | general - Sequencer

 BACK Sequence SERVO
Repeat the process for the other two channels. example below, the time delay is set for 4.5s. The
CH6 ON CH7 ON CH8 ON Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value vertical line, representing the time flow, moves to
STEP back to the default. the right while the angled lines, representing the
INC • STEP 1: First Result flow of the servo positions, are displayed between
0
the time points "0" and "1":
CTL RES After setting the output positions a time lapse must
NULL DEC be set before the desired action does or does not BACK Sequence SERVO
TIME 00.0s POS 000 occur. CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON
Press to highlight the  STEP  button at the right of STEP
Press the  POS  button at the bottom right of the the display: 1 INC
display: CTL RES
BACK Sequence SERVO
BACK Sequence SERVO NULL DEC
CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8
Press
ON
CH6 ON CH7 ON CH8 ON TIME 04.5s POS 000
STEP
STEP
INC
0 INC After the first time lapse, set the desired servo out-
0
CTL RES put positions (as described in STEP 0), or leave the
CTL RES
Press NULL DEC servo(s) in the previous sequence position:
NULL DEC
TIME 00.0s POS +067
TIME 00.0s POS 000 BACK Sequence SERVO

Press the  INC  button or the up arrow key ( p ) in- CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON

The field highlights blue: crease the STEP value by 1: STEP

BACK Sequence SERVO BACK Sequence SERVO 1 INC

CH9 ON CH10 ON CH11 ON CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON CTL RES

STEP STEP NULL DEC

0 INC 1 INC TIME 04.5s POS +050

CTL RES CTL RES
NULL DEC
• STEP 2 through 9:
NULL DEC
TIME 00.0s POS 000
Repeat the previous steps to continue the se-
TIME 00.0s POS 000
quence until the servos target position has been
Press the  INC  or  DEC  button or the arrow keys ( Press to highlight the TIME value field: reached:
pq ) to increase or decrease the value. In the ex-
BACK Sequence SERVO BACK Sequence SERVO
ample below, the POS needs to be increased +67:
CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON
BACK Sequence SERVO STEP STEP
CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON 1 INC 6 INC
STEP CTL RES CTL RES
Press
0 INC NULL DEC NULL DEC
CTL RES TIME 00.0s POS 000 TIME 23.0s POS +100
NULL DEC
TIME 00.0s POS +067 Press the  INC  or  DEC  button or the arrow keys
( pq ) to increase or decrease the value. In the
The setting range is ±100.
Function menu | general - Sequencer 151
 Notice Switch Assignment action on those controls may lead to process
The sequencing examples shown are for To assign an activation switch to the completed se- malfunction.
demonstration purposes only and do not rep- quence, follow the instructions in the Control and • Make sure that the servos do not strike any-
resent real servo sequence movements. Switch Assignment section (page 26): thing when preparing and setting a sequenc-
er. Use the BASE submenu E.P.A (page 62)
BACK Sequence SERVO
for fine-tuning these end-point adjustments.
CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON
Select
STEP
NO
6 INC
CLR
CTL RES
LOGIC
NULL DEC
TIME 23.0s POS +100

Use the switch to change between the output and the

target positions of the servos. In the example below,
S6 is assigned in the CTL column:
BACK Sequence SERVO
CH 6 ON CH 7 ON CH 8 ON
STEP
6 INC
CTL RES
SW 6 DEC
TIMER 23.0s POS +100

When the switch is in the CLOSED position, the se-

lected servos sequence movement can be followed
in the servo monitor. Bring up the servo monitor in
one of three ways: pressing the   SERVO  button in
the upper right corner of the display, by simultane-
ously pushing both arrow keys ( pq ), or by pressing
the BASE submenu Servo icon. When the switch is
OPEN, all the movements will be reversed.

Notices
• The POS value field input settings are overlap-
ping the common control signals. Before pro-
gramming a sequencer in the BASE submenu
Servo, carefully check that none of the chan-
nels involved in the planned sequence are as-
signed to any transmitter control element. The
152 Function menu | general - Sequencer
 Common Function Menus Helicopter Model Function Menus 

Personal notes 153

 PIT.CRV
Phase-Specific Pitch Control Curve Setup
Use this function to set adjustments to the pitch of he- set position Pitch min BACK to Pitch min FOR- the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
licopter blades at certain stick positions. For exam- WARD, and vice versa. Press the  BACK  or  FOR- phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
ple, when the control stick is all the way forward with WARD  button in the Pitch min line: 1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
the intent for the helicopter to quickly fly straight up, Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
the curve should be programmed for maximum pitch refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
Pitch min BACK TRIM
on the blades. Conversely, when the helicopter is shut 120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
CURVE OFF
down for a stop, the curve should be programmed for Press
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
IN –100% INC
little or no pitch on the blades. corresponding switch(es).
OUT –100%
To adjust these settings, from the main display press Pitch Curve Setting
POINT L –100% DEC
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up
the FUNCTION submenu screen:
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT Use this display to adapt the pitch curve as needed,
and assign to different phases if necessary:
000% 000%
An active warning message appears:
4.2V BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
000 000 000:00.0 TRIM
Pitch min FORWARD TRIM
Pitch min BACK
Curve OFF
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 KURVE AUS
Warning
IN –100% INC
Press
M-3 000 000 EIN –100%
SURE? INC
PHASE 1 OUT –100%
Starlet AUS –100%
YES NO
POINT L –100% DEC
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 POINT L –100% DEC
000 000 ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the PIT.
CRV icon: Press   NO  to terminate the procedure. Press   YES  Notice
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
to confirm, and the pitch control stick travel direction The example graphs represent the curve charac-
changes: teristics directly, independent from the actual di-
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO rection selected on the pitch control stick.
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

Pitch min FORWARD TRIM

The pitch control curve can be specified by up to 7
Press Curve OFF
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX
points (termed “support points”) along the entire con-
IN –100% INC
trol stick travel.
OUT –100%
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
During initial setup, fewer support points are required
POINT L –100% DEC
A curve mixer is available in every flight phase for to set a pitch curve. However, it is recommended to
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
pitch curve settings. However, linear mixers cannot start with at least three support points.
be programmed for actions analog to the control stick Inverted control signals act on the following: mixed These three endpoints describe the linear character-
travels. and coupling functions and the throttle position active istic of a pitch control curve: the two endpoints Pitch
Pitch min Line Power OFF time. low (L = -100% control travel) and Pitch high (H =
+100% control travel) and the control (placed in the
In the mz-24 Pro, the helicopter program defaults the Phase-dependent settings of the pitch curves
center).
"rear" throttle to the Pitch min position. This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
This option allows users to easily reverse the pitch ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
control stick control direction from the standard pre- in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
154 Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve
Basic Operating Steps BACK PHASE 1 PIT>>TAIL SERVO
point to be deleted. The support point will turn red
and its number and associated value will appear in
•  ST OFF  or  ST ON  Button Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM
the POINT line. Press the  ENT  button to remove
Touch this button to turn on or off the graphic and Curve OFF
the point:
numeric display of the control stick position. IN +050% INC
SERVO
When ST ON on is selected and the control ele- OFF +050% Press
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV

ments (throttle/pitch control stick) is moved, a ver- POINT ? 000% DEC Pitch min FORWARD TRIM

tical green line moves synchronously in the graph ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT KURVE OFF

between the two endpoints L and H. The control IN 000% INC

When the control stick is moved and the green line
stick position is also displayed numerically in the OUT 000%
moves off the green point, the point will turn red, Press
IN line (-100 % to +100 %). The intersection of this POINT 2 000% DEC
the ? is replaced with a number, and the point val-
line with the curve is identified as OUT and can be ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
ue appears in the value field to the right of the sup-
varied at the support points between -125% and
port point number: The red point disappears:
+125%. Control signals changed in this way affect
all of the subsequent mixing and coupling func- BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
tions. Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM Pitch min FORWARD TRIM
In the example below, the control stick is exact- Curve OFF CURVE OFF
ly halfway between the middle and end of its path, ON +050% INC IN 000% INC
at +50% of the control path, and generates an out- OFF +050% OUT 000%
put signal that is also +50% due to the linear char- POINT 1 +050% DEC POINT ? 000% DEC
acteristic: ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

BACK PHASE 1 PITCHK SERVO The 5 support points between the L and H end-
Changing the Support Point Value
Pitch min. FORWARD TRIM points can be created in any order; support points
Curve OFF are automatically renumbered sequentially from •  X-axis  Button (X-axis)
IN +050% INC left to right after points are set or deleted. In the Activate this function, press to highlight the button
OUT +050% example below, the red point at left near the L end- at the bottom edge of the display.
POINT ? 000% DEC point is now considered Point 1: Move the active (red) point to the right by pressing
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
the  INC  button or to the left with the  DEC  but-
ton, as shown below:
Between the two endpoints L and H, up to 5 ad- Pitch min FORWARD TRIM

ditional support points can be set, though the dis- Curve OFF BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO

tance between support points may not be less IN –050% INC Pitch min FORWARD TRIM
than 25%. OUT –050% CURVE OFF
DEC INC
•  ENT  Button POINT 1 –050% IN –036%
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT OUT 000%
Move the control stick. Support points can be set
POINT 2 000% DEC
by touching the  ENT  button whenever a question
mark ? shows in the POINT line. A green point ap- Deleting a Support Point ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

pears at the intersection of the yellow and green To remove a set support point, move the control Press the  X-axis  button again to deactivate the
lines: stick until the vertical green line aligns with the function.
Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve 155
 Notices Rounding off the throttle curve Press the   TRIM  button at the top right edge of
• Moving the red point  horizontally away • CURVE Line  ON/OFF  Button the display:
from the current control position will cause Curve profiles are angeled by default. Automati- BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
the point to become  green after a short cally round off the lines by turning ON the round- TRIM
Pitch min FORWARD
while, and a ? will appear in the Point line. ing function in the CURVE line: CURVE ON
This question mark does not relate to the Press
INC
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO IN –036%
point which has been moved, rather, it in-
TRIM OUT +027%
dicates that another point can be set at the Pitch min FORWARD
CURVE OFF POINT 2 +027% DEC
current control position.
IN –036% INC ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
• Remember that the percentages in the in- Press
OUT +027%
put (IN) and output (OUT) line always refer To open the trim setting screen:
POINT 2 +027% DEC
to the temporary position of the control BACK SERVO
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
stick and not to the position of the point. CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
• Y-axis Button (Y-axis) The angled curve lines are rounded: NONE NONE L 1
NONE NONE L 1
Activate this function, press to highlight the button BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO INC
NONE NONE L 1
at the bottom edge of the display. Pitch min FORWARD TRIM RES
NONE NONE L 1
Move the active (red) point up by pressing the  INC  CURVE ON
NONE NONE L 1
DEC
button or down with the  DEC  button, as shown IN –036% INC NONE NONE L 1
below: OUT +027%
POINT 2 +027% DEC Basic Operating Steps
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
Pitch min FORWARD TRIM • CTL Column
CURVE OFF In the CTL column of the menu, select a suitable
IN –036% INC Notice control from the controls offered by pressing the
OUT +027% The curves shown above are only for demon- value field in the appropriate row. In the example
POINT 2 +027% DEC stration purposes and do not represent actual below, the first line needs to be set:
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
throttle curves.
BACK SERVO
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
Press the  Y-axis  button again to deactivate the Additional Functions NONE NONE L 1
function.
•  TRIM  Button NONE NONE L 1 INC
Press
NONE NONE L 1
Notice The mz-24 Pro has a function integrated in the RES
NONE NONE L 1
Remember that the percentages in the input helicopter program that allows trimming up to DEC
NONE NONE L 1
(IN) and output (OUT) line always refer to the six throttle curve and pitch curve support points NONE NONE L 1
momentary position of the control stick and during flight.
not to the position of the point.

156 Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve

 The following appears in the display: BACK SERVO
Notice
BACK SERVO CTL MIXER POINT PHASE The associated controller does not have any
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE SL 1 THR.CRV NONE 1 effect if an undefined point is selected (in the
NONE NONE L 1 NONE NONE NONE 1 INC basic version of the relevant curve mixers,
NONE NONE
Select
KEIN 1 INC
NONE NONE NONE 1
RES
only the points L and H are set).
NONE NONE NO
KEIN 1 NONE NONE NONE 1
RES DEC
NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE CLR
KEIN 1 • PHASE Column
DEC NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE L 1
The PHASE column allows users to assign the
NONE NONE L 1
Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value phase in which the governor should be active. The
To assign a switch, move the desired control, or back to the default. number in the value field refers to the phase num-
press NO to cancel and CLR to return the field • POINT Column ber that can be found in the FUNCTION submenu
value to NONE. In the example below, the right In the POINT column allows users to specify the Phase.
proportional rotary control SL1 is assigned: support point(s) of the related mixer to be trimmed. To select another phase than default Phase1, press
To select a point, press to highlight the value field to highlight the value field in the appropriate row.
BACK SERVO
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE in the appropriate row. In the example below the In the example below the first line needs to be set:
SL 1 NONE NONE L first line needs to be set: BACK SERVO
NONE NONE NONE L CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
INC BACK SERVO
NONE NONE NONE L SL 1 THR.CRV 3 1
RES CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
NONE NONE NONE L NONE NONE NONE 1
DEC SL 1 THR.CRV NONE 1 INC
NONE NONE NONE L NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE NONE L NONE NONE NONE 1 RES
INC NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE NONE 1 DEC
RES NONE NONE NONE 1
• MIXER Column NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE NONE 1
DEC
NONE NONE NONE 1
The MIXER column allows users to select individ-
ual helicopter mixers, or one of the two available
NONE NONE NONE 1 Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
mixers in any combination. Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys ( pq ) to increase/decrease the values:
To select a mixer, press to highlight the value field ( pq ) to increase/decrease the values: BACK SERVO
in the appropriate row. In the example below the CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
BACK SERVO
first line needs to be set: SL 1 THR.CRV 3 2
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE
NONE NONE NONE 1
SL 1 THR.CRV 3 1 INC
BACK SERVO
NONE NONE NONE 1
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE NONE NONE NONE 1 RES
INC NONE NONE NONE 1
SL 1 NONE NONE 1 NONE NONE NONE 1 DEC
RES NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE NONE 1 NONE NONE NONE 1
INC DEC NONE NONE NONE 1
NONE NONE NONE 1 NONE NONE NONE 1
RES
NONE NONE NONE 1 NONE NONE NONE 1 Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
DEC
NONE NONE NONE 1 back to the default.
NONE NONE NONE 1
Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys (
pq ) to increase/decrease the values:

Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve 157

 Autorotation Setting

Notice In a powered flight, the maximum wing angle is lim- Approach angle

When selecting a phase that has not been de- ited by the available motor output; in autorotation
fined, by default only Phase 1 is active and the flight, however,  it is limited by the stall at  the main in strong
wind

associated controller will not have any effect. rotor blades. To provide sufficient lift (even while the in moderate
wind

speed is decreasing when flaring the helicopter), the no wind

To save and exit, press the BACK button at the top maximum pitch needs to be set.
left of the display to return to the Pitch curve menu:
75°
Switch to the autorotation phase, and move the green Approach angle under different 45°
60°

BACK SERVO vertical line to the H point with the control stick. Set a wind conditions.
CTL MIXER POINT PHASE value that is about 10% to 20% higher than the nor- The pitch control stick is not necessarily in the bottom
Press
SL 1 THR.CRV 3 2 mal maximum pitch. At the very beginning do not set position during autorotation. Typically, it is between
NONE NONE NONE 1 INC
a value that is significantly higher than normal flight hovering position and the bottom stop so that the lon-
NONE NONE NONE 1
RES
since of the behavior of the pitch control will be signifi- gitudinal inclination can be corrected using the eleva-
NONE NONE NONE 1
DEC
cantly different after switching, in comparison to the tion control.
NONE NONE NONE 1
usual reaction. The danger exists of over-controlling Shorten the approach by carefully pulling back on the
NONE NONE NONE 1
after flaring with the model continuing to rise; then elevation control and sensitively reducing the pitch,
high above the ground the motor speed will suddenly or extending the approach by pushing the elevation
Notice decrease and the model will drop. After a few test control forward and carefully increasing the pitch.
The settings in the Pitch Curve submenu  affect autorotations, the value can always be readjusted.
the same settings in the Throttle Curve submenu The minimum pitch can be different from that for nor- To exit the PIT.CRV menu, press the BACK button at
(page 160). Changes made to either section al- mal flight, depending on conventional control practice the top right of the display:
ways affects the other. during normal flight. Set a minimum pitch for the L
BACK PHASE 1 PIT.CRV SERVO
point for autorotation that will allow the model to be
brought into a descent of approximately 60-70° out Pitch min FORWARD
Press
TRIM

of a forward flight path at an average speed when the CURVE ON

pitch is reduced to a minimum. If such a setting is IN –036% INC

used in normal flight like most of helicopter pilots, the OUT +027%

value can be easily transferred. POINT 2 +027% DEC

If the model’s descent is normally at a flatter angle, ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT

increase the value at the L point and vice versa.

The FUNCTION submenu screen appears:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX

Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence

158 Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve

Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch curve 159
 THR.CRV
Phase-Specific Throttle Control Curve Setting
Use this throttle curve function to program specific Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, and the control (center) point. This synchronizes the
throttle output settings to specific throttle stick set- refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page motor performance curve with the pitch curve.
tings. Since throttle settings affect the motor speed, 120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
Gas Motor / Electric Drive Helicopters With
the throttle curve must be set in conjunction with the different switch. To change the phases, activate the
Speed Controller
pitch curve to provide sufficient power to keep a con- corresponding switch(es).
sistent head speed.
Tips Notice
To adjust these settings, from the main display press
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up • The Throttle setting for the autorotation phase is Refer to the Helicopters with Governor section
the FUNCTION submenu screen: described in the FUNCTION submenu THR.HOLD (page 161) for appropriate throttle curve adjust-
000% 000%
(page 170). ment to helicopters equipped with a governor.
• If the THR.Limit (page 94) has been activated in
4.2V
This setting only refers to the control curve for the
000:00.0 the BASE submenu CTL Set by assigning a switch
000 000 throttle servo or the speed controller.
control, the previously assigned numerical value is
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 displayed in the THR.Limit line. • The control curve should be set so that the carbu-
M-3 000 000 Press rettor is completely open when the throttle/pitch
PHASE 1
Starlet control stick is in end position, or the actuator of
Throttle Curve
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 an electric helicopter is fully enabled (with the ex-
000 000
The throttle control curve can be specified by up to 7 ception of autorotation flight).
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the points (termed “support points”) along the entire con-
• For the hovering point (normally in the center of
THR.CRV icon: trol stick travel:
the control), the carburettor setting or performance
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO control of the motor control unit needs to be coor-
THR.Limit OFF TRIM dinated with the pitch curve to produce the desired
CURVE OFF system speed.
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
IN –100% INC • At the minimum position of the throttle/pitch con-
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit
Press
S.MIX THR.MIX
OUT –100% trol stick, initially set the throttle curve so that a
POINT L 000% DEC gas motor runs significantly faster in comparison
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT to idling, and the clutch engages reliably.
A curve mixer is available in every flight phase for During initial setup, fewer support points are required Notice
pitch curve settings. However, linear mixers cannot to set a throttle curve. However, it is recommended to Both gas engines and electric motors are stopped
be programmed for actions analog to the control stick start with at least three support points. using the THR.Limit within the phase.
travels. These three endpoints describe the linear characteris-
Phase-Dependent Settings of the Throttle Curve tic of a throttle control curve: the two endpoints Throt- It is unnecessary to program two phases, "with
tle low (L = -100% control travel) and Throttle high (H throttle preset" and "without throttle preset" to phase
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- = +100% control travel) and the control (placed in the a gas preset,  as is sometimes used in other remote
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed center). control systems. The mz-24 Pro transmitter allows
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to the system speed to be increased below the hover-
Support points can be set, changed and deleted in
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the ing point much more flexibly and sensitively with the
the same manner as described in the previous sec-
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE THR.Limit than by using a gas preset.
tion, PIT.CRV (page 154). First specify the throttle
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
curve using three points: the two end points L and H,
160 Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve
To start the gas motor, make sure that the THR.Limit Notices The Travel setting of the throttle limiter may
is closed, i.e. the carburetor can only be adjusted by • Use the Throttle Limit Function (page 94) have to be adapted in each phase by chang-
trimming its idle position. Refer to the Safety Instruc- of the BASE submenu CTL Set. The throt- ing the value in the CH12 line of the FUNC-
tions section (page 165) for additional information. tle servo is normally completely separate from TION submenu D/R,Exp.
If the throttle is set too high when the transmitter is the throttle curve at the left-stop of the pro- The throttle curve should be adapted in the
turned on, the RF module remains off and an active portional dial DV1 (throttle limiter); the motor same manner as with a gas helicopter in flight.
warning box will appear along with an acoustic warn- is idling and only reacts to CH1 trimming. This
ing. option allows you to start the motor from any Tip
000% 000%
phase and turn it off using digital trimming. In order to measure the flight time of a (gas) helicopter,
TX RX Warning
4.2V
After starting the motor, slowly turn the throt- assign a control switch to the throttle limit servo and use
RX 00.0V
Thr.HOLD
000
Thr.CUT
000 000:00.0 tle limiter to the opposite right-stop  in order it to start/stop a Timer (page 74).
Thr.POS
mz
PHASE
to completely actuate the throttle servo using
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-1
RC Signal
000 000
the throttle/pitch  control stick. To keep the Helicopters with Governor
Please Select RF ON/OFF PHASE 1 throttle servo from being limited by the throttle
MODELLNAME 1 In contrast to speed controllers that only regulate
BATT TIME
ON
00: 01: 23
OFF limiter in the full throttle direction, use CH12 performance like a carburetor, governors maintain a
000 000
in the FUNCTION submenu D/R,EXP to set constant speed in the system that they are monitor-
The following three diagrams  show typical  3-point the control travel value on the Travel+ column ing by independently regulating the provided output.
throttle curves for different phases  such as hover- according to each phase to +125 %: With gas helicopters, the control independently con-
ing, aerobatics and 3-D flight. trols the throttle servo like the motor control unit of an
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
Example Throttle Curves  for Different Phases: electric helicopter. Therefore, governors only require
CH 9. NONE 0% +100% +100% NEXT a speed setting and not a classic throttle curve. A de-
CH 10. NONE 0% +100% +100% INC viation from the set speed occurs when the required
CH 11. NONE 0% +100% +100% RES
output exceeds the maximum available output.
Output

Output
Output

CH 12. NONE 0% +100% +125% DEC Normally, receiver output 8 is used for connecting a
CTL OFFSET – Travel +
governor. Refer to Receiver Configuration - Heli-
copter Models (page 31) for additional information.
Control travel Control travel Control travel
Hover Aerobatics 3D • Since electric drives do not require an idle Do not use the gas throttle limiter on output 8, since it
setting,  when  making the basic settings for exclusively acts via the Throttle Curve mixer on out-
an electric helicopter, ensure that the control put 6, which is not assigned.
range of the throttle limiter  reliably  exceeds In order to take advantage of the comfort and safety
or falls below the setting range of the motor features of the throttle limiter, connect the governor
control unit, normally extending from -100%  to receiver output 6 (this is different from the general
to +100%. connecting strategy). Only adapt the throttle curve so
that it can assume the task of a normal servo.

Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve 161

Since the throttle curve only determines the target Notice Notice
speed of the motor control unit, and this target speed If the throttle curve is used to control a governor, The hovering point should always be in the center
normally remains constant over the entire pitch ad- all the mixers programmed in the FUNCTION position of the throttle/pitch control stick. In spe-
justment range, set a horizontal line in the FUNCTION submenu THR.MIX (page 176) must be left cial cases, for example for 3-D flight, deviating
submenu THR.CRV. Each input value (pitch) results on  INH . hovering points can be programmed: a point for the nor-
in the same output value (throttle) whose level deter- mal flight position above the center, and a point for in-
mines the target speed. Throttle/Pitch Curve Adjustment verted flight below the center.
To set the horizontal line, delete any previously set
The most important setting for helicopters is the co-
support points (1 - 5). Then set the support points Throttle Curve Idle Setting
ordination of throttle and pitch (i.e., the performance
L (input = 0%) and H (input = +100%) to the same
curve of the motor with collective blade adjustment).
value, as shown below: Notice
The mz-24 Pro transmitter allows the throttle, pitch
BACK PHASE 1 THR.CRV SERVO and torque compensating curves to be independently Electric drives  do not require an idle setting,
THR.Limit OFF TRIM adjusted. Throttle and pitch control are always acti- therefore, an idle adjustment is unnecessary with
Curve OFF vated by separate servos activated together by the this type of drive. However, the synchronization
INC throttle/pitch control stick (except in the autorotation of the throttle and pitch curve(s) described here is similar
IN +100%
phase). The helicopter program automatically couples to gas helicopters.
OUT +075%
POINT H +075% DEC the servos. The trim lever for Control Function 1 acts
The Idle Setting (page 95), is done exclusively when
ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT only on the throttle servo.
the throttle limiter is closed. It is normally performed
These curves can be specified by up to 7 points with the trim control of the CH1 function (and in spe-
The value to be set depends on the governor that is (termed “support points”) along the entire control
used as well as the desired target speed. This can be cial cases in conjunction with the throttle limiter).
stick travel. During initial setup, fewer support points
varied for specific phases. Programming a corresponding value at the L point of
are required to set a pitch curve. However, it is rec-
the throttle curve adjusts the descent speed of the
Tip ommended to start with at least three support points.
motor without influencing the hovering setting.
After setting up a programmable mixer, the implement- These three endpoints describe the linear character-
For example, use the phase programming to set dif-
ed governor function can be trimmed phase specifically. istic of a pitch control curve: the two endpoints Pitch
ferent throttle curves. This higher system speed below
Press one of the two digital-trim buttons (D.TRIM) within low (L = -100% control travel) and Pitch high (H =
the hovering point is useful for fast, steep landing ap-
a maximum of ±37,5 %. Refer to the Programming +100% control travel) and the control (placed in the
proaches when the pitch is very low. It is also useful
Example (page 233). This options allows phase-specif- center).
in performing aerobatics.
ic governor trim to be corrected using only one control Before adjusting the throttle and pitch function,  all
element. servo linkage must first be mechanically pre-adjust-
ed according to the helicopter's adjusting instructions.

The figure shows a curve with a throttle

position that changes slightly below the
hovering point in the control center. Control travel

162 Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve

Different phase-dependent throttle curves are pro-
grammed for optimum hovering and aerobatics ad-
justment:
• A lower system speed with smooth, soft control
reactions and less noise while hovering.
• A higher rotor speed for aerobatics at the maximum
motor output. In this case, the throttle curve also
needs to be adapted within the hovering range.
Basic Settings
Although the pitch and throttle curves in the mz-24
Pro can be electronically adjusted over a wide range,
all linkages in the model must be mechanically adjust-
ed according to the helicopter instructions. Seek ad-
vise from a flying club or experienced helicopter pilots
for help adjusting the basic settings.
For gas-powered models, the carburetor control must
be adjusted so that the throttle is completely open at
the maximum pitch position. When the throttle limit-
er is closed, the carburetor must be able to be com-
pletely closed with the CH1 trim control, and the servo
may not mechanically over-travel.
For electric models, the motor control unit must be
adjusted so that the throttle is at full power at the
maximum pitch position. When the throttle limiter is
closed, the motor control unit must reliably turn off the
electric power.
Adjust these settings very carefully by simultaneously
adapting the control linkage and/or changing the ar-
ticulation point on the servo or carburettor arm. Only
electronically fine-tune the throttle servo after these
functions are set.
CAUTION 2. The model lifts off before the pitch control stick
Before starting the motor the first time, reaches center position:
! become familiar with the dangers and
safety precautions involved in handling 
a) The speed is too high
Solution:  Reduce the carburetor
motors and helicopters. opening by reducing the value of
Output
point 1 in the THR.CRV display.
Hovering
point
After these basic settings are made, start the motor
according to the motor operating instructions. Adjust Control travel
the idling using the trim control of the throttle/pitch
b) The speed is too low
control stick. Set idling positions are displayed in the
Solution:  Reduce the rotor
transmitter's main menu display by a horizontal bar blades pitch angle by reducing the
Output
correlating to the CH1 trim control position. value of point 1 in the  PIT.CRV Hovering
point
display.
Hover Settings
The model should lift off the ground and hover at the Control travel
set speed when the pitch control stick is in the center
position. If not, troubleshoot as follows: Notice
1. The model lifts off when the pitch control stick Keep adjusting until the model hovers at the right
is past center position: speed  when the throttle/pitch control stick is in
a) The speed is too low
center position. All the other model parameter
Solution: Increase the value of
adjustments depend on this being perfectly aligned.
Hovering
point 1 in the THR.CRV display. point
Output
Standard Adjustments
Standard adjustments are made to allow the model to
Control travel hover and perform roundtrips in all phases at a con-
b) The speed is too high
stant speed. Do not attempt to make standard adjust-
Solution: Increase the pitch angle
ments until the Hover Settings are perfectly aligned
so the model hovers at the provided speed in normal
Hovering
of the rotor blades by increasing point
Output
the value of point 1 in the PIT.CRV flight when the throttle/pitch control stick is in center
display. position.
Control travel Adjustments for Climbing
By combining the throttle/hovering setting (the pitch
setting for the hovering point and the maximum pitch
position of point H), users easily achieve a constant
speed from hovering to maximum climb.
First, perform a slow vertical climbing flight by moving
the pitch control stick to the end position. The motor
Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve 163
speed should remain constant, matching the hover rettor is open too wide or if the speed controller is set
speed setting. too high, there is a danger that the motor will start at
If the speed decreases while climbing even though the a high speed once it is turned on, and the centrifugal

drive is at maximum output and no additional power
can be provided, reduce the maximum blade angle
while the pitch control stick is fully deflected (value
of point H). Conversely, if the speed increases while
climbing, increase the pitch angle. In the PIT.CRV
graph display, use the pitch control stick to move the
vertical line to point H and change its value.
Output
Output
This picture illustrates the change of the
hovering point, that is the minimum and
maximum pitch were left at -100 % and
+100 %.
Modify these settings until the speed remains con-
stant over the entire control travel between hovering
and climbing.
Adjustments for Descending
Descent is adjusted so that the speed remains con-
stant while the model descends from forward flight
clutch will engage immediately.
Always hold the rotor head tightly when starting.
Control travel If the motor accidentally starts when the carburettor
is open too wide, do not panic! Keep a firm grip on
the rotor head and do not let go. Immediately turn
down the throttle limiter even if there is a danger of the
drive becoming damaged since pilots are responsi-
ble for ensuring the helicopter does not move in an
uncontrollable manner.
The cost of repairing a clutch, transmission or at the

Hovering
point

This picture shows changes of the maxi-
mum pitch setting. Control travel
Place the throttle in center position to make the mod-
el hover. If the model doesn’t hover unless the pitch
control stick is above center position, slightly increas-
ing the pitch value during hovering (i.e. point 1) un-
at a great height while the pitch is completely pulled
back and. Set the minimum pitch (point L) so that the
model descends at an angle of 60-70°. In the PIT.CRV
graph display, use the pitch control stick to move the
vertical line to point L and change its value.
Hovering
motor are negligible in comparison to the injury and
damage that can arise from the rotor blades of a mod-
el helicopter flying around uncontrollably.
Make sure that  no one else is within the hazard
zone of the helicopter.
In addition, do not switch from idling to the flight
setting while the motor is operating at a high speed.
This sudden rotor speedup prematurely wears out

Output
til the model hovers when the control stick is in the point

the clutch and gearing. Additionally, the main rotor

center position. If the model doesn’t hover unless the
pitch control stick is below center position, reduce the
pitch angle.
blades (generally loosely hinged) would not smoothly
This picture shows an example of changes
follow such a sudden acceleration and will swing out
of the minimum pitch setting. Control travel

of their normal position and risk striking the tail boom.

In certain circumstances, it may be necessary to
adjust the carburetor opening at the hovering point
(point 1) of the THR.CRV display.
Once this flight response is achieved, switch to the
After starting the motor, slowly accelerate the system
THR.CRV display graph and adjust the minimum
speed with the throttle limiter.
throttle value (point L) so that the speed neither in-
creases nor decreases. The coordination of throttle
and pitch is now complete.
Safety Instructions:
Before starting the motor, make sure that the  throt-
tle limiter is completely closed so that the carburettor
only reacts to the throttle trim lever.
If the carburetor is opened too wide when the trans-
mitter is turned on, a visual and acoustic warning will
be generated and the automatic switch on of the RF
module will be blocked. This is because if the carbu-

164 Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve

Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle curve 165
 Gyro/Governor
Gyro and Governor Settings
The gyro detects any yaw movement (left or right Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, control and is zero at the opposite limit. In the pro-
swinging) of the model and automatically sends a refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page gram, pilots are free to restrict the effective range to
command to the tail rotor servo to correct and stop/ 120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a both sides by setting the control travel.
limit the movement. The gyro will not allow the heli- different switch. To change the phases, activate the Depending on the position of the control, the gyro
copter to turn until the tail rotor command is correct- corresponding switch(es). gain is as follows in response to the full deflection of
ed. the tail rotor control control stick:
Gyro Suppression Line
The governor maintains a constant speed in the sys- Momentary control position
tem being monitored by independently regulating the BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO minus
provided output and only requiring a speed setting the value of the gyro suppression.
(not a classic throttle curve). Gyro Suppression 000%
If the gyro is in the neutral position and gyro suppres-
To adjust these settings, from the main display press Gyro Gain 000% INC
sion is set, the gyro's effect is reduced from 100%
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up Governor ACT INH RES
to zero with increasing tail rotor excursion. For values
the FUNCTION submenu screen: Governor RATE 050% DEC
between 100% and a maximum of 199%, full gyro
000% 000%
suppression is achievable before full tail rotor excur-
4.2V sion depending on the control position (see figure s
000 000 000:00.0 Notice on page 166).
mz Many current standard gyro systems do not re- With the Graupner/JR-Gyro NEJ-120 BB, No. 3277,
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-3 000 000 Press quire this option to be utilized; consult the gyro both the bottom and top values are set: control 1 sets
PHASE 1
Starlet
setting instructions in the model’s manual. Using the minimum gyro gain in the bottom position of the
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
this option if it is not required may make it impossible to servo, control 2 sets the maximum effect in the top
000 000
fly the helicopter. end position of the servo. The switch between these
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the Gyr/ two values occurs approximately in the center of the
Gover icon: If the model can use a gyro system in which the gy- servo travel.
ro’s effect is set by the transmitter using an additional The gyro systems PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
channel (CH7 in the Graupner remote-control system), 3000 contrastingly feature proportional, infinitely vari-
this option can influence the effect of the gyro sensor able adjustment of gyro gain (see the following exam-
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
(gyroscope) as the tail rotor control stick is moved. ple graphs).
The gyro suppression reduces the gyro's effect in a
For example, the option to configure static or
Press
linear manner in proportion to the deflection of the tail
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX
phase-specific gyro gain gives you the opportunity to
rotor control stick corresponding to the set value. If
exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow flying,
the gyro has not been suppressed (at a value of 0%),
but reduces gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics.
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence

the gyro's effect remains independent of the control

Gyro/Governor Phase-Dependent Settings
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE 1.
(Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
166 Function menu | Helicopter model - Gyro/Gover
stick deflection.
The gyro's effect can be varied (depending on the
phase) between a minimum and maximum using a
control assigned in the OFFSET column of the BASE
submenu CTL Set. For example, pilots may assign
one of the side proportional  dials SL1 or SL2. The
maximum gyro gain occurs at the full deflection of the
Various Gyro Sample Settings
• Linear gyro suppression: 0% to 199%.
With the tail rotor control stick in the center position,
the resulting gyro gain is set using the selected con-
trol. Using a proportional rotary control, the effect is
infinitely variable between zero (min) and maximum
(max), provided that control travel is not restricted.
With full tail rotor deflection, the effective gyro gain
is as follows:
Current control position
minus
gyro suppression value.
At 0% gyro suppression, gyro gain is constant for tail
rotor control stick movement; at 50% suppression,
gyro gain is reduced to half if the assigned control is
moved to the +50% position (as shown below); and
only at >150% suppression is gain reduced to zero
with the control at this position, well before full tail
rotor deflection.
Example:
+50 %
 Gyro gain 
left centre
Stick deflection tail rotor
• Linear gyro suppression with reduced control
travel, e.g. -50% to +80% of full travel.
Gyro gain is smoothly variable within these control
limits.
For example, for purposes of illustration, below are
plotted gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor deflec-
tion for various parameter values of gyro suppres-
sion.
Example:
+80 %
 Gyro gain 
left centre
Stick deflection tail rotor
Adjusting the Gyro Sensor
To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization
for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis,
observe the following:
• The controls should have as little friction and "play"
as possible.
• There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.
transmitter
control 7
Range of
• Use a strong and fast servo.
When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, or a
corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust
takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be
moved without causing the tail of the model to start
right oscillating, and the better the model's stability on its
vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is risk that
the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro
gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will
need to be made to eliminate the oscillation.
If the model is flying forward at high speed or hovering
in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing
effect of the vertical fin combined with the gyro may
also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests
itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro
stabilization under all conditions, make use of the op-
tion to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using a
transmitter control assigned to input 7, in connection
transmitter
Range of
control 7
with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the
Gyro NEJ-120 BB.
Further tips on gyros with configurable multilevel
gyro gain (e. g. NEJ-120 BB)
Since specifying the gyro gain from the transmitter pro-
portionally via the transmitter control, the gyro's own
right
control 1 must be used to set the weaker gyro gain
(e.g. aerobatics) and control 2 must be used to set the
stronger gyro gain (e.g. hovering ). Even though a pro-
portional control is used for control function 7, only a
switch-over between these two values takes place and
the setting is therefore not proportional.
Therefore, advance control 2 to the point where the
model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm
conditions, and advance control 1 to the point where the
model does not oscillate with its tail even when flying at
maximum speed into a strong headwind. Depending on
the state of the weather and the flight program planned,
you can also switch the gyro gain from the transmitter,
possibly with gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor
deflection if required.
Gyro Gain Line
Notice
An offset value input in this option and/or in the
CH7 line of the BASE submenu CTL Set auto-
matically adds itself! For the sake of clarity, make
sure to only enter and/or change an offset value in one
of the two options.
Function menu | Helicopter model - Gyro/Gover 167
Most of the current gyro systems can be adjusted for Governor ACT Line BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO
a smooth, proportional effect. Choose between two
BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO
different modes of action in the transmitter. Gyro Suppression 000%
If the gyro has one of these options, the alternative Gyro Gain 000% INC
Gyro Suppression 000%
offset setting enables both the normal gyro gain and Governor ACT ON RES
Gyro Gain 000% INC
"heading lock mode" as well as flying with maximum Governor RATE 050% DEC
Governor ACT INH RES
stabilization in normal, slow fights within this selected
Governor RATE 050% DEC
mode, and reducing the gyro gain in fast roundtrips
and aerobatics. Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
Switching phases to enter different settings in the This option is   INH  by default, meaning the control ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
Gyro Gain line, with values between -125% and channel 8 can be used without restriction. BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO
+125%: To connect a governor to output 8, press the value
BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO field of the Governor ACT line to turn it  ON : Gyro Suppression 000%
Gyro Gain 000% INC
BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO
Gyro Suppression 000% Governor ACT ON RES
Gyro Gain 000% INC Governor RATE 067% DEC
Gyro Suppression 000%
Governor ACT INH RES Gyro Gain 000% INC
Governor RATE 050% DEC
Governor ACT ON RES
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
Governor RATE 050% DEC
back to the default.
Based on the these phase-specific settings, the gyro To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
gain can also be smoothly varied with a control in the Press the value field again to turn the option off. left of the display to return to the previous menu.
OFFSET column in the BASE submenu CTL Set.
Governor RATE Line
After you have activated the Governor ACT option by
turning it  ON , set the rotor speed to be maintained
by the governor in the Governor RATE line by adjust-
ing the percentage between 0% to 100%.
Press the value field of the line:
BACK PHASE 1 Gyr/Gover SERVO

Gyro Suppression 000%

Gyro Gain 000% INC
Press
Governor ACT ON RES
Governor RATE 050% DEC

The field highlights blue:

168 Function menu | Helicopter model - Gyro/Gover

Personal notes 169
 THR.HOLD
Autorotation Throttle Position
Throttle hold sets the throttle to a percentage of the Tip • SET line
engine idle, regardless of collective pitch stick posi- An alternative emergency-off function is located in the Use this option to move the throttle a percentage
tion. Throttle hold is used to practice autorotations, BASE submenu Thr.CUT (page 66). of its normal stick position in the event of engine
and as a safety measure in case of engine failure. failure or deliberate engine cut-off.
To adjust these settings, from the main display press • ACT Line The green arrow (left of bar graph) indicates the
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up Once a switch is assigned to this function, the current position of the throttle servo, measured
the FUNCTION submenu screen: mode must be activated. Press the button in the by the actual position of the throttle/pitch control
000% 000% ACT line to turn the mode ON or OFF : stick. The red arrow (right of bar graph) indicates
4.2V
BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO
the currently set autorotation throttle position. The
000 000 000:00.0 default setting is -100%.
mz To change the current autorotation throttle posi-
0:01:23 000:00.0 tion, use the throttle/pitch control stick to move the
Press ACT ON INC
M-3 000 000
PHASE 1
CTL ON RES
green arrow, and possibly the throttle trim, to the
Starlet
position that the throttle servo is to assume during
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23   SET –100% DEC
000 000 autorotation, as shown below:
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO
THR.HOLD icon: • CTL Line
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM Use the CTL line to assign a switch to the throt-
tle hold mode. Refer to the BASE submenu CTL ACT ON INC
Set section (page 90) for additional information on CTL SW 3 RES
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
switch assignments. Use the same switch for both  SET –100% DEC

Throttle Hold and Autorotation:
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX

BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO

Press
Once the arrows are placed, press the SET button:
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence

BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO

Autorotation Throttle Position ACT ON INC
CTL SW 3 RES
BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO
  SET –100% DEC ACT ON INC
Press
CTL SW 3 RES
 SET –100% DEC
ACT INH INC 
CTL ON RES
  SET –100% DEC The field highlights blue:

Autorotation (AR) allows a helicopter to make a con-

trolled approach and landing in the event of motor
failure or if power is deliberately cut mid-air with the
throttle hold switch on the transmitter.
170 Function menu | Helicopter model - THR AR
 BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO

ACT ON INC
CTL SW 3 RES
 SET –100% DEC


Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys

( pq ) to increase/decrease the value until the red
and green arrows are equal:
BACK PHASE 1 THR.HOLD SERVO

ACT ON INC
CTL SW 3 RES
SET –111% DEC
 

Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value

back to the default.
To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
left of the display to return to the previous menu.

Function menu | Helicopter model - THR AR 171

 Swash
Pitch, Roll and Nick Mixer
This submenu option is not available for the model set- evation and pitch axis are activated so that additional BACK Swash SERVO
ting 1SERVO NOR. mixers do not need to be defined. PITC ROLL
If the model is controlled using a separate pitch ser- +061% +061%
This function is used to fine tune the outputs of the vo, the Swash submenu is unnecessary since three INC
mixing. Three interdependent servo linkages arranged software program operates the swashplate servos RES
around the swashplate share the workload of con- seperately for pitch, elevation and roll (i.e. without any DEC
trolling control roll, control pitch and collective pitch. mixer) and the Swash submenu will not appear in the NICK +061%
Swashplate mix numbers represent the % of servo FUNCTION menu if the 1SERVO NOR option is se-
function movement and the +/- symbols indicate di- lected during setup: Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
rection the servo will move. For example, increasing a ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
servo output to +70% will increase the servo function BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

range and blade pitch while an output in one direc- BACK Swash SERVO

tion, while -70% will increase the servo function range Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
PITC ROLL

and blade pitch in the opposite direction. +061% +067%

To adjust these settings, from the main display press THR.HOLD S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX Prog.MIX
INC

the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up RES

the FUNCTION submenu screen: Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence

DEC
000% 000% NICK +061%
For all other swashplate linkages employing 2, 3 or 4
4.2V
collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios and directions Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
000 000 000:00.0 are set up by default. In the following examples, the back to the default.
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 swashplate type 3SERVO 140 was selected. The de- If the swashplate control (pitch, roll and elevation)
M-3 000 000 Touch fault preset is +61%: does not respond to the control sticks properly, alter
PHASE 1
Starlet BACK Swash SERVO the mixer directions (+/-) before correcting the servo
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
PITC ROLL
rotation direction.
000 000

+061% +061%
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the Notice
INC
Swash icon: Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in
RES
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
the servos mechanically striking their end-stops.
DEC
NICK +061%

Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

Values can be varied from -100% to +100% as need- To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
ed. left of the display to return to the previous menu.
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX
To change the values, press to highlight the field of the
Prog.MIX
Touch
Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
mixer to be changed. In the example below, the ROLL
needs to be increased to +67%:
When setting up a model through the BASE submenu
Model Type, the number of servos needed for pitch
control is selected. Once this entry is made, the re-
quired mixers for the swashplate functions of roll, el-
172 Function menu | Helicopter model - S.Mix
 S.Limit
Adjustable Limitation and Deflection Rotation

This function acts like a circular mechanical fence lim- BACK S.Limit SERVO
Swash Rotation
iting the maximum possible tilting of the swashplate With some rotor head controls, it is necessary to tilt
for aileron and elevator. ACT ON the swashplate in different direction than the intend-
To adjust these settings, from the main display press SET 100% INC ed rotor plane angle during cyclical control, i.e. the
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up ROLL 000% RES point at which the rotor pitch is starting to change is
the FUNCTION submenu screen: NICK 000% DEC typically before the point where it actually affects the
000% 000%
Swash rotation 00° model orientation. If a phase angle is added to a the
4.2V head, the inputs are then out of line with the desired
Limiting swashplate movements is important. If the movement direction. This can cause banking.
000:00.0
000 000
helicopter is adjusted so that the deflections for roll For example, if a four-blade rotor is used, it may be
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 and/or elevation exploit the maximum travel mechan-
Press
necessary to turn the actuation 45° to the right or left
M-3 000 000
PHASE 1 ically possible (e. g. for 3D helicopters) then the total so that the control linkage from the swashplate to the
Starlet tilt applied to the swashplate when full roll and ele- rotor head can be exactly vertical. The blades can
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
vation commands are applied simultaneously will be now be controlled without undesirable differentiation,
considerably greater (141% in numerical terms). The and the controlling linkage then does not have to be
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the
swashplate mechanism may then strike its endstops mechanically changed. Negative angles equate to a
S.Limit icon:
and, in the worst case, the ball-heads could be dis- virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM engaged. angles a virtual rotation to the right.
BACK S.Limit SERVO
BACK S.Limit SERVO
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

ACT ON
ACT ON
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX SET 200% INC
SET 140% INC
ROLL –100% RES
Press ROLL –099% RES
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
NICK +100% DEC
NICK +099% DEC
Swash rotation 00°
Swashplate Limiter Swash rotation +45°

The normally square path of a control stick (marked The limitation of the overall swashplate deflection To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
with a red circle): or the swashplate tilt angle can be limited between left of the display to return to the previous menu.
100% (deflection has circular limit to the value achiev-
BACK S.Limit SERVO
able with roll or elevation) and 200% (no effective lim-
it). Press to highlight the value field in the SET line.
ACT INH
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
SET 100% INC
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value. The function
ROLL 000% RES can be deactivated by selecting  INH  in the ACT line.
NICK 000% DEC
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
Swash rotation 00° back to the default.
Turning the limiter  ON  in the ACT line limits the max-
imum control stick path to a circular area:

Function menu | Helicopter model - S. Limiter 173

 S.MIX
Phase-Dependent Pitch, Roll and Nick Settings
The following trim options are used for compensat- different switch. To change the phases, activate the The settings display screen opens:
ing asymmetrical helicopter reactions to control com- corresponding switch(es).
BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
mands and to adjust helicopters with multi-blade
ROLL >> NICK
rotors. The following flight phase-dependent mixers
BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO A RATE B
can be adjusted: ROLL >> NICK, NICK >> ROLL,
MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL 000% 000% INC
PITC >> ROLL, and PITC >> NICK.
ROLL >> NICK INH >> ON EXP RES
To adjust these settings, from the main display press
NICK >> ROLL INH >> ON 000% 000% DEC
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up
PITC >> ROLL INH >> ON
the FUNCTION submenu screen:
PITC >> NICK INH >> ON
000% 000%
Based on the defaults shown here, adapt the cur-
4.2V rent settings as needed by pressing the value field
000 000 000:00.0 • ACT Column (Active) to be changed. In the example below, RATE A
mz To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase needs to be changed to -012%:
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-3 000 000 Press combination, press to change the value fields in BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
PHASE 1
Starlet the appropriate row. ROLL >> NICK
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 This turns on and off the effect of the control ele- A RATE B
000 000
ment on the selected mixer when the value field 000% 000% INC
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the S. is   ON  and a switch is assigned to the specific EXP RES
MIX icon: phase (refer to the CTL Column section on page Press
000% 000% DEC
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM 175).
• SET Column (Setting)
The value field highlights blue:
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
To bring up the phase settings screen, press the
bracket buttons  >>  in the appropriate row: BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
ROLL >> NICK
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
A RATE B
MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
Press 000% 000% INC
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
ROLL >> NICK INH >> ON
EXP RES
NICK >> ROLL INH >> ON
Phase-Dependent Settings Press 000% 000% DEC
PITC >> ROLL INH >> ON
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- PITC >> NICK INH >> ON
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a

174 Function menu | Helicopter model - Helicopter mixer

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys ( Notice To save and exit to the FUNCTION menu, press
pq ) to increase/decrease the value: The mixed values portrayed in the above the  BACK  button at the top left of the screen.
BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
graphics are for demonstration purposes only
ROLL >> NICK
and do not represent real values. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

A RATE B
000% INC BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
–012%
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover
MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
EXP RES
000% 000% DEC ROLL >> NICK ON >> ON
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX
NICK >> ROLL INH >> ON
PITC >> ROLL INH >> ON
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
Use the same procedure for the value on the oppo- PITC >> NICK INH >> ON
site side of the control travel. In the example be-
low, RATE B needs to be changed to -012%:
Select and adjust all mixers as previously de-
BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
scribed.
ROLL >> NICK
A RATE B
• CTL Column (Control/Switch)
–012% –021% INC Press the field in the appropriate button to as-
EXP RES
sign a control to the respective mixer. Refer to the
000% 000% DEC
BASE submenu CTL Set section (page 90) for in-
formation on setting switches. When the phase
is activated by turning the  ON  button in the ACT
Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value Column, the assigned switch will perform the ad-
back to the default. justments made in the SET display screen:
Make the necessary changes in the two EXP val- BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO
ue fields as described in the FUNCTION submenu MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
D/R.EXP section (page 124). ROLL >> NICK ON >> SW 5
To save and exit back to the S.MIX main display, NICK >> ROLL INH >> ON
press the   BACK  button at the top left of the PITC >> ROLL INH >> ON
screen: PITC >> NICK INH >> ON

BACK PHASE 1 S.MIX SERVO

ROLL >> NICK
Press
A RATE B
–012% –021% INC
EXP RES
+050% +050% DEC

Function menu | Helicopter model - Helicopter mixer 175

 THR.MIX
Phase-Dependent Throttle Tracking with Roll, Elevation and Tail Settings
Use this function to individually adjust throttle track- Phase-Dependent Settings • SET Column (Setting)
ing with roll, pitch and tail control. To bring up the phase settings screen, press the
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
The throttle needs to follow an increase in pitch and bracket buttons  >>  in the appropriate row:
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
should track with large cyclical control movements
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO
that tilt the swashplate in the desired direction. The
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
motor output should be adapted when the thrust of
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE ROLL >> THRO INH >> ON
the tail rotor is increased to maintain a constant sys-
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. NICK >> THRO INH >> ON
tem speed. This is useful for aerobatics (e.g. perform-
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, TAIL >> THRO INH
Press
>> ON
ing rolls) since cyclical control deflections are used
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
with middle collective pitch values where the carbu-
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
retor is about halfway open and require significantly
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
higher motor output. The settings display screen opens:
corresponding switch(es).
When using a governor to automatically maintain the
BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO
rotor speed, the governor adapts the output as nec- BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO
ROLL >> THRO
essary. Adjust throttle tracking in these three mixers. MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
A RATE B
To adjust these settings, from the main display press ROLL >> THRO INH >> ON
000% 000% INC
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up NICK >> THRO INH >> ON
RES
the FUNCTION submenu screen: TAIL >> THRO INH >> ON
000% 000%
DEC

4.2V

000 000 000:00.0 • ACT Column (Active) Based on the defaults shown here, adapt the cur-
mz rent settings as needed by pressing the value field
0:01:23 000:00.0 To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase
Press to be changed. In the example below, RATE A
M-3 000 000
PHASE 1 combination, press to change the value fields in
needs to be changed to -012%:
Starlet the appropriate row.
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
This turns on and off the effect of the control ele- BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO

From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the ment on the selected mixer when the value field ROLL >> THRO

THR.MIX icon: is   ON  and a switch is assigned to the specific A RATE B

phase (refer to the CTL Column section on page 000% 000% INC
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM 175). RES
Press
DEC

Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX

Press
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence

176 Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle mixer

The value field highlights blue: BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO
When the phase is activated by turning the   ON 
ROLL >> THRO
button in the ACT Column, the assigned switch
BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO
Press
A RATE B
will perform the adjustments made in the SET dis-
ROLL >> THR
INC
play screen:
A RATE B –012% –021%
000% 000% INC RES BACK PHASE 1 THR MIX SERVO

RES DEC MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL

DEC ROLL >> THRO ON >> SW 7

NICK >> THRO INH >> ON

Notice TAIL >> THRO INH >> ON

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value: The mixed values portrayed in the above
graphics are for demonstration purposes only
BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO and do not represent real values. To save and exit to the FUNCTION menu, press
ROLL >> THRO
the  BACK  button at the top left of the screen.
A RATE B BACK PHASE 1 THR MIX SERVO
–012% 000% INC BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
RES
ROLL >> THRO ON >> ON
DEC
NICK >> THRO INH >> ON Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover

TAIL >> THRO INH >> ON

Use the same procedure for the value on the op-

THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX

posite side of the control travel. In the example

Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
below, RATE B needs to be changed to -012%: Select and adjust all mixers as previously de-
BACK PHASE 1 THR.MIX SERVO scribed.
ROLL >> THRO • CTL Column (Control/Switch)
A RATE B Press the field in the appropriate button to assign a
–012% –021% INC control to the respective mixer. Refer to the BASE
RES submenu CTL Set section (page 90) for informa-
DEC tion on setting switches.

Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value

back to the default.
To save and exit back to the THR.MIX main dis-
play, press the  BACK  button at the top left of the
screen:

Function menu | Helicopter model - Throttle mixer 177

 PIT>>TAIL
 Phase-Dependent Static Torque Compensation
Use this function to adjust the torque compensation refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page Change the trim using the digital tail rotor trim control
curve with a linear mixer ratio. In normal flight, the tail 120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to while the helicopter is hovering:
rotor is adjusted so that it compensates for the torque a different switch. To change the phases, activate BACK PHASE 1 PIT>>TAIL SERVO
of the main rotor during hovering. This generates a the corresponding switch(es).A torque compensation
certain amount of thrust in home position. This thrust curve with a linear mixer ratio of 0% is uniformly set Curve OFF
is then varied by the tail rotor control and different by default which is necessary for gyro sensors that IN +100% INC
mixers for all types of torque compensation and is ad- operate in heading-lock mode: OUT +030%
justed by trimming the tail rotor to accommodate the POINT H DEC
BACK PHASE 1 PIT>>TAIL SERVO +030%
weather, system speed and other influences.
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT
To adjust these settings, from the main display press Curve OFF
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up In order to reliably adjust the torque compensation,
IN –100% INC
the FUNCTION submenu screen: the pitch and throttle curves must be correctly adjust-
OUT 000%
000% 000% ed; in other words, the speed must remain constant
POINT L 000% DEC
4.2V over the entire collective pitch adjustment range.
ST OFF X-axis Y-axix ENT
000 000 000:00.0 Autorotation setting
mz If using the gyro sensor in NORMAL mode, or if the
0:01:23 000:00.0 During autorotation, the main rotor is not driven by
sensor can only handle NORMAL mode, adjust the
M-3 000 000 Press
the motor but according to the windmill principle. In
PHASE 1 mixer as follows:
Starlet this context, there is no torque that the tail rotor must
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
Notice compensate for. Therefore, all of the corresponding
000 000

Consult the gyro setting instructions to avoid mixers are automatically turned off.
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the
making adjustments that may make it impossible Since thrust is no longer necessary during autorota-
PIT>>TAIL icon:
to fly the helicopter. tion (because of the lack of torque), the basic position
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM of the tail rotor must also be different:
Programming While the motor is turned off, place the helicopter
in a horizontal position. Turn on the transmitter and
Phase D/R,EXP PIT.CRV THR.CRV Gyr/Gover Similar to adjusting the PIT.CRV (page 154), the con- receiver, select the phase autorotation, fold down
Press trol curve for the tail rotor can also be defined with up the tail rotor blades, and change the mixer settings
THR.HOLD Swash S.Limit S.MIX THR.MIX
to 7 points. Modify the mixer as needed and at any until the pitch angle of the tail rotor blades equals
time by specifying the symmetrical and asymmetrical 0°. The tail rotor blades are then parallel with each
Prog.MIX Trainer PIT>>TAIL Logical sw Sequence
mixer ratios above and below the hovering point. other when viewed from the rear.
Phase-Dependent Settings Starting with -30% at point L and +30% at point H, Depending on the friction and operating resistance
adjust the mixer so that the helicopter does not have of the gearing, the fuselage may still rotate slightly.
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- differing main rotor torque compared to hovering. This relatively slight torque should then be correct-
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed This will prevent the helicopter from rotating around ed using the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to the vertical axis, even during long vertical ascents and should be between 0° and a pitch angle that is op-
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the descents. posite the direction of the pitch angle during flight.
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
178 Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch >> Yaw
 Helicopter Model Function Menus Fixed-Wing Model Function Menus 

Function menu | Helicopter model - Pitch >> Yaw 179

 Idle LOW
Idle Stabilization Setting
This submenu option is not available for models using BACK PHASE 1 Idle LOW SERVO
In the SET line, set the desired corrective value by
an electric motor. pressing the value field:
BACK PHASE 1 Idle LOW SERVO
Use this function to set a gas motor’s idle. Engines
ACT INH INC
without a stable idle are not running up to proper
CTL ON RES
specifications and can affect the performance of a
 SET 000% DEC INC
model. For example, models can be damaged during ACT Press
ON

the landing process because the engine may sudden- CTL SW 3 RES
 SET DEC
ly die. 000%

Normally, the idle of a gas motor is set using the throt- Programming
tle digital trim control. The idle position of the throttle Press the value button in the ACT line to activate  ON  The field highlights blue:
servo (which depends on the position of the trim con- or inhibit  INH :
trol) can be adjusted as needed to a higher or lower BACK PHASE 1 Idle LOW SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 Idle LOW SERVO

idle with a switch. A value can be programmed to the

switch within a range of ± 20%.
To adjust these settings, from the main display press ACT ON INC
ACT ON INC

the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up CTL ON RES
CTL SW 3 RES

the FUNCTION submenu screen:  SET 000% DEC

 SET 000% DEC
000% 000%

4.2V
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
000 000 000:00.0 Press the value button in the CTL line to assign a con- ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value.
trol switch. Refer to the BASE submenu CTL Set
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 The adjustment range is ±100%. A value of +100%
section (page 90) for information on setting switches.
M-2 000 000 Press moves the idle position of the throttle servo set with
PHASE 1 When the phase is activated by turning the  ON  but-
Extra 360 the throttle trim 20% toward Idle LOW, and vice versa.
ton in the ACT line, the assigned switch will perform
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000 the adjustments made in the SET line: Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Idle LOW BACK PHASE 1 Idle LOW SERVO
icon: To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
left of the display to return to the previous menu.
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
ACT ON INC
CTL SW 3 RES
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
 SET 000% DEC

Press
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set

Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

180 Function menu | Airplane models - Idle

 Snap Roll
Automated Programming
A snap-roll is a purposely accelerated stall resulting the BACK button. Standard default naming for the Press the button in the ACT column to activate  ON 
in a “spin”. This function enables up to four pre-pro- phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE or inhibit  INH  the settings:
grammed snap settings (positive right/negative, right, 1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. BACK PHASE 1 Snap roll SERVO
left and positive left/negative) per phase. The position Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, MODE ACT AILE ELEV RUDD CTL
of the switch assigned to the individual presets de- refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page R/U ON –100% –100% –100% ON
termines the respective figure program in which the 120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a R/D ON –100% +100% +100% ON INC
control stick signals are set at a fixed value indepen- different switch. To change the phases, activate the L/U ON +100% –100% +100% ON RES
dent of the momentary control stick positions. That is, corresponding switch(es). L/D ON +100% +100% –100% ON DEC
all aileron, elevator and rudder servos move as if the
BACK PHASE 1 Snap roll SERVO
relevant control stick has been shifted to the preset
MODE ACT AILE ELEV RUDD CTL
position. Press the value button in the CTL line to assign a
R/U INH –100% –100% –100% ON
To adjust these settings, from the main display press control switch. Refer to the BASE submenu CTL Set
R/D INH –100% +100% +100% ON INC
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up section (page 90) for information on setting switch-
L/U INH +100% –100% +100% ON RES
the FUNCTION submenu screen: es. When the phase is activated by turning the  ON 
L/D INH +100% +100% –100% ON DEC
000% 000% button in the ACT column, the assigned switch will
4.2V perform the adjustments set on this screen.
000:00.0 Set the values within a range of ±150% in the appro-
000 000

priate column and row. Press the value field to high- WARNING
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 light blue: Never  turn on a snap-roll program acci-
!
Press
M-2 000 000
PHASE 1 dentally, especially during flight! If the
Extra 360 BACK PHASE 1 Snap roll SERVO
programs are turned on at in the wrong
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 MODE ACT AILE ELEV RUDD CTL
000 000 location or time, it can cause significant property
R/U INH –100% –100% –100% ON
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the damage and/or injury.
R/D INH –100% +100% +100% ON INC
Snap roll icon:
L/U INH +100% –100% +100% ON RES To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM L/D INH +100% +100% –100% ON DEC left of the display to return to the previous menu.

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value. Press the  RES 
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set button to reset the changed value back to the default.
Press
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

Some pilots automatically program snap rolls when

flying.
Phase-Dependent Settings
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
Function menu | Airplane models - Snap Roll 181
 Aile diff - Plane
Aileron Travel and Differentiation Settings
This submenu option is not available for models using To adjust these settings, from the main display press BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO
the 1AILE and 1AILE1FLAP settings. the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up
the FUNCTION submenu screen:
An aileron deflected downward generates greater 000% 000%
AILE1 AILE2 INC
aerodynamic resistance than one deflected upward. 4.2V
RATE A 100% 100% RES
The asymmetrical resistance generates torque around
000:00.0 RATE B 100% 100% DEC
the vertical axis which causes a turning out of the in- 000 000

tended flight direction. This is a naturally occurring 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0

Press
phenomenon for all winged models, however the M-2 000 000
PHASE 1
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO
effect comparatively is stronger on the longer glider Extra 360
wings and less on motorized airplanes whose lever BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000

arms are typically much shorter. This undesirable

From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Aile diff
side-effect is called “adverse yaw” and must be com- AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC
icon:
pensated for by a simultaneous, counteracting rudder RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES

deflection. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC

The rudder deflection also generates additional resis-

tance and further impairs flight. If the rudder deflec-
tion is differentiated so that the downward deflection
of the aileron is less than the upward deflection, the
adverse yaw can be reduced or eliminated without
having to manually compensate the rudder each time
on the aileron control.
0% (normal)
50% (differential)
100% (Split)
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
Notice
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
The  available setting options depend on the
number of ailerons selected during the basic set-
Airbrake
Press
TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail tings of the model (BASE submenu Model Type).
Programming
The adjustment range of 100% to both sides allows
the adjustment of different deflections on the right
Phase-Dependent Settings side independent of the rotation direction of the ai-
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- leron servos. 100% (travel) corresponds to normal
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed deflection (no differentiation), and 0% (travel) corre-
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to sponds to the split function.
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the High absolute values are required during stunt flying
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE in order for the model to rotate precisely around the
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. longitudinal axis when the aileron is deflected. Aver-
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, age values of about 50% are typical for supporting
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page curved flight in a thermal air current.
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
corresponding switch(es).

182 Function menu | Airplane models - QR differentiation

To change a value, press the appropriate value field. To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
In the example below, the selected aileron travel must left of the display to return to the previous menu.
be changed to 066%:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX

AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC

Press Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES
RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

The field highlights blue:

BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO

AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC

RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES
RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys

( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO

AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC

RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES
RATE B 066% 100% 100% 100% DEC

Use the same procedure to adjust the other differenti-

ation values for all remaining ailerons.
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.

Function menu | Airplane models - QR differentiation 183

 Aile diff - Glider
Aileron Travel, Differentiation and Differentiation Reduction Settings
This submenu option is not available for models using
the 1AILE and 1AILE1FLAP settings.
An aileron deflected downward generates greater
aerodynamic resistance than one deflected upward.
The asymmetrical resistance generates torque around
one aileron is almost impossible, though depending different switch. To change the phases, activate the
on the position and degree of differentiation, often it corresponding switch(es).
does not have the neutral position. The automatic dif- This example shows the display for setting a minimum
ferentiation reduction option reduces the degree of ai- of two ailerons, such as 2AILE:
leron differentiation continuously and in an adjustable
SERVO
manner when the brake system is extended or even
BACK PHASE 1 Aile Diff

the vertical axis which causes a turning out of the in- set them up, depending on the setting.
tended flight direction. This is a naturally occurring To adjust these settings, from the main display press
NEXT

phenomenon for all winged models, however the the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up
AILE1 AILE2 INC

effect comparatively is stronger on the longer glider the FUNCTION submenu screen: RATE A 100% 100% RES

wings and less on motorized airplanes whose lever 000% 000%

RATE B 100% 100% DEC

arms are typically much shorter. This undesirable 4.2V

side-effect is called “adverse yaw” and must be com-
pensated for by a simultaneous, counteracting rudder 000 000 000:00.0 This example shows the display for setting a maxi-
deflection. mz mum of four ailerons, such as 4AILE4FLAP:
0:01:23 000:00.0
Press
The rudder deflection also generates additional resis- M-4 000 000
PHASE 1 BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO
tance and further impairs flight. If the rudder deflec- Soarmaster
tion is differentiated so that the downward deflection BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
NEXT
of the aileron is less than the upward deflection, the AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC
From the FUNCTION submenu display, press the Aile
adverse yaw can be reduced or eliminated without RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES
diff icon:
having to manually compensate the rudder each time RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC
on the aileron control. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

This example shows the display of differentiation

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
(Diff.) and differentiation reduction (Red.), such as
4AILE4FLAP:
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
0% (normal) Aile diff
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
Press Diff. Red.
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

AI1 L+R 000% 000% NEXT

50% (differential) Phase-Dependent Settings AI12 L+R 000% 000% INC

This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- FL1 L+R 000% 000% RES

ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed FL2 L+R 000% 000% DEC

100% (Split)
However, when the ailerons are raised as part of a
butterfly configuration, the adjusted aileron differenti-
ation has a disadvantageous effect, since the aileron
effect is strongly impaired. Another excursion of the
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE Notice
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. The  available setting options depend on the
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, number of ailerons selected during the basic set-
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page tings of the model (BASE submenu Model Type).
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a

184 Function menu | Airplane models - Aileron settings

Display Page Travel Setting Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys To set the differentiation, press the appropriate val-
The adjustment range of 100% to both sides allows ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value: ue field of the Diff. column. In the example be-
the adjustment of different deflections on the right low, the selected aileron travel must be changed
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO
side independent of the rotation direction of the ai- to 045%:
leron servos on this display page. 100% (travel) cor- NEXT BACK PHASEPress
1 Aile diff SERVO
responds to normal deflection, and 0% (travel) corre- AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC Diff. Red.
sponds to the split function. RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES AI1 L+R 000% 000% NEXT
RATE B 066% 100% 100% 100% DEC AI12 L+R 000% 000% INC
Notice
FL1 L+R 000% 000% RES
At least then, in case of use of the butterfly sys-
FL2 L+R 000% 000% DEC
tem of the differentiation reduction function, a dif- Use the same procedure to adjust the other differenti-
ferentiation should not be performed in this dis- ation values for all remaining ailerons.
play page but by pressing the  NEXT  button to bring up Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value The field highlights blue:
the Differentiation/Reduction Display Page (page 185). back to the default. AILE diff
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
Diff. Red.
To change a value, press the appropriate value field. Differentiation/Reduction Display Page
A/1 L+R 000% 000% NEXT
In the example below, the selected aileron travel must
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO 000% 000% INC
be changed to 066%: A/2 L+R
Diff. Red. FL1 L+R 000% 000% RES
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO AI1 L+R 000% 000% NEXT FL2 L+R 000% 000% DEC
AI12 L+R 000% 000% INC
NEXT FL1 L+R 000% 000% RES
AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2
Press
INC FL2 L+R 000% 000% DEC Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC Aile diff
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
Notice Diff. Red.

The field highlights blue: The  available setting options depend on the AI1 L+R 045% 000% NEXT

number of ailerons selected during the basic set- AI2 L+R 000% 000% INC
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO
tings of the model (BASE submenu Model Type). FL1 L+R 000% 000% RES
FL2 L+R 000% 000% DEC
NEXT
AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC
• Programming the differentiation
RATE A 100% 100% 100% 100% RES Use the same procedure to adjust the other dif-
The adjustment range of 100% to allows you to
RATE B 100% 100% 100% 100% DEC ferentiation values for all remaining flaps/ailerons.
adjust different deflection on the right side inde-
pendent of the direction of rotation of the servos. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
000 % (differentiation) corresponds to normal de- back to the default.
flection and 100 % (differentiation) of the split func- • Programming the reduction
tion. A 000% value in the right column means that the
"aileron differentiation" programmed in the trans-

Function menu | Airplane models - Aileron settings 185

 mitter is held. A value equal to the set percentage Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
of the aileron differentiation means that this is re- ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
moved in maximum butterfly function (flaps com- Aile diff
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
pletely out). In case of a reduction value bigger
Diff. Red.
than the set aileron differentiation, this will be re-
AI1 L+R 045% 045% NEXT
moved completely before the full deflection of the
AI2 L+R 040% 000% INC
flap control stick.
FL1 L+R 035% 000% RES
To set the differentiation, press the appropriate val-
FL2 L+R 030% 000% DEC
ue field of the Red. column. In the example be-
low, the selected aileron travel must be changed
to 045%: Use the same procedure to adjust the other dif-
BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO ferentiation values for all remaining flaps/ailerons.
Diff. Red. Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
AI1 L+R 045% 000% NEXT back to the default.
AI2 L+R 040% 000% INC To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
FL1 L+R 035%
Press
000% RES left of the display to return to the previous menu.
FL2 L+R 030% 000% DEC
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

The field highlights blue: Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Snap roll

BACK PHASE 1 Aile diff SERVO

Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Butterfly
Diff. Red.

AI1 L+R 045% 000% NEXT

Trainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail
AI2 L+R 040% 000% INC
FL1 L+R 035% 000% RES
FL2 L+R 030% 000% DEC

The adjustment range of ±150 % to allows you to

set the reduction of the set differentiation com-
pletely independently from the direction of rotation
of the servos installed in the wings.

186 Function menu | Airplane models - Aileron settings

Personal notes 187
 Wing MIX
Wing Mixer Adjustment
Use this function to adjust the rudders, ailerons and Programming control (which cannot be independently reset), a con-
elevators to fix deflection direction during flight. trol switch or a logical switch.
• ACT Column (Active)
To adjust these settings, from the main display press
To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up To set the mixer, press the   >>  button in the RUD-
combination, press to change the value fields in
the FUNCTION submenu screen: D>>AILE line:
the appropriate row.
000% 000%
This turns on and off the effect of the control ele- BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
4.2V
ment on the selected mixer when the value field MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
000 000 000:00.0 is   ON  and a switch is assigned to the specific RUDD >> AILE INH >> ON
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 phase. AILE >> RUDD INH >> ON
Press Press
M-2 000 000
PHASE 1 • SET Column (Setting) RUDD >> ELEV INH >> ON
Extra 360 To switch to the mix type setting display menu,
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000 press the appropriate  >>  button in the SET col-
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Wing MIX umn. Refer to the specific sections below for in-
The RUDD>>AILE setting display opens:
icon: formation on the individual mix types (pages 188-
191). BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM RUDD >> AILE
• CTL Column (Control/Switch)
A RATE B
Press the button in the appropriate row to as-
+100% +100% INC
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX sign a control to the respective mixer. Refer to the
RES
BASE submenu CTL Set section (page 90) for in-
DEC
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set formation on setting switches. When the phase
is activated by turning the  ON  button in the ACT
Press
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail Column, the assigned switch will perform the ad-
Press the desired value field. In the example below,
justments made in the SET display screen.
Phase-Dependent Settings RATE A needs to be at +50%:
RUDD >> AILE Line (Rudder >> Aileron)
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO

ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
different switch. To change the phases, activate the
corresponding switch(es).
In aerobatic flight, the behavior of the longitudinal axis RUDD >> AILE
is influenced when the rudder is actuated. This is par- A RATE B
ticularly problematic in "knife edge flying" since the +100% +100% INC
wings are vertical in this flight position and the only RES
lift is from the fuselage when the rudder is deflected. Press
DEC
This can cause a model to rotate on the longitude axis
as if the aileron were actuated. When the rudders are
controlled, a correction is necessary along the longi-
tudinal axis (aileron) within an adjustable range.
The setting range of ±150 % makes it possible to ap-
propriately adapt the deflection direction. This mixer
can be turned on and off so that the model can be
used exclusively via the rudder. Turn mixer off with a

188 Function menu | Airplane models - Airplane mixer

The field highlights blue: To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top The adjustment should normally be symmetrical with
BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO left of the display to return to the previous menu: the neutral point of the aileron control stick.
RUDD >> AILE BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
To set the mixer, press the   >>  button in the
A RATE B RUDD >> AILE
AILE>>RUDD line:
+100% +100% INC Press
A RATE B BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
RES +050% +050% INC MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
DEC RES RUDD>> AILE ON >> SW 6

DEC AILE >> RUDD INH >> ON

RUDD >> ELEV INH >> ON
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Press
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value.
The main Wing MIX display appears:
Use the same procedure to adjust the other values.
In the example below, RATE B now needs to be set BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
The AILE>>RUDD setting display opens:
at +50%: MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
RUDD >> AILE INH >> ON BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO AIL >> RUDD
AILE >> RUDD INH >> ON
RUDD >> AILE A RATE B
RUDD >> ELEV INH >> ON
A RATE B +100% +100% INC
+050% +050% INC
RES
RES DEC
DEC
AILE >> RUDD Line (Aileron >> Rudder)
The rudder moves to an adjustable degree when the Press the desired value field. In the example below,
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value aileron is actuated. This can compensate for the neg- RATE A needs to be at +50%:
back to the default. ative torque in conjunction with Aileron Differentia-
tion (page 184) which smooths flight in curves. The BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO
Tip rudder remain separately controllable. AIL >> RUDD
Bring up the servo monitor in one of three ways: press- The setting range of ±150 % makes it possible to ap- A RATE B
ing the  SERVO  button in the upper right corner of the propriately adapt the deflection direction. This mixer +100% +100% INC
display, by simultaneously pushing both arrow keys can be turned on and off so that the model can be RES
( pq ), or by pressing the BASE submenu Servo icon. used exclusively via the ailerons. Turn mixer off with a
Press
DEC
To exit the Servo display, press the  BACK  button or control (which cannot be independently reset), a con-
push the ESC key to return to the previous menu. trol switch or a logical switch.

Tip
Normally, this mixer is adjusted so that the rudder ex-
tends on the side of aileron moving upward; an adjust-
ment of 50% is generally appropriate.

Function menu | Airplane models - Airplane mixer 189

The field highlights blue: To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top To set the mixer, press the   >>  button in the RUD-
left of the display to return to the previous menu: D>>ELEV line:
BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO
AILE >> RUDD BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO
A RATE B AILE >> RUDD MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
Press
+100% +100% INC A RATE B RUDD >> AILE ON >> SW 6
RES +050% +050% INC AILE >> RUDD ON >> SW 8
DEC RES RUDD >> ELEV INH >> ON
DEC
Press
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value. The main Wing MIX display appears: The RUDD>>ELEV setting display opens:
Use the same procedure to adjust the other values. BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO
In the example below, RATE B now needs to be set RUDD >> ELEV
MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL
at +50%: A RATE B
RUDD >> AILE ON >> SW 6
BACK PHASE 1 WING MIX SERVO >> +100% +100% INC
AILE >> RUDD ON SW 8
AILE >> RUDD >> RES
RUDD >> ELEV INH ON
A RATE B DEC
+050% +050% INC
RES
Press the desired value field. In the example below,
DEC RUDD >> ELEV Line (Rudder >> Elevator) RATE A needs to be at +50%:
In aerobatic flight, the behavior of the latitude axis is
BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value influenced when the  rudder is actuated. This is par-
RUDD >> ELEV
back to the default. ticularly problematic in "knife edge flying" since the
A RATE B
wings are vertical in this flight position and the only
+100% +100% INC
Tip lift is from the fuselage when the rudder is deflected.
RES
Bring up the servo monitor in one of three ways: press- Changes in direction can occur as if the elevator were Press
DEC
ing the  SERVO  button in the upper right corner of the actuated. When the rudders are controlled, a correc-
display, by simultaneously pushing both arrow keys tion is necessary along the transverse axis (elevator)
( pq ), or by pressing the BASE submenu Servo icon. within an adjustable range.
To exit the Servo display, press the  BACK  button or The rudder and elevator remain independently con-
push the ESC key to return to the previous menu. trolled.
The setting range of ±150 % makes it possible to ap-
propriately adapt the deflection direction. This mixer
can be turned on and off so that the model can be
used exclusively via the rudder. Turn mixer off with a
control (which cannot be independently reset), a con-
trol switch or a logical switch.

190 Function menu | Airplane models - Airplane mixer

The field highlights blue: To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO left of the display to return to the previous menu:
RUDD >> ELEV BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
A RATE B RUDD >> ELEV
+100% +100% INC Press
A RATE B
RES +050% +050% INC
DEC RES
DEC

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys

( pq ) to increase/decrease the value.
The main Wing MIX display appears:
Use the same procedure to adjust the other values.
In the example below, RATE B now needs to be set BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO

at +50%: MIX.TYPE ACT SET CTL

RUDD >> AILE ON >> SW 6
BACK PHASE 1 Wing MIX SERVO
AILE >> RUDD ON >> SW 8
RUDD >> ELEV
RUDD >> ELEV ON >> L1
A RATE B
+050% +050% INC
RES
DEC To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
left of the display to return to the FUNCTION menu.
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.

Tip
Bring up the servo monitor in one of three ways: press-
ing the  SERVO  button in the upper right corner of the
display, by simultaneously pushing both arrow keys
( pq ), or by pressing the BASE submenu Servo icon.
To exit the Servo display, press the  BACK  button or
push the ESC key to return to the previous menu.

Function menu | Airplane models - Airplane mixer 191

 Flap MIX
Flap Mixer Adjustment
This submenu option is not available for models using different switch. To change the phases, activate the FLAP Line
the 1AILE and 2AILE settings. corresponding switch(es). By pressing the  >>  button in the FLAP line, one of
BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO three display screens will appear, depending on the
Use this function to adjust the elevator, aileron and selected number of flaps:
FLAP TYPE ACT SET CTL
flaps to have better control in tighter curves, adjust-
FLAP >>
ing upward or downward torque, and aileron flap pair BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
AILE >> FLAP INH >> ON
movement. FLAP
ELEV >> FLAP INH >> ON
To adjust these settings, from the main display press
FLAP >> ELEV INH >> ON
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up FLAP1 INC

the FUNCTION submenu screen: RATE A +100% RES

000% 000% RATE B +100% DEC

4.2V
Programming OFFSET 000%

000 000 000:00.0 • ACT Column (Active)

BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
mz To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase
0:01:23 000:00.0 FLAP
M-2 000 000 Press combination, press to change the value fields in
PHASE 1 the appropriate row.
Extra 360 FLAP1 FLAP2 INC
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 This turns on and off the effect of the control ele-
RATE A +100% +100% RES
000 000
ment on the selected mixer when the value field
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Flap MIX is   ON  and a switch is assigned to the specific RATE B +100% +100% DEC

icon: phase. OFFSET 000% 000%

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM • SET Column (Setting)

BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
To switch to the mix type setting display menu, FLAP
press the appropriate  >>  button in the SET col-
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
umn. INC
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
• CTL Column (Control/Switch) RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES
Press the button in the appropriate row to as- RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw
Press
Sequence V-Tail sign a control to the respective mixer. Refer to the OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%
BASE submenu CTL Set section (page 90) for in-
Phase-Dependent Settings formation on setting switches. When the phase • Lines RATE A / B
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- is activated by turning the  ON  button in the ACT Determine the value input in the RATE A / B line the
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed Column, the assigned switch will perform the ad- flap deflection grade through the selected control
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to justments made in the SET display screen. when the following situations occur:
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a

192 Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps mixer

If a switch was assigned to CH6 in the BASE sub- BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
• OFFSET Line
menu CTL Set and in the FUNCTION submenu FLAP Use to set the phase-specific positions for all of
Flap set the ACT line is set to  INH : the flaps in the respective model. Set the individu-
Press
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC al flap positions assumed for each phase.
RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES The adjustment range of ±100% allows the flaps to
CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC be moved to the desired position independent of
CH 6. SL 2 000% +100% +100% INC OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%
the rotational direction of the flap servos, as shown
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
below:
DEC
The field highlights blue:
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% BACK PHASE 1 FLAP MIX SERVO
CTL OFFSET – Travel + BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO FLAP
FLAP
BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
ACT INH CTL ON FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC RATE A +025% +030% +030% +025% RES
NEXT RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES RATE B +025% +030% +030% +025% DEC
AILE1 AILE2 INC RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC OFFSET -011% -022% -022% -011%
RATE A 000% 000% RES OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%
RATE B 000% 000% DEC
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Notices
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value within a • The  available setting options depend on
Or if a switch was assigned to CH6 in the BASE range of ±125%: the number of flaps selected during model
submenu CTL Set and in the FUNCTION submenu setup in the BASE submenus Model Sel
BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
Flap set the ACT line is set to  OFF : or Model Type.
FLAP
• The flap offset entered here is independent
BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO
from the connection set in the ACT line of
ACT OFF CTL SW 6 FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
the FUNCTION submenu Flap set (page
NEXT RATE A +025% +100% +100% +100% RES
196).
AILE1 AILE2 INC RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC
RATE A 000% 000% RES
• Use the BASE submenu CTL Set to as-
OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%
RATE B 000% 000% DEC
sign the first aileron pair to CH5, and any
Use the same procedure to adjust the value for the required second flap pair to CH12, as
downward deflection of the left flap (RATE B) and shown below:
To change a previously input value, press the ap- for the values of the right flap and for any second
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
propriate value field: flap pair. Symmetrical and asymmetrical values are
possible.
CH 5. NONE -008% +100% +100% NEXT
Press the  RES  button to reset the changed value
CH 6. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC
back to the default.
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+

Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps mixer 193

 BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
settings saved in CTL Set (control posi- AILE >> FLAP Line
tion), Flap MIX (offset value and travel set- Use  this line to adjust phase settings for flap pair
CH 9. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
ting) and Flap set (RATE values). movement when the aileron is actuated. Normally,
CH 10. NONE 000% +100% +100% INC the flaps follow the ailerons with less deflection, with
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value a mixed amount less than 100%.
CH 11. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
back to the default.
CH 12. NONE -010% +100% +100% DEC A setting range of ±125 % makes it possible to appro-
To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top priately adapt the deflection direction to the ailerons
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+
left of the display to return to the previous menu: depending on the flap servo rotation direction.
• In the OFFSET line the default offset posi- BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
tions of the aileron pairs are 000%: FLAP TYPE ACT SET CTL Notice
Press
FLAP >> Since all values are set separately, the aileron de-
BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
AILE >> FLAP INH >> ON flections of the flaps can also be different. When
FLAP
ELEV >> FLAP INH >> ON using a glider model, it is recommended using
FLAP >> ELEV INH >> ON the "Diff." and "Red." columns in the FUNCTION sub-
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
menu Aile diff.
RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES
RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC In the TRIM line, set the aileron trim action grade on
OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000% the aileron flaps function between 0 and 150%.
Set the individual values as described above. In the
These offset values must be changed in
example below, the values have been changed as
OFFSET column of the BASE submenu
needed:
CTL Set in the CH6 line:
BACK THERMIK FLAP MIX SERVO
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
AILE >> FLAP CTL ON

CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT

FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
CH 6. SL 2 +015% +100% +100% INC
RATE A +055% +033% +033% +055% RES
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
RATE B +055% +033% +033% +055% DEC
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
TRIM +055%
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+

• When ACT =  INH  or  OFF  in the sub-

menu Flap set, all the provided flaps move
in the respective positions corresponding
with the settings saved in CTL Set (control
position), Flap MIX (offset value and travel
setting) and Flap set (RATE values).
• When ACT =  ON  in the submenu Flap
set, all the provided flaps move in the re-
spective positions corresponding with the

194 Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps mixer

Notice The flaps uniform default values are +30%: The setting can be symmetrical or asymmetrical to the
The  available setting options depend on the flap control center point.
BACK SPEED Flap MIX SERVO
number of ailerons selected during the basic set- ELEV >> FLAP CTL ON
The adjustment range is ±125%. This mixers normal
tings of the model (BASE submenu Model Type). NEXT
settings lie within the single-digit to low double-digit
INC
range. By default, 0% is uniformly set:
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2
To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
RATE A +030% +030% +030% +030% RES BACK SPEED Flap MIX SERVO
left of the display to return to the previous menu:
RATE B +030% +030% +030% +030% DEC FLAP >> ELEV CTL ON
BACK THERMIK FLAP MIX SERVO
FLAP TYP ACT SET CTL ELEV1 INC
Press
FLAP >> Adapt the individual values as described in the FLAP RATE A 000% RES
AILE >> FLAP ON >> ON Line section (page 192). DEC
RATE B 000%
ELEV >> FLAP INH >> ON
Notice
FLAP >> ELEV INH >> ON
The  available setting options depend on the Adapt the individual values as described in the FLAP
number of ailerons selected during the basic set- Line section (page 192).
tings of the model (BASE submenu Model Type). To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
ELEV >> FLAP line
To support the elevator in tight curves and aerobatics, left of the display to return to the previous menu:
To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
the flap function  can be included by controlling the left of the display to return to the previous menu: BACK SPEED Flap MIX SERVO
elevator  with this mixer. Select the mixing direction FLAP TYPE ACT SET CTL
BACK SPEED Flap MIX SERVO
so that the flaps move downward when the elevator is Press
FLAP >>
FLAP TYPE ACT SET CTL
pulled (up), and conversely upward when the elevator Press AILE >> FLAP ON >> ON
FLAP >>
is pushed (down). ELEV >> FLAP ON >> ON
AILE >> FLAP ON >> ON
A symmetrical or an asymmetrical effect can be de- FLAP >> ELEV ON >> ON
RUDD >> FLAP ON >> ON
fined for each flap pair. Values of ±125% are possible.
FLAP >> ELEV INH >> ON
The aileron uniform default values are +30%:
Press the  BACK  button at the top left of the display
BACK SPEED Flap MIX SERVO
to return to the FUNCTION menu:
ELEV >> FLAP CTL ON FLAP >> ELEV line
NEXT BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
When setting flaps, upward or downward torque can
AILE1 AILE3 AILE4 AILE2 INC
arise about the transverse axis. Elevated flaps also
RATE A +030% +030% +030% +030% RES
cause the models to fly faster. These reactions can Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
RATE B +030% +030% +030% +030% DEC
be achieved with the mixer.
When setting the flaps, use this mixer to have the ai- Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set

leron position automatically track the flaps depending

on the set value. Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps mixer 195

 Flap Set
Flap Servo Effect Adjustment
This submenu option is not available for models using This example shows the display for setting a maxi- Programming
the 1AILE setting. mun, such as 4AILE4FLAP:
• ACT Column (Active)
To adjust these settings, from the main display press BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO • ACT =  INH  or  OFF 
ACT INH CTL ON
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO
NEXT
the FUNCTION submenu screen: ACT INH CTL ON
000% 000%
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
NEXT
RATE A 000% 000% 000% 000% RES
4.2V
AILE1 AILE2 INC
RATE B 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC
000 000 000:00.0 RATE A 000% 000% RES
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 RATE B 000% 000% DEC
Press
M-2 000 000
PHASE 1 Phase-Dependent Settings
Extra 360
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val- BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed ACT OFF CTL SW 6
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Flap set in green in the upper left side of the screen next to NEXT
icon: the BACK button. Standard default naming for the INC
AILE1 AILE2
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM RATE A 000% 000% RES
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
RATE B 000% 000% DEC
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a When ACT is deactivated, the default (or pre-
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set different switch. To change the phases, activate the viously set) values of the Flap MIX submenu
corresponding switch(es). AILERON option are valid on the standard flap
Press
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail
servos CH6, CH7, CH9 and CH10, or in case of
The display shows different views depending on the a model with only one flap servo the setting is
selected number of ailerons and flaps. This exam- valid only on servo CH6:
ple shows the display for setting a minimum, such as BACK PHASE 1 Flap MIX SERVO
2AILE: FLAP

BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO

ACT INH CTL ON FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC

NEXT RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES

AILE1 AILE2 INC RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC

RATE A 000% 000% RES OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%

RATE B 000% 000% DEC

196 Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps settings

 If a switch or control assigned to CH6 in the BACK PHASE 1 FLAP MIX SERVO
Notice
BASE submenu CTL Set, then all the provid- FLAP Because of redundancy, only set one of
ed flaps move in the respective positions cor- the aforementioned submenus with the
responding with the settings saved in CTL Set INC precise values.
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2
(control position), Flap MIX (offset value and
RATE A +100% +100% +100% +100% RES
travel setting) and Flap set (RATE values): Specify the effect of the control elements assigned
RATE B +100% +100% +100% +100% DEC
to CH6 in the BASE submenu CTL Set, by set-
BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO OFFSET 000% 000% 000% 000%
ting the phase trim on the aileron, flap, and eleva-
Likewise, with the RATE setting of the Flap set tor positions.
CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
CH 6. SL 2 000% +100% +100% INC
submenu AILERON option, the standard flap • CTL Column (Control/Switch)
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
servos CH6, CH7, CH9 and CH10 are valid, or Press the field in the appropriate button to assign a
DEC
in case of a model with only one flap servo the control to the respective mixer. Refer to the BASE
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100%
setting is valid only on servo CH6: submenu CTL Set section (page 90) for informa-
CTL OFFSET – Travel +
BACK PHASE 1 Flap set SERVO
tion on setting switches.
ACT ON CTL ON BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO
NEXT
Notice ACT ON CTL SW 6
FLAP1 FLAP2 INC NEXT
Because of redundancy, only set one of
RATE A 000% 000% RES AILE1 AILE2 INC
the aforementioned submenus with the
RATE B 000% 000% DEC
precise values. RATE A 000% 000% RES
RATE B 000% 000% DEC
• ACT =  ON 
If a switch or control assigned to CH6 in the
When ACT is activated, only the default (or pre- BASE submenu CTL Set has an offset value,
viously set) offset values of the Flap MIX sub- then all the provided flaps move in the respec-
menu AILERON option are valid: tive positions corresponding with the settings
BACK PHASE 1 Flap Set SERVO saved in CTL Set (control position), Flap MIX
ACT ON CTL ON (offset value and travel setting) and Flap set
NEXT (RATE values):
AILE1 AILE2 INC BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO
RATE A 000% 000% RES
RATE B 000% 000% DEC CH 5. NONE 000% +100% +100% NEXT
CH 6. SL 2 +015% +100% +100% INC
CH 7. NONE 000% +100% +100% RES
CH 8. NONE 000% +100% +100% DEC
CTL OFFSET – TRAVEL+

Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps settings 197

 Notice Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Tip
If you switch this function   OFF  via an as- ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value current value Typically, in the BASE submenu CTL Set, no control is
signed switch, not only is the phase trim de- within a range of ±100%: assigned to the inputs CH5-CH12. Assign a control or
activated, but also the functions described in BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO
switch to set different flap positions within a phase as
the Programming section (page 196) under ACT ACT ON CTL SW 6
described in this section. By contrast, the Programming
=  INH  or  OFF . NEXT
Example Phase Specific Flaps Trimming section
INC
(page 230) describes how to trim the flaps specifically
AILE1 AILE2
Lines RATE A / B for all phases through only one control element.
RATE A +010% 000% RES
A symmetrical or an asymmetrical effect can be de- RATE B 000% 000% DEC
To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
fined for each flap pair. In the BASE submenu CTL left of the display to return to the previous menu.
Set, leave the assigned switch travel settings for the
flap trimming at +100 %. Then in this display, input Use the same procedure to adjust the other values
values within 5 and 20 %. for all remaining fields, including inboard aileron
Switch to the appropriate phase, and press the value AILE2L and AILE2R.
field to be changed: Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO
To bring up the flaps setting screen, press the  NEXT 
ACT ON CTL SW 6
button at the right edge of the display. Use the same
NEXT
procedure described above to adjust all value fields:
AILE1 AILE2 INC
RATE A 000% 000% RES BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO

RATE B 000% 000% DEC ACT ON CTL SW 6

Press NEXT
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
The field highlights blue: RATE A +020% +025% +025% +020% RES

BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO RATE B +020% +025% +025% +020% DEC

ACT ON CTL SW 6
NEXT
To bring up the elevator setting screen, press
AILE1 AILE2 INC
the   NEXT  button at the right edge of the display.
RATE A 000% 000% RES
Use the same procedure described above to adjust
DEC
RATE B 000% 000% all value fields:
BACK THERMAL Flap set SERVO
ACT ON CTL SW 6
NEXT
ELEV1 INC
RATE A +005% RES
RATE B +005% DEC

198 Function menu | Airplane models - Flaps settings

Personal notes 199
 Airbrake
Airplane Braking System Adjustment
This submenu option is not available for certain model This example shows the display for setting a maxi- • ACT Line (Active)
types and configurations. mun, such as 4AILE4FLAP: To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase,
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO
press to change the value fields on the appropri-
Use this menu to configure the deflection direction of Airbrake
ate screen.
the flaps and elevator for braking. ACT INH CTL ON
NEXT If this phase is assigned to a switch, this individu-
To adjust these settings, from the main display press ally turns on and off the effect of the selected con-
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up trol element on the flap position for specific phases
RATE 000% 000% 000% 000% RES
the FUNCTION submenu screen: when the value field is  ON .
DEC
000% 000%
• CTL Line (Control/Switch)
4.2V
Use this field to assign a control or control switch
000 000 000:00.0 Phase-Dependent Settings to a specific phase mixer. Refer to the Control
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 and Switch Assignment section (page 26) for in-
This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
M-2 Press formation on assigning switches. In the example
ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
000 000
PHASE 1
Extra 360 below, the phase titled LANDING is assigned to
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 S6:
000 000 the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Airbrake phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE BACK LANDING Airbrake SERVO

icon: 1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g. ACT ON CTL SW 6

Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases, NEXT
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page AILE1 AILE2 INC
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a RATE 000% 000% RES

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX

different switch. To change the phases, activate the DEC

Press
corresponding switch(es).
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
Programming
RATE Line
Using either the ACT or CTL options, enter the flap
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

and elevator deflection direction amount for braking. A symmetrical or an asymmetrical effect can be de-
The display shows different views depending on the In order for these settings to be effective and retriev- fined for each flap pair. In order to be able to define
selected number of ailerons and flaps. This exam- able (e.g. with a switch), program the option fields as upward and downward deflections, the setting range
ple shows the display for setting a minimum, such as described below: is ±150%.
2AILE: Switch to the desired phase and press the value field
BACK PHASE 1 Airbrake SERVO to be set. In the example below, the phase titled
ACT INH CTL ON LANDING needs the AILE1 RATE changed to +023%:
NEXT
AILE1 AILE2 INC
RATE 000% 000% RES
DEC

200 Function menu | Airplane models - brakes

 BACK LANDING Airbrake SERVO
To bring up the flap setting screen, press the  NEXT  To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
ACT ON CTL SW 6
button at the right edge of the display. Use the same left of the display to return to the previous menu.
NEXT
procedure described above to adjust all value fields:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
AILE1 AILE2 INC BACK LANDING Airbrake SERVO
RATE 000% 000% RES ACT INH CTL ON
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX
DEC NEXT
Press
FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
RATE –035% –045% –045% –034% RES
The field highlights blue: DEC
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

BACK LANDING Brake SERVO

ACT EIN CTL SW 6
NEXT
When activating the selected control, to prevent sud-
INC
den deflection of the (brake) flaps adjusted, press
AILE1 AILE2
the  NEXT  button at the right of the display to go to
RATE 000% 000% RES
the AIRBREAK display screen. Use the same proce-
DEC
dure described above to incorporate a delay for the
deflection of the flaps:
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys BACK PHASE 1 Airbreak SERVO
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value within a range
of ±150%: AIRBRAKE DELAY 1.2s NEXT
BACK LANDING Airbrake SERVO INC

ACT ON CTL SW 6 RES

NEXT DEC

AILE1 AILE2 INC

RATE +023% 000% RES
DEC Tip
To smoothly retract the flaps, use the FUNCTION sub-
menu PHASE to set up a LANDING phase in addition to
Use the same procedure to adjust the other values
the NORMAL phase incorporated with a switching de-
for all remaining ailerons, including inboard ailerons.
lay. For the switch, use the same control used to trigger
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value the braking function.
back to the default.

Function menu | Airplane models - brakes 201

 Butterfly
Glider Braking System Adjustment
This submenu option is not available for certain model From the FUNCTION submenu, press the Butterfly Phase-Dependent Settings
types and configurations. icon: This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed
Use this menu to set a special breaking flap arrange-
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to
ment: the  crow or butterfly position.  In this braking
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
position, both ailerons  are moved slightly upward, Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Snap roll
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
and the flaps move downward as far as possible. By
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
means of an additional mixer (the “elevator curve” Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Butterfly
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
mixer described below), the elevator is trimmed so
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
that the flight speed does not change significantly in Press
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a
Trainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

comparison to the normal flight position. Otherwise,

The display shows different views depending on the different switch. To change the phases, activate the
there is a danger that the model will slow down too
selected number of ailerons and flaps. This exam- corresponding switch(es).
much and, after the brake system is retracted (for
ple shows the display for setting a minimum, such as
example to lengthen a landing approach that is too Programming
2AILE:
short), will crash or fall. The butterfly mixers described below are actuated by
BACK PHASE 1 Butterfly SERVO
the throttle/brake control stick, assigned by default to
ACT INH CTL ON
the CH1 input (or alternately by any other transmitter
NEXT
control element that is assigned to the CH1 input of
AILE1 AILE2 INC
the BASE submenu CTL Set).
RATE 000% 000% RES
In most cases, the selection is limited to preset con-
DEC
trol, and the airbrake is operated using the non-cen-
BUTTERFLY OFF +100% 000%
tralizing CH1 control stick:
This example shows the display for setting a maxi- BACK PHASE 1 CTL Set SERVO

This interaction of the flaps, aileron and elevator con- mun, such as 4AILE4FLAP:
trol the gliding angle  when approaching a landing. BACK PHASE 1 Butterfly SERVO CH 1. ST 1 NEXT
(The butterfly flap position is frequently used in sports ACT INH CTL ON CH 2. ST 2 +100% +100% INC
models instead of brake flaps or spoilers). NEXT CH 3. ST 3 +100% +100% RES

To adjust these settings, from the main display press FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC CH 4. ST 4 +100% +100% DEC

the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up RATE 000% 000% 000% 000% RES CTL OFFSET – Travel+
the FUNCTION submenu screen: DEC
000% 000%
The use of other control elements offers the possibil-
BUTTERFLY OFF +100% 000%
ity of being able to control the airbrakes alternatively
4.2V
through another accessory function control. This is
000 000 000:00.0 useful if the CH1 control stick is going to be used for
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 other functions.
Press
M-4 000 000
PHASE 1
Soarmaster
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

202 Function menu | Airplane models - butterfly

BUTTERFLY OFF Line Move the control element assigned to the input CH1, After the brake offset, which is necessary for the cor-
The selected offset or BUTTERFLY OFF point deter- (by default the throttle/brake control stick) to the po- rect operation of the flaps, set the RATE line of this
mines the control position at which the brake system sition at which the flaps are to be retracted or closed. display. If necessary, also in the following, with which
is retracted or closed, and it also determines the as- The current control position is numerically displayed percentage and in which direction your wing flaps
signed control element actuation direction (by default in white to the right of the value field: and, if appropriate, also the elevator, should deflect
the throttle control stick), when extending in the brake to "brake". In order for these settings to be effective
BACK PHASE 1 Butterfly SERVO
system: and retrievable with a switch, it is recommended to
ACT INH CTL ON
• The actuating direction of the CH1 control stick program the ACT and CTL line fields after setting the
NEXT
for actuating an electric drive, if present, is fixed preferable offset point.
AILE1 AILE2 INC
against the actuating direction for the extension of RATE 000% 000% RES
an airbrake system. DEC
Before setting these fields, switch to the appropriate
phase. In the example below, the phase titled LAND-
BUTTERFLY OFF +100% 000%
Notice ING is being programmed:
An inverted CH1 curve acts on the actuating Once the desired position is reached, transfer it to the • ACT Line (Active)
direction of the butterfly control as "reversed". value field by pressing the button: To activate  ON  or inhibit  INH  a specific phase,
Only the output positions are changed, not press to change the value fields.
BACK PHASE 1 Butterfly SERVO
the "correlated" fixed actuating directions. If this phase is assigned to a switch, this individu-
ACT INH CTL ON
ally turns on and off the effect of the selected con-
• The flaps are extended for brake offset values with NEXT
trol element on the flap position for specific phases
a plus sign ( + )  when the  corresponding control AILE1 AILE2 INC
when the value field is  ON .
element such as the throttle control stick is moved RATE 000% Press
000% RES

from front to rear toward the pilot. DEC • CTL Line (Control/Switch)

• The flaps are extended for brake offset values with BUTTERFLY OFF +100% +090% Use this field to assign a control or control switch
a minus sign ( - ) when the corresponding control to a specific phase mixer. Refer to the Control
The current white control position is transferred to the
element such as the throttle control stick is moved and Switch Assignment section (page 26) for in-
value field:
from back to front away from the pilot. formation on assigning switches. In the example
BACK PHASE 1 Butterfly SERVO below, the phase titled LANDING is assigned to
• If the offset point is not placed at the end of the
ACT INH CTL ON S5:
control travel, the remainder of the travel up to this
NEXT
stop is "free travel", i.e., the "free travel" does not BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO
AILE1 AILE2 INC
influence the flap mixer described below. ACT ON CTL SW 5
RATE 000% 000% RES
This free travel ensures that all brake settings are DEC
NEXT

at neutral even when there are slight deviations in AILE1 AILE2 INC
BUTTERFLY OFF +090% +090%
the end stop of the brake flap control. At that time, RATE 000% 000% RES

the effective control travel is automatically extend- DEC

ed to 100%. BUTTERFLY OFF +090% +090%

Function menu | Airplane models - butterfly 203

RATE Line Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value The green, vertical bar in the graphic display indicates
A symmetrical or an asymmetrical effect can be de- back to the default. the brake control position. The bar moves away from
fined for each flap pair. In order to be able to define To access the flaps setting screen, press the  NEXT  the edge of the graph as soon as the throttle/brake
upward and downward deflections, the setting range button at the right edge of the display using the pro- control stick is moved from its higher or lower end
is ±150%. cedure described above: point.
Switch to the desired phase and press the value field BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO
to be set. In the example below, the phase titled ACT ON CTL SW 5 ACT ON CTL SW 5
LANDING needs the AILE1 RATE changed to +034%: NEXT CURVE OFF NEXT

FLAP1 FLAP3 FLAP4 FLAP2 INC IN +100% INC

BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO
RATE –050% –075% –075% –050% RES OUT 000%
ACT ON CTL SW 5
DEC POINT H 000% DEC
NEXT
ELEV ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
AILE1 AILE2 INC BUTTERFLY OFF +090% 000%

RATE 000% 000% RES

Move the elevator curve toward the opposite stop as
DEC Tips for Visualizing the Braking Effect: needed, in direction of "brake active". The method for
Press
BUTTERFLY OFF +090% +090% Spread the flaps and, from the front, look at the surface adjusting the curve of this 7-point curve mixer follows
from above and below. The greater the projected sur- the same principles as those used for the curve mixer
The field highlights blue:
face of the protruding rudder, the greater the braking described in the FUNCTION submenu THR.CRV:
BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO effect.
BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO
ACT ON CTL SW 5
ACT ON CTL ON
NEXT Elevator Curve Display
CURVE ON NEXT
AILE1 AILE2 INC
To access the control position display screen, press IN +100% INC
RATE 000% 000% RES the ST OFF button at the bottom left of the display: OUT –025%
DEC
BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO POINT H –025% DEC
BUTTERFLY OFF +090% +090%
ELEV ST ON X-axis Y-axis ENT
ACT ON CTL SW 5
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys CURVE OFF NEXT
( pq ) to increase/decrease the value: IN +100% INC Attention
BACK LANDING Butterfly SERVO
OUT 000% The chosen setting should be tested and adjust-
ACT ON CTL SW 5 Press
POINT H 000% DEC ed at a sufficient height. Make sure that the mod-
ELEV
NEXT
ST OFF X-axis Y-axis ENT el does not become too slow when the brake
AILE1 AILE2 INC system is extended! If this occurs, there is risk that the
RATE +034% 000% RES
model will crash or fall after the brake system is retract-
DEC
ed (i.e. to lengthen a landing approach that is too short).
BUTTERFLY OFF +090% +090%

Use the same procedure to adjust the other values

for all remaining ailerons, including inboard ailerons.

204 Function menu | Airplane models - butterfly

To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
left of the display to return to the previous menu:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

Phase D/R,EXP THR.CRV Prog.MIX Snap roll

Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set Butterfly

Trainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

Function menu | Airplane models - butterfly 205

 V-Tail
V-Tail Actuation Adjustment
This submenu option is only available for model types different switch. To change the phases, activate the BACK PHASE 1 V-Tail SERVO
with a V-Tail configuration. corresponding switch(es).
ELEVATOR RUDDER
The elevator and rudder are controlled by two sepa-
BACK PHASE 1 SERVO A B A B INC
rately-articulated rudders arranged in a V-shape. The V-Tail

+075% +100% +100% +100% RES

coupling function for the rudder and elevator control
DEC
is automatically transferred from the program. ELEVATOR RUDDER
A B A B INC
To adjust these settings, from the main display press
the FUNCTION menu gear icon (blue “F”) to bring up +100% +100% +100% +100% RES
Use the same procedure to adjust the other value
the FUNCTION submenu screen: DEC
fields.
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
000% 000%

4.2V
back to the default.
Programming
000 000 000:00.0
mz Press the appropriate value field to be changed: Notice
0:01:23 000:00.0
M-2 000 000 Press
PHASE 1
BACK PHASE 1 V-Tail SERVO Remember that the mixing travel of the mixers is
Extra 360 cumulative with simultaneous control stick move-
BATT TIME
000
00: 01: 23
000
ELEVATOR RUDDER ment, and one or both servos may mechanically
A B A B INC collide. To prevent this, reduce the related set mixing
From the FUNCTION submenu, press the V-Tail icon: values.
+100% +100% +100% +100% RES
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM DEC
Press To save and exit, press the  BACK  button at the top
left of the display to return to the previous menu:
Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX The field highlights blue:
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
Press
BACK PHASE 1 V-Tail SERVO
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set

Phase D/R,EXPO THR.CRV Idle LOW Prog.MIX

Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail
ELEVATOR RUDDER
A B A B INC
Snap roll Aile diff Wing MIX Flap MIX Flap set
+100% +100% +100% +100% RES
Phase-Dependent Settings DEC
Airbrake TTrainer Logical sw Sequence V-Tail

This submenu allows for different phase-specific val-

ues to be programmed. Phase names are displayed Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
in green in the upper left side of the screen next to ( pq ) to increase/decrease the value:
the BACK button. Standard default naming for the
phases are usually displayed as NORMAL/PHASE
1. (Additional phases will be named numerically, e.g.
Phase 2, Phase 3, etc.) To define multiple phases,
refer to the FUNCTION submenu Phase section (page
120). Each new phase will need to be assigned to a

206 Function menu | Airplane model - V-tail

 Fixed-Wing Model Function Menus System Menus 

Personal notes 207

 ST mode
Model-Specific Basic Control Settings
There are four different control function possibilities boat control assignments on the control codes of air- Helicopter Model
to assign to the control sticks. Individual options are craft fractions in order to avoid conflicts after a model
MODE 1 (throttle right) MODE 2 (throttle left)
chosen based on country settings, pilot preferences, (type) change.
or the model type. Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick

To adjust these settings, from the main display press Land and Water Models

tail rotor

tail rotor
tail rotor

tail rotor
Roll

Roll
Roll

Roll
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up To maintain compatibility, it is recommended to uti-
the SYSTEM submenu screen: lize the same control mode for land and water models Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick
000% 000%
as with an aircraft model. Connect control function 1
MODE 3 (throttle right) MODE 4 (throttle left)
4.2V with the forward/backward function and the control
000 000 000:00.0 function 4 with the direction function: Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick

mz MODE 1 (throttle at right stick) MODE 2 (throttle at left stick)

tail rotor
tail rotor

tail rotor
000:00.0

tail rotor
0:01:23

Roll

Roll
Roll

Roll
Press
M-1 000 000
forward forward
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick

right

right
left

left
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

From the SYSTEM submenu, press the ST mode icon: back back
Fixed-Wing Model

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM MODE 3 (throttle at right stick) MODE 4 (throttle at left stick) MODE 1 (throttle right) MODE 2 (throttle left)
elevator full throttle full throttle elevator
forward forward

aileron

aileron
aileron

aileron
rudder

rudder
rudder

rudder
ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display

right
right

left
left
Press
Stick Cali MP3
elevator idle idle elevator
back back

MODE 3 (throttle right) MODE 4 (throttle left)

Drone Model
Mode 1 is the default: elevator full throttle full throttle elevator

MODE 1 (throttle/pitch right) MODE 2 (throttle/pitch left)

aileron

aileron
aileron

aileron

rudder
rudder

rudder
rudder
BACK ST mode

ST MODE 1 Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick

Front elevator idle idle elevator

Yaw

Yaw
Yaw

Yaw
Roll

Roll
Roll

Roll
RUDD AILE

Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick

Programming
To switch to a control mode different from default,
MODE 3 (throttle/pitch right) MODE 4 (throttle/pitch left)
ELEV THRO
press the value field in the ST MODE line until the
Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick number of the appropriate control mode appears. In
Notice the example below, the mode has been changed to
Yaw
Yaw

Yaw
Yaw
Roll

Roll
Roll

Roll

The mode setting selected in this menu does not ST Mode 3:

depend on the model memory and is valid across
Nick Motor / Pitch Motor / Pitch Nick
all of the model memories and model types
stored in the transmitter. Pay attention to the Car and
208 System menu - ST mode
 BACK ST mode

ST MODE: 3

FRONT

AILE RUDD

ELEV THRO

Press the BACK button at the top left to return to the

SYSTEM menu.

System menu - ST mode 209

 Warning
Model Memory Specific Warning Settings
Use this menu to turn off or on the five visual and BACK Warning The Power OFF time option allows users to specify
acoustic alarm triggers. Typically, only the throttle how long the transmitter should wait before begin-
servo (CH1-POS) is actively monitored. Other option Throttle Hold OFF
ning the shut-down process. The transmitter begins
settings in this menu include Throttle Hold, Throttle the shut-down process after three minutes of inac-
Throttle Cut OFF
Cut, Phase and Power OFF time. tivity, and will give a warning before turning itself off.
Thro Position ON
To adjust these settings, from the main display press Choose the time it takes to turn off after the warning
Phase OFF
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up (in seconds and minutes): OFF, 30 s, 1m, 5m, 10m,
Power OFF time OFF
the SYSTEM submenu screen: 20m, 30m and 60m. Press the value field in the Pow-
000% 000% To toggle between  ON  and  OFF , press the value er OFF time line to select:
4.2V field in the option line, as shown below: BACK Warning

000 000 000:00.0 BACK Warning

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 Throttle Hold ON

M-1 000 000

Press Throttle Hold OFF Throttle Cut REV
PHASE 1
Throttle Cut OFF Thro Position ON
MODELLNAME 1
Press
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 Thro Position ON Phase OFF
000 000
Phase OFF Power OFF time 1m
From the SYSTEM submenu, press the Warning icon:
Power OFF time OFF
Press the  BACK  button at the top left to return to the
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
SYSTEM menu:
BACK Warning

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM

ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
Throttle Hold ON
Press Throttle Cut OFF
Stick Cali MP3 ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
Thro Position ON
Phase OFF Stick Cali MP3

Power OFF time OFF

The Throttle Cut line provides the  REV  option:

Notice
BACK Warning
These settings are model memory specific. Re-
set these options individually for each model
Throttle Hold ON
memory.
Throttle Cut REV
Thro Position ON
Phase OFF
Power OFF time OFF

When the Throttle Cut is active, the  REV  option acti-

vates the option in reverse, as though the Throttle Cut
is switched off.

210 System menu - Warning

Personal notes 211
 Etc. Set
Miscellaneous Transmitter Settings
This menu has miscellaneous user preference set- Touch Unlock Line BACK CLR ABCDEFGHIJKLMN

tings. Most notably is the Touch unlock option, al- Current Unlock Code A B C D E F
BACK Etc. Set
lowing users to change the key lock deactivation G H I J K L
Touch unlock >>
from the standard method (simultaneously pushing New Unlock Code M N O P Q R
Battery type LIPO
the ESC/ENT keys), to a lock code password. Users S T U V W X
Batt warning 3.6V INC
can also change battery type and low-battery warning Y Z _ << <
Power on Melody ON RES
Trim lock =
voltage, voice and vario volume as well as the choice
DEC OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL
to have a power-on melody play when turning on the Voice Volume 03 NULL

transmitter. Vario Volume 03

Press the  <  button to delete a single character, press
To adjust these settings, from the main display press To set an individual password press the  >>  button in the  <<  button to clear all characters in the blue input
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up the Touch unlock line: field. Press the  =  button to transfer the characters to
the SYSTEM submenu screen: the New Unlock Code field:
BACK Etc. Set
000% 000%

Touch unlock >> BACK CLR

4.2V Current Unlock Code A B C D E F
Battery type LIPO
000 000 000:00.0 Press G H I J K L
Batt warning 3.6V INC
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 Power on Melody ON RES
New Unlock Code M N O P Q R
Press ABCDEFGHIJKLMN S T U V W X
M-1 000 000
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1 Vario Volume 03
Trim lock Y Z _ << < =
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL
000 000
The red keyboard input menu opens:
From the SYSTEM submenu, press the Etc. Set icon: • Locking the Display
BACK CLR
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM Current Unlock Code A B C D E F To lock the display (from anywhere except the
G H I J K L
red keyboard input menu display) simultaneous-
New Unlock Code M N O P Q R
ly press the ESC/ENT keys for about one second
ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
until a short beep sounds. Release the keys. The
S T U V W X
the display touch-function is locked; the transmit-
Stick Cali MP3
Press Trim lock Y Z _ << < =
ter now will only react to the lateral buttons or con-
OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL
trol elements used to control the model.
Refer to the Model Name section of the BASE sub- Notice
menu Model Sel (page 42) for more information on
Remember the password and/or write it down
the red keyboard input menu.
and keep it in a safe place. Locked transmit-
Enter a password with a maximum of 14 characters. ters will need to be sent to the Graupner Ser-
The entered characters will appear in the blue input vice Center for reset.
field above the keyboard:
• Locking the Display and Trim
Before or after setting a lock code, press the  ON 
/  OFF  value field in Trim Lock column in the low-
er part of the display, to turn the option on or off:
212 System menu - ETC set
 BACK CLR BACK BACK CLR
Current Unlock Code A B C D E F Input Unlock Code A B C D E F Current Unlock Code A B C D E F
G H I J K L ABCDEFGHIJKLMN G H I J K L G H I J K L
New Unlock Code M N O P Q R Status M N O P Q R New Unlock Code M N O P Q R
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN S T U V W X Unlocked S T U V W X ABCDEFGHIJKLMN S T U V W X
Trim Lock Y Z _ << < = RFID Y Z _ << < = Trim lock Y Z _ << < =
AAAAA8A2 4E6B
ON CAPS NUM SPECIAL CAPS NUM SPECIAL OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL

• Unlocking the Display and Trim If the password is correct, the Status value field Press the  =  button to transfer the blank content of
To unlock the display and trim, simultaneous- message will change from Locked to Unlocked, the blue input field into the New Unlock Code val-
ly press the ESC/ENT keys for about one second and the transmitter’s display is available for imme- ue field. The field is now empty; the password pre-
until a short beep sounds and the unlock display diate use. Press the BACK button at the top left viously transfered in has been deleted:
appears: of the display to exit the locking menu.
BACK CLR
If the password is incorrect, the Status value field Current Unlock Code A B C D E F
BACK
Input Unlock Code A B C D E F
message will change from Locked to Mismatch: G H I J K L

G H I J K L BACK New Unlock Code M N O P Q R

Pr
Input Unlock Code A B C D E F es
Status M N O P Q R S T U V W X s

Locked S T U V W X
ABCDE G H I J K L
Trim lock Y Z _ << < =
M N O P Q R
RFID Y Z _ << < =
Status
OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL
AAAAA8A2 4E6B
Mismatch S T U V W X
CAPS NUM SPECIAL
RFID Y Z _ << < = • Deleting the Password
Enter the password into the blue input field and AAAAA8A2 4E6B
CAPS NUM SPECIAL Delete the password in one of two ways:
press the  =  button: Variant 1
Re-enter a different password and press the   = 
BACK ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
button. Repeat this process until the Status field Press the  =  button to transfer the blank content
Input Unlock Code A B C D E F
changes to Unlocked. If the password cannot of the blue input field into the New Unlock Code
G H I J K L
be correctly entered, send the transmitter to the value field. The field is now empty; the password
Status M N O P Q R
Graupner Service Center for reset. previously saved has been deleted.
Pr
Locked S T U V W X es
s Variant 2
_ • Exiting the Menu Without Setting a Password
RFID Y Z << < = Press the  CLR  button in the upper side of the dis-
BEFORE pressing the BACK button, which will
AAAAA8A2 4E6B
CAPS NUM SPECIAL play:
save the password entered, it is possible to delete
The entered characters transfer to the Input Un- the password already transfered to the New Un- BACK CLR
A B C D E F
lock Code value field: lock Code value field. Current Unlock Code
Press G H I J K L
The unwanted password is entered in the New Un- ABCDEFGHIJKLMN

lock Code value field, as shown below: New Unlock Code M N O P Q R

S T U V W X
Trim lock Y Z _ << < =
OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL

System menu - ETC set 213

The fields are now empty; the password previously BACK Etc. Set Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
saved has been deleted. Touch unlock >>
( pq ) to select the appropriate value:
BACK CLR Battery type NIMH BACK Etc. Set
Current Unlock Code A B C D E F Batt warning 4.8V INC Touch unlock >>
G H I J K L Power on Melody ON RES Battery type NIMH
New Unlock Code M N O P Q R Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Batt warning 4.6V INC
S T U V W X Vario Volume 03 Power on Melody ON RES
Trim lock Y Z _ << < = Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
OFF CAPS NUM SPECIAL Vario Volume 03
back to the default.
Press the  BACK  button to save and exit. Batt Warning Line Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default.
Battery Type Line Use this setting to program the warning threshold of
Check the transmitter voltage at any time by pressing
To enter or change the type of power supply battery, the display depending on the battery type selected
the red  mz  in the center of the main display menu to
update the setting in the Battery type line. The trans- in the line above. Nickel–metal hydride batteries can
bring up the following data display:
mitter can run on either a four-cell nickel–metal hy- be set, in increments of 0.1V, between 4.5 and 5.5V.
Lithium-ion/lithium polymer batteries can be set, in in- BACK CLR AUTO LOAD ON
dride battery (NIMH) or a 1s lithium-ion battery (LIPO).
To make any necessary changes to the setting, press crements of 0.1V, between 3.4 and 4.2 V. Do not set TX VOLT 00 RX VOLT 00
value too low or there will not be sufficient time to land 3.6V 3.7V
the value field in the Battery type line:
the model after a battery warning. STRENGTH 00 STRENGTH ALARM
BACK Etc. Set
To make any necessary changes to the setting, press 000% ON
Touch unlock >>
the value field of the Batt warning line: ESC STR 00 ESC VOLT 00
Battery type LIPO 000.0A 00.0V
BACK Etc. Set
Batt warning 3.6V INC
Press Touch unlock >>
Power on Melody ON RES
Tip
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Battery type NIMH
Batt warning 4.8V INC
In a special calibration menu that can be opened by
Vario Volume 03
Power on Melody ON RES
touching the voltage display in the main display menu:
The field highlights blue: Voice Volume
Press
03 NULL DEC
000%
Press
000%

4.2V
BACK Etc. Set Vario Volume 03

Touch unlock >> 000 000 000:00.0

The field highlights blue:
Battery type LIPO 0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
BACK Etc. Set
Batt warning 3.6V INC M-1 000 000
PHASE 1
Power on Melody ON RES Touch unlock >>
MODELLNAME 1
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Battery type NIMH BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000

Vario Volume 03 Batt warning 4.8V INC

Power on Melody ON RES
The voltage display and battery warning threshold of
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC
can be fine-tuned using a precision voltmeter. Press
( pq ) to select the appropriate value: Vario Volume 03
to highlight blue the Cali. Data column value field and
press the  +2 ,  +10 ,  -2  or  -10  buttons to incremen-
214 System menu - ETC set
tally increase/decrease the value in the field: BACK Etc. Set BACK Etc. Set

BACK Touch unlock >> Touch unlock >>

Battery type NIMH Battery type NIMH

TX Volt Cali. Data +2 Batt warning 4.6V INC Batt warning 4.6V INC

3.85V 33434 +10 Power on Melody OFF RES Power on Melody OFF RES

–2 Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Voice Volume 05 NULL DEC

–10 Vario Volume 03 Vario Volume 03

SAVE
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value To adjust the volume using a switch, press the  NULL 
Press the  SAVE  and  BACK  buttons save the settings back to the default. field. An active menu will appear. Assign a switch by
and exit to the main display menu. moving the desired switch once active menu appears:
Voice Volume Line
BACK Etc. Set
Power on Melody Line Use this setting to adjust the volume of the acoustic
Use this setting to turn on or off the series of beeps signals and voice triggers. Touch unlock >>
Select
that plays when the transmitter is switched on. Press the value field in the Voice Volume line: Battery type NIMH
NO
Press the value field in the Power on Melody line: Batt warning 4.6V INC
BACK Etc. Set CLR
Touch unlock >> Power on Melody OFF RES
BACK Etc. Set
Battery type NIMH Voice Volume 05 NULL DEC
Touch unlock >>
Battery type NIMH Batt warning 4.6V INC Vario Volume 03
Press
Batt warning 4.6V INC Power on Melody OFF RES
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC
Press  NO  to cancel or  CLR  to return the switch to
Power on Melody ON RES
the default value (NULL).
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Vario Volume 03

Vario Volume
Press
03 Vario Volume Line
The field highlights blue:
Use this setting to adjust the volume of the Vario
The field highlights blue: BACK Etc. Set
announcements by following the same settings de-
BACK Etc. Set Touch unlock >> scribed in the Voice Volume Line section (exception
Touch unlock >> Battery type NIMH being there is no switch assignment available):
Battery type NIMH Batt warning 4.6V INC
BACK Etc. Set
Batt warning 4.6V INC Power on Melody OFF RES
Touch unlock >>
Power on Melody ON RES Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC
Battery type NIMH
Voice Volume 03 NULL DEC Vario Volume 03
Batt warning 4.6V INC
Vario Volume 03
Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Power on Melody OFF
Press
RES

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys ( pq ) to increase/decrease the appropriate volume. Voice Volume 05 NULL DEC

( pq ) to toggle between  OFF  and  ON : OFF = No Sound; the volume increases incrementally Vario Volume 03
up to 05 = Loudest:
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
back to the default. Press BACK  to return to the
SYSTEM menu.
System menu - ETC set 215
 Display
Transmitter Display Settings
Use this menu to enter display settings such as screen Brightness Line Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value
brightness, turning on/off the back-lighting, adjusting Use this option to make the transmitter displays easi- back to the default value (15).
the touchscreen sensitivity and turning on/off the out- er to read in all weather conditions and temperatures.
door display function. Personalize the radio face by Notice
To make any necessary changes to the setting, press
changing the color of the Graupner logo. This menu If the transmitter's supply voltage has reached
the value field of the Brightness line:
also shows the transmitter’s RFID number. the warning threshold set in the SYSTEM sub-
To adjust these settings, from the main display press BACK Display menu Etc. Set, the display brightness will be re-
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up Brightness 15 duced to 05 to save energy. After charging the battery,
the SYSTEM submenu screen: Backlight off OFF reset the desired value in the Brightness field again.
Press
000% 000% Touch sense 1 INC

4.2V
Logo color DEFAULT RES Backlight Off Line
DEC
000 000 000:00.0
Outdoor disp OFF Use this option to specify how long the background
RFID AAAAA876 lighting remains on when the transmitter is idle. This is
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Press The field highlights blue: an important battery saving feature.
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 Choose from the following settings (in seconds and
MODELLNAME 1 Display
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
BACK minutes): OFF (backlight always on), 10s, 30s, 1m
000 000 Brightness 15 and 3m.
From the SYSTEM submenu, press the Display icon: Backlight off OFF
To make any necessary changes to the setting, press
Touch sense 1 INC
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM the value field of the Backlight off line:
Logo color DEFAULT RES
Outdoor disp OFF DEC BACK Display

RFID AAAAA876 Brightness 20

ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display

Backlight off OFF

Press Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys Touch sense 1 INC
Stick Cali MP3
( pq ) to select the appropriate value. The brightness Logo color
Press
DEFAULT RES
can be adjusted in increments of 1 from 01 - 20: Outdoor disp OFF DEC
BACK Display RFID AAAAA876

Brightness 20
The field highlights blue:
Backlight off OFF
Touch sense 1 INC BACK Display

Logo color DEFAULT RES Brightness 20

Outdoor disp OFF DEC Backlight off OFF
RFID AAAAA876 Touch sense 1 INC
Logo color DEFAULT RES
Outdoor disp OFF DEC
RFID AAAAA876

Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys

( pq ) to select the appropriate value:

216 System menu - Display

 BACK Display BACK Display Logo color Line
Brightness 20 Brightness 20 Use this option to personalize the transmitter face by
Backlight off 30s Backlight off 30s changing the color of the Graupner logo. Six fun col-
Touch sense 1 INC Touch sense 1 INC ors are available to suit personal preference.
Logo color DEFAULT RES Logo color DEFAULT RES To make any necessary changes to the setting, press
Outdoor disp OFF DEC Outdoor disp OFF DEC the value field of the Logo color line:
RFID AAAAA876 RFID AAAAA876 BACK Display

Brightness 20
Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
30s
back to the default value (OFF). ( pq ) to select the appropriate value: Backlight off

Touch sense 3 INC

Display
Notice BACK
Logo color DEFAULT RES
Brightness 20
A display that has gone completely dark can be Outdoor disp OFF DEC
30s Press
illuminated again by pressing one of the arrow Backlight off
RFID AAAAA876
3 INC
keys ( pq ) to the right of the display. Touch sense

Logo color DEFAULT RES The field highlights blue:

Outdoor disp OFF DEC
Touch Sense Line BACK Display
RFID AAAAA876
20
Use this option to adjust the reactivity of the transmit- Brightness

ter’s touch screen. The lower the number in this field, Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value Backlight off 30s

the more sensitive the touch-response will be. Raise back to the default value (1). Touch sense 3 INC

the field value if the touch screen is too sensitive and Logo color DEFAULT RES

over-reactionary. Outdoor disp OFF DEC

To make any necessary changes to the setting, press RFID AAAAA876

the value field of the Touch sense line: Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons or the arrow keys
BACK Display
( pq ) to select the appropriate value. Choose from
Brightness 20 the following colors: DEFAULT, RED, GREEN, BLUE,
Backlight off 30s PINK, YELLOW and SKYBLUE:
Touch sense 1 INC
BACK Display
Logo color DEFAULT RES
Press Brightness 20
Outdoor disp OFF DEC
Backlight off 30s
RFID AAAAA876
Touch sense 3 INC

The field highlights blue: Logo color PINK RES

Outdoor disp OFF DEC
RFID AAAAA876

Press the   RES  button to reset the changed value

back to the default value (DEFAULT = blue).

System menu - Display 217

Outdoor Disp Line RFID Line
Use this option to maintain the legibility of the display To determine the radio frequency identification of the
screens even in bright surroundings or sunlight. By transmitter, refer to the final line of the Display screen:
turning this option on, legibility changes to “high con- Display
BACK
trast.”
Brightness 20
To activate or deactivate this function, press the ON Backlight off 30s
or OFF button in the Outdoor disp line: Touch sense 3 INC
BACK Display Logo color PINK RES
Brightness 20 Outdoor disp ON DEC

Backlight off 30s RFID AAAAA876

Touch sense 3 INC

Press This identification is specific to each transmitter,
Logo color PINK RES
is only issued once per transmitter, and cannot be
Outdoor disp OFF DEC
changed. This ID is transmitted to the receiver during
RFID AAAAA876
the HoTT-synchronization process, allowing it to al-
The field value changes to the opposite function: ways identify the radio signals of its bound transmitter.

BACK Display Press BACK  to return to the SYSTEM menu.

Brightness 20
Backlight off 30s
Touch sense 3 INC
Logo color PINK RES
Outdoor disp ON DEC
RFID AAAAA876

Notice
Activating the Outdoor Disp option will change
the display screen shown in the TELEMETRY
menu. Refer to the Telemetry Data Display
section for more information (page 225).

218 System menu - Display

Personal notes 219
 Stick Cali
Control Stick Center Position Calibration
If the center position of the self-centering control BACK PHASE 1 Servo
Regardless of the number of self-centering control
stick (controls 1 - 4) does not precisely correspond to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST
stick functions available on the transmitter, if these
000% control travel, it can be checked and corrected. checks produce four 000% results and eight 100%
Maintaining 000% control travel is important for prop- results, then the transmitter's control sticks are op-
er flight and function of the servo and controls. timally calibrated. Terminate this process and then,
To adjust these settings, from the main display press if necessary, delete the dummy model memory just
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% created.
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
the SYSTEM submenu screen: If the control sticks are not optimally calibrated, open
000% 000% If all four of the transmitter’s control stick functions the SYSTEM submenu Stick Cali. This display allows
4.2V are NOT self-centering, the graph bars show current users to cycle through the four stick lever positions
000:00.0 setting percentages for control stick control functions for calibration, starting with the neutral position of the
000 000
which are not self-centering (traditionally CH1). For right control stick system:
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0
Touch
example, if the CH1 control stick is in its Idle LOW BACK Stick Cali
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 position, the display would appear follows: << RIGHT >>
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 BACK PHASE 1 Servo
000 000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST VERTI. SET
From the SYSTEM submenu, press the Stick Cali –078%
icon: HORIZ.

BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM +002%

–100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000% The blue dot shown in the above graphic indicates the
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%

ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display stick position to be adjusted.

Stick Cali MP3
Press
To calibrate the self-centering control stick, select a
free model memory slot in the BASE submenu Model
Sel to make a dummy model for calibration purposes
only. Model type is irrelevant; it is only important that
no trimming or programming has yet been performed.
Open the BASE submenu Servo by simultaneously
One at a time, put each control stick into their four
possible limit positions without exerting force at the
limit position. In each of these eight possible limit
positions, the (side dependent) indication for exactly
-100% or +100% should be displayed. For example,
if Control 2 is at its right limit and the other three other
control stick functions are in their respective middle
positions, then the servo display should appear as
follows:
BACK PHASE 1
The horizontal and vertical percentages displayed in
the VERTI and HORIZ column value fields indicate the
current stick position.
Although the right-hand stick is located exactly in the
middle of its path (due to its horizontal self-centering),
the example above shows an adjustment of +002%.
Servo

pressing the arrow keys ( pq ) on the left of the dis- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TEST

play.
If all four of the transmitter's control stick functions
are self-centering, this display should ideally look like
the example shown here:
000% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%
-100% 000% 000% 000% 000% 000%

220 System menu - Joystick calibration

Vertically, the right stick is exemplary located on a is incorrectly adjusted, the results can have the fol- Notice
randomly inclined position in the direction of the pilot lowing result:
(due to its non-self-centering characteristic as a CH1 If the calibration of any of the control sticks is off
BACK Stick Cali
control stick). or incorrect in any way, the entire process will
<< RIGHT >>
Before tapping the  SET  button on the right, the right have to be repeated.
control stick, which in this example is not self-center-
VERTI. SET
ing, should be moved to the mechanical center: Press BACK  to return to the SYSTEM menu.
+102%
BACK Stick Cali HORIZ. BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM
<< RIGHT >> +098%

VERTI.
Press the  SET  button at the right edge of the display ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
SET
–001%
to transfer the 100% position to the memory; the se-
lected dot then switches to the opposite corner: Stick Cali MP3
HORIZ.
+002% BACK Stick Cali

<< RIGHT >>

As soon as this placement is achieved, press the  SET 
button at the right edge of the display:
VERTI SET
BACK Stick Cali +100%
<< RIGHT >> HORIZ
+100%
VERTI. SET
–001%
Use the same calibration procedure for the opposite
Press
corner; the display screen will change color and posi-
HORIZ.
tioning for left control stick calibration:
+002%
BACK Stick Cali
The neutral position of the right control stick is then << LEFT >>
calibrated, and the blue dot moves to the left, top cor-
ner of the grid:
VERTI. SET
BACK Stick Cali +001%
<< RIGHT >> HORIZ.
–002%
VERTI. SET
000%
Use the same calibration procedure for calibrating the
left control stick.
HORIZ.
000%

Move the right control stick to the front left corner

without exerting pressure at the limit. If the transmitter

System menu - Joystick calibration 221

 MP3
 MP3 Player Program
The MP3 Player menu can be accessed through the Four quick-controls are assigned to the keys on either BACK A A
SYSTEM submenu in addition to a shortcut icon side of the display screen: ALBUM TITLE
on the main display screen. For ease of use, four • ENT = Start / Stop 01/04 01/23
quick-controls are assigned to the ESC / ENT keys File not found
• ( pq ) = Volume Control
and the ( pq ) ( t u ) arrow keys on either side of the
• ( t u ) = Forwards / Backwards
00: 18 03: 33

display screen.
To adjust these settings, from the main display press • ESC = Exit – +
the SYSTEM menu gear icon (purple “S”) to bring up
the SYSTEM submenu screen: Notice If no title starts and the text "File not found" is shown
000% 000% Note that for technical reasons NO data repre- in the display, the transmitter did not find a suitable
4.2V
sentation is possible during the reproduction of MP3 file on the inserted SD card, or there is no SD
MP3 data. card in the card slot.
000 000 000:00.0
Insert a memory card, or remove the card from the
0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 The following menu display appears whether or not an
transmitter and use a computer to check the SD
M-1
Press SD card with MP3 files has been inserted:
card’s content directory. The MP3 files may only be
000 000
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1
BACK A A saved within the MP3 directory or one MP3 directory
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000 ALBUM TITLE sub-folder. If these directories are empty, copy suit-
00/00 00/00 able MP3 files into the directory.
From the SYSTEM submenu, press the MP3 icon:
Use an SD card loaded with MP3 files in the MP3 di-
BACK BASE FUNCTION SYSTEM 00: 00 00: 00
rectory, turn on the transmitter, and try playback again:
BACK A A
ST mode Warning Etc. Set Display
– +
ALBUM TITLE
01/04 01/23
Press the large triangle “play” button or push the ENT
Stick Cali MP3
button to start playing the first MP3 file of Album 1. Tralala 1
Press The file starts playing immediately, but the album 00: 18 03: 33

number, title and file information may appear after a

Or use the shortcut MP3 icon in the main display: slight delay depending, on the size of the MP3 file. – +
000% 000%
Press
4.2V
BACK A A Album 1 will automatically play until stopped. To stop
ALBUM TITLE playback, press the stop/pause button or press the
000:00.0 00/00 00/00
ENT button on the right side of the display.
000 000

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 Press

M-1 000 000 00: 00 00: 00
PHASE 1
MODELLNAME 1
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23
000 000
– +

222 System menu - MP3 player

Pressing the vertical “pause” button will stop play- decrease circles) changes gradually from red-orange BACK A A
back: (louder) to yellow (softer) in half-circle increments: ALBUM TITLE

BACK A A RÜCK
BACK A A
03/04 01/16
ALBUM TITLE
ALBUM TITLE Model Blues
01/04 01/23 01/04 01/23 00: 00 00: 00

Tralala
Press 1 Tralala 1
00: 18 03: 33
01: 53 03: 33 – +

– + – + Title
Pressing the triangular “play” button will start play- To change or select a track, press one of the two for-
Pressing the ( p ) up-arrow key on the left of the dis-
back: ward/back buttons on either side of the track display,
play or pressing the gray dot with the ( + ) plus-sign
or press one of the ( t u ) arrow keys to the right of
in the lower right increases the volume in half-circle
BACK A A
the display:
ALBUM TITLE increments from yellow to red-orange:
01/04 01/23 BACK A A
BACK A A
ALBUM TITLE
Tralala 1 ALBUM TITLE
03/04 01/16
00: 45 03: 33 01/04 01/23
Model Blues
Tralala 1
00: 00 00: 00
– + 01: 59 03: 33
Press Press

Turning off the transmitter will also stop playback. – +

– +
During playback, exit the submenu at any time by
pressing the BACK button or by pressing the ESC To start playback of a selected track, either press the
Album triangle button in the middle of the screen, or push the
button to the left of the display. Playback will contin-
ue and the transmitter can be used without restriction. Change to the next album by pressing the right album ENT key to the right of the display:
Concurrently recording parallel data files (data-logs) is selection field at the top of the display: BACK A A
not possible while MP3 player is in use. BACK A A ALBUM TITLE

ALBUM TITLE
03/04 05/16
Tip 01/04 01/23
Press Flight Time
Activated voice triggers will be displayed in the MP3 file Tralala 1 00: 00
Press
00: 00

folder that is being played. 01: 59 03: 33

Volume
To reduce the volume, press the ( q ) down-arrow key
to the left of the display or press the gray dot with the
( - ) minus-sign in the lower left corner of the display.
Each time the button/key is pressed, the color of one
of the three small circles (above the volume increase/
– +
– +
Notices
Conversely, move to the previous album by pressing • Songtitles are not always the same as MP3
the left album selection field. filenames. Often titles are determined by
Album and title information are updated in their re- corresponding metadata of the MP3 file.
spective fields as soon as an album or track is
changed:
System menu - MP3 player 223
  System Menu

• The blue title display field is only equipped

to show characters from the Latin alpha-
bet. If titles contain even one character
from another alphabet, the title field will
remain empty.
Within an album, tracks are played in al-
phabetical order, or numerical order if the
related information is contained within the
file name.
• The number of titles on the selected album
is calculated from the number of MP3 files
per directory.

Control Panel
Advance forward to the next title by press-
ing the right selection double-arrow but-
ton and move back to the previous title by pressing
the left double-arrow button. This is similar to corre-
sponding buttons standard on all music players. Ad-
ditionally, use the selection arrow keys ( t u ) on the
right of the display to perform the same forward/back-
ward procedure.
Press the green curved-arrow field to cycle through
the following three options:
Album Repeat: The selected album is continu-
ously looped until manually stopped or the
transmitter is turned off.

Title Repeat: The current title continuously

looped until manually stopped or the transmitter
is turned off.

No Repeat: Playback automatically stops at the

end of the current title.

224 System menu - MP3 player

 Telemetry Data Display

The transmitter’s main display is used for both oper- Then the display will appear as follows: Once the sensors search is complete, the SRCH but-
ating functions and to graphically display telemetry ton will change to a NEXT button:
BACK R - 58dB T - 52dB
data. Some of the telemetry data, such as battery 3.0 3.0
BACK NEXT R - 58dB T - 52dB
voltage, appears on the main display. Additional te- 3.0 3.0

lemetry information can be found in the TELEMETRY VOLT

5.2V
L-VOLT
5.0V
menu display. 0
25
6.0 0 6.0 VOLT
5.2V
L-VOLT
5.0V
Q 100%
To view telemetry data, press the TELEMETRY icon S 075%
0
25
6.0 0 6.0

Q 100%
TEMP
(blue “T”) to bring up the TELEMETRY display screen: +26°C L 0020ms S 075%
000% 000%
-20 70 TEMP
+26°C L 0020ms
-20 70
4.2V If at least one sensor has been connected to the re-
000:00.0 ceiver before the receiver is switched on, the transmit-
000 000

ter scans the sensor(s) for approx. 30 seconds. The Tip

0:01:23 mz 000:00.0 Refer to the RECEIVER section (page 226) for more
SRCH button appears in the upper left corner of the
M-1 000 000
PHASE 1 display during the search process: information on this display.
MODELLNAME 1
Press
BATT TIME 00: 01: 23 BACK SRCH R - 58dB T - 52dB
000 000
3.0 3.0 Notice
The Telemetry display has no submenu icons but has Functions of this menu operate independently
VOLT L-VOLT
differing screens depending on system settings. By 5.2V 5.0V from settings in the RX SELECT line of the BASE
default, the receiver display appears: 0
25
6.0 0 6.0
submenu Telemetry:
Q 100%

BACK NEXT Receiver

TEMP
S 075%
BACK Telemetry
RX TX +26°C L 0020ms
-20 70 RX SELECT RX1 ALWAYS
-41dB -62dB SETTING & DATA VIEW >>
VOLT Min V TEMP If the receiver is not within range or goes undetected, SENSOR >> INC
04.1V 04.1V +032°C then no search button or field strength indicators ( ) RF STATUS VIEW >> RES
QUA STR L-PACK will be visible along the top of the display screen: >>
VOICE TRIGGER DEC
100% 100% 2000ms BACK R 00dB T 00dB
3.0 3.0
Note this display will only appear if the Outdoor disp
function of the SYSTEM submenu Display is turned VOLT L-VOLT
Sensor(s)
00.0V 00.0V
ON . If no sensors are connected to the receiver and 0 6.0 0 6.0 A receiver operated by telemetry can support a com-
25
the Outdoor disp option is OFF (as shown below): Q 000% bination of up to four connected sensors.
Display
TEMP
S 000%
Sensor data is only displayed to the graphs described
BACK 000°C
-20 70
L 0000ms
below  if they are properly connected to before the
Brightness 15
receiver is turned on, after all involved components
Backlight off OFF Turn on the receiver, or bind a receiver to the active have been switched on and after all back channels are
Touch sense 1 INC model memory. Refer to the BASE submenu TX ctl recognized by the transmitter.
Logo color DEFAULT RES (page 68) for more information on binding.
Outdoor disp OFF DEC
RFID AAAAA876

Telemetry data display 225

Also make sure the relevant receiver is bound in the BACK NEXT QUA 100 RPM 000000 TEMP Temperature (in Celsius) of the current-
BIND ON/OFF line of the BASE submenu Tx ctl, the m/s -000.1m/s m/3s 000m/3s ly operating receiver
transmitter is set in the TX OUT SET line of the same
submenu, and that the receiver selected is turned on
CURRENT 40.0 CAPACITY Q Signal package quality (in percent) of
in the RX SELECT line of the BASE submenu Telem- 20.0 60.0 0000m the data sent from the transmitter arriv-
etry. If another receiver has been selected, only the VOLT ing at the receiver
00.0V
data from the selected receiver is displayed in the Re- S Signal strength (in percent) of the
ceiver display.
000.0A 0 80.0 00000mAh ALT
transmission from the transmitter arriv-
Sensors  in the SETTING & DATA VIEW line of the ing at the receiver
BASE submenu Telemetry will only respond under Tip L Shows the longest time (in millisec-
the above prerequisites corresponding to the instruc- Further information on the modules cited below can be onds) data packets are lost during a
tions for the respective sensor. found in the Appendix (page 234) and on the Internet transmission from the transmitter to
To switch between the displays of all automatically at www.graupnerusa.com. receiver
activated sensors, press the NEXT button at the top
edge of the display: RECEIVER Tip
BACK NEXT R - 58dB T - 52dB BACK NEXT R - 58dB T - 52dB
For additional information on the values mentioned
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 above, refer to the Detailed explanations of the  SET-
Press TINGS & DATA VIEW section (page 101).
VOLT L-VOLT VOLT L-VOLT
5.2V 5.0V 5.2V 5.0V
0 6.0 0 6.0 0 6.0 0 6.0
25
Q 100%
25
Q 100%
GENERAL MODULE
S 075% S 075%
TEMP TEMP BACK NEXT QUA 100
+26°C L 0020ms +26°C L 0020ms 100000 15000
ALT
-20 70 -20 70

BACK NEXT QUA 100

This display graph shows data from the SETTINGS RPM mAh
000000rpm 00000mAh
100000 15000
ALT & DATA VIEW line of the BASE submenu Telemetry. 0
40.0
200000 0
150.0
30000
0000m

RPM mAh BATT AMP

000000rpm 00000mAh
0 200000 0 30000
0000m Value Explanation 0
00.0V
80.0 0
000.0A
300.0
40.0 150.0

R - dB Decibel level (in percent) of the trans-

BATT AMP mitter signal arriving at the RECEIVER BACK NEXT m/s -000.2m/s m/3s 000m/3s
00.0V 000.0A 80.0 4.2V
0 80.0 0
T - dB
300.0
Decibel level (in percent) of the receiver 40.0 40.0
BAT1
Continue pressing NEXT to view subsequent sensor signal arriving at the TRANSMITTER 1-BAT-2
00.0V 00.0V 3.0V
displays: VOLT Power level (in volts) of the currently 0
70
0
3.7
3.8
3.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
50
operating receiver power supply 25 25

1-TEMP-2 0 100
FUEL
L-VOLT Lowest operating voltage (in volts) of -20
-020°C -020°C
-20
00000ml

the receiver power supply since the

last startup Press NEXT to switch between screen displays.

226 Telemetry data display

These screens display the data of a General Engine (No. 33612 and 33613) connected to the model from ELECTRIC AIR MODULE
Module (order No. 33610) or a General Air Module up to two batteries (BAT-1 and BAT-2). They also
BACK NEXT QUA 100 RPM 000000
(order No. 33611) that may be connected to the re- show the corresponding temperature: the arc’s left
m/s -000.1m/s m/3s 000m/3s
ceiver. Further information on the modules  can be side shows sensor 1 data and the arc’s right side
found in the Appendix (page 234) and on the Internet shows sensor 2 data. CURRENT 40.0 CAPACITY

at www.graupnerusa.com. The bar graph in the top right of the display shows the 20.0 60.0 0000m
Depending on the module configuration with addi- current cell voltages of up to six lithium polymer bat- VOLT
00.0V
tional sensors, the following data can be permanently tery cells. Below that in the bottom right of the display
shown on the display: is a graph showing (in milliliters) the cumulative fuel 000.0A 0 80.0 00000mAh ALT

consumption measured by a sensor connected to the

1. Display BACK NEXT Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7
module. 80.0
4.2V

At the top edge of the screen, the QUA line shows 40.0 40.0 BAT1
(in percent) the quality of the signal coming from the 1-BAT-2 3.0V

transmitter. Value Explanation 0

00.0V 00.0V
0
3.7 3.8 3.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7
70
The graphic at the top left shows (in rotations per min- 1-BAT-2 Battery 1 data is shown on the arc’s 25 25
4.2V

ute) the speed detected by a speed sensor connected left side of the arc; Battery 2 data is 1-TEMP-2
BAT2

to the module. The graphic at the top right shows (in shown on the arc’s right side -20
-020°C -020°C
-20
3.0V
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

milliampere hours) the remaining charge of the con-
nected battery.
Notice
To correctly display the data, the relevant number
of propellers and the battery charge information
must be entered beforehand in the FUNCTION
submenu Telemetry.
The graphic at the bottom left shows (in volts) the
current voltage of the battery connected to the mod-
ule. The graphic at the bottom right shows (in amps)
the momentary flow of current. The graph along the
right edge of the display shows (in meters) the present
height relative to the location.
2. Display
At the top edge of the screen, the m/ s and m/3 s
lines show (in meters per second and meters per ev-
ery three seconds) the current ascent/descent of the
model.
The two graphics to the left show the current voltage
measured by the temperature and voltage sensors
QUA Signal quality (in percent)
FUEL Fuel level/tank display
ml Fuel consumption (in milliliters)
1-TEMP-2 Sensor 1 temperature is shown on the
arc’s left side; Sensor 2 temperature is
shown on the arc’s right side
BAT1 Cell voltage of cells 1 - max. 6
ALT Current altitude
- available only with model 33611
m/s Ascent/descent (in meters per second)
- available only with model 33611
m/3s Ascent/descent (in meters per three
seconds)
- available only with model 33611
VOLT Current voltage of the battery con-
nected to the module
AMP Momentary current (in amps)
Press NEXT to switch between screen displays.
These two screens display the data of an Electric Air
Module connected to the receiver (No. 33620). Fur-
ther information on the modules can be found in the
Appendix (page 234) and on the Internet at  www.
graupnerusa.com.
Depending on the configuration of the module with
additional sensors, the following data can be perma-
nently shown on the display:
1. Display
At the top edge of the screen, the QUA line shows
(in percent) the quality of the signal coming from the
transmitter. Directly below the QUA line is the m/ s
and m/3 s line, showing (in meters per second and
meters per every three seconds) the current ascent/
descent of the model.
The graph along the right edge of the display shows
(in meters) the present height relative to the location.
The central graphic shows the current voltage of the
connected battery. The scale to the left shows the mo-
mentary CURRENT in amps, and the scale to the right
Telemetry data display 227
shows the momentary CHARGE of the power source BAT1-BAT2 Cell voltage of cells 1 - max. 14 GPS
connected to the module at the battery connection.
L = Balance port 1 BACK NEXT QUA 100 DIST 00000m

Notice H = Balance port 2 N 000°00 0000 000 W 000°00 0000

To correctly display the data, the battery charge m/s 200 m/3s

VARIO 
information must be entered beforehand in the 100 300 0000m
FUNCTION submenu Telemetry. BACK NEXT QUA 100 MAX 0000m
SPEED
270.0 270.0 270.0 000km/h

2. Display 000.0 0 400 000 ALT

The two graphics to the left show the current voltage m/s m/3s m/10s
-0001m This display  shows the data from a GPS module with
measured by the temperature and voltage sensors an integrated Vario module connected to the receiver
(No. 33612 and 33613) connected to the model from -270.0 -270.0 -270.0 (No. 33600).
up to two batteries (BAT-1 and BAT-2). They also show -000.5 +000.1 000.0 MIN -0002m In addition to the current position data and model
the corresponding temperature: the arc’s left side This screen displays the data from a  Vario mod- speed in the center of the display, the current height
shows sensor 1 data and the arc’s right side shows ule connected to the receiver (No. 33601). is displayed in relation to the starting location along
sensor 2 data. with the ascent and descent of the module in m/ s and
The bar graph in the top right of the display shows the Value Explanation m/3 s; the current reception as well as the distance
current cell voltages of the (max.) 7-cell battery pack QUA Signal package quality (in percent) of from the starting location are also shown.
connected to balancer port 1 (L) and port 2 (H). data sent from the transmitter arriving
Value Explanation
at the receiver
Value Explanation QUA Signal package quality (in percent) of
MAX Maximum level (in meters) relative to
QUA Signal package quality (in percent) of data sent from the transmitter arriving
the starting location
data sent from the transmitter arriving at the receiver
at the receiver MIN Maximum altitude (in meters) below the
DIST Distance (in meters)
starting location
m/s Ascent/descent (in meters per second) N North/South coordinates in degrees,
m/s Ascent/descent (in meters per second)
m/3s Ascent/descent (in meters per three minutes and seconds (dd°mm ssss)
seconds) m/3s Ascent/descent (in meters per three
W West/East coordinates in degrees, min-
seconds)
A Actual current utes and seconds (dd°mm ssss)
m/10s Ascent/descent (in meters per ten
V Actual voltage m/s Ascent/descent (in meters per second)
seconds)
mAh Battery capacity (in milliampere hours) m/3s Ascent/descent (in meters per three
ALT Current altitude seconds)
1-BAT-2 Battery 1 data is shown on the arc’s km/h Above-ground speed (in kilometers per
left side of the arc; Battery 2 data is hour) calculated by the GPS system
shown on the arc’s right side ALT Current altitude relative to starting
1-TEMP-2 Sensor 1 temperature is shown on the location
arc’s left side; Sensor 2 temperature is
shown on the arc’s right side
228 Telemetry data display
Notice cur- In Celsius: ALT Current altitude relative to starting
If the telemetry connection is interrupted for lon- TEMP- Left side: current controller tempera- location
ger than three seconds (and if the transmitter is max ture DIR Direction of movement
not switched off), the last successfully transmit-
Right side: maximum controller tem- CUR Momentary current (in amps)
ted GPS coordinates are saved in the transmitter’s flash
perature since the device has been
memory drive. This saved data can be read on the GPS m Distance (in meters) from the starting
switched on
display using the transmitter control buttons by going location calculated by the GPS system
back to the main display or navigating to the GPS dis- cur-RPM- In revolutions per minute:
000 Position (in angular degrees) relative to
play menu. max Left side: current motor speed
the starting location calculated by the
Right side: maximum motor speed GPS system
ESC (Electronic Speed Controller) since the device has been switched on
Messages from the microcopter sensor are displayed
cur-AMP- In amps:
BACK NEXT QUA 100 CAPACITY in the bottom line of the display.
30.0 70 00000mAh max Left side: Momentary current
60000 Right side: maximum current since the
0
cur-VOLT-min
00.0V 00.0V
0 -20
cur-TEMP-max
-020°C -020°C
-20 device has been switched on
30000

cur-RPM-max cur-AMP-max  Microcopter Display

0 0
0
000000rpm 000000rpm 000.0A 000.0A
BACK NEXT R - 58dB
This display shows the data from a HoTT compatible VOLT 00.0V ALT 0000m
brushless controller connected to the receiver with in- TIME 00:00 DIR 000
tegrated telemetry. mAh 0000 CUR 000.0A
The display shows the current and maximum electri- 00 00000m
cal values of the drive, the current and maximum tem- 000kmh 000
perature of the controller, and the current and maxi-
mum speed of the motor connected to the controller.
This screen displays the data of a HoTT-compatible
Value Explanation microcopter. The display screen appears after the
QUA Signal package quality (in percent) of electric air, Vario and GPS module screens.
data sent from the transmitter arriving Value Explanation
at the receiver
VOLT Actual voltage
cur-VOLT- In volts:
min Time Time device has been active
Left side: actual input voltage
Right side: lowest input voltage since mAh Battery charge used since the device
the device has been switched on has been turned on
00 Satellite position number
km/h Above-ground speed (in kilometers per
hour) calculated by the GPS system

Telemetry data display 229

 Programming Example
Phase-Specific Flaps Trimming
The following example shows how to correct the Back out and navigate to the FUNCTION submenu Individually setting mixing directions allows for con-
trimming of the phase-specific (and recallable) flaps Prog.MIX. trasting and parallel mixing directions for each flap
trimming through only one control element in all the pair:
Prog.MIX
phases.
To understand this programming example make sure: Bring up the desired phase. BACK THERMAL Prog.MIX SERVO
CH6 >> CH2 TRIM ON
individual menu descriptions are read and under- Program the mixer numbers into the phase according
ACT ON CTL ON
stood, be familiar with basic transmitter use, perform to the following schema:
A +050% B +050% INC
the fixed-wing Receiver Configuration according to • Left/Right Ailerons:
OFFSET X 000% RES
the instructions (page 32), completely program the CH6 >> CH2
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
model into the transmitter, mechanically adjust the CH6 >> CH5
SYM OFF
controls and understand the correct lateral deflec- • Single Left/Right Flaps Pair:
tion of all rudders. It helps, but does not hinder, if the CH6 >> CH6 BACK THERMAL Prog.MIX SERVO
model has already performed test flights and received
CH6 >> CH7 CH6 >> CH5 TRIM ON
the resulting adjustments.
• Second Left/Right Flaps Pair: ACT ON CTL ON
Programming CH6 >> CH9 A –050% B –050% INC

Turn on the transmitter and start programming the CH6 >> CH10 OFFSET X 000% RES

flaps positions in the BASE submenu Trim Step. For a model type with 2AILE 2FLAPS, reference the OFFSET Y 000% DEC

Trim Step “THERMAL” display example as follows: SYM OFF

BACK THERMAL Prog.MIX SERVO In both cases, the trimming distance (max. 37.5% at
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO
ACT MST SLV SET 125% admixture) is determined according to the mix-
CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
1. ON CH 6 >> CH 2 >> NEXT ing proportion:
STEP 04 04 04 04 INC
2. ON CH 6 >> CH 5 >>
POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES BACK THERMAL Prog.MIX SERVO
3. ON CH 6 >> CH 6 >>
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC CH6 >> CH2 TRIM ON
4. ON CH 6 >> CH 7 >>
D.TRIM 1 NONE AUTO TRIM INH SET ACT ON CTL ON
5. ON CH 6 >> CH 3 >>
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON A +050% B +050% INC

The mixing direction of the individual mixer pairs may OFFSET X 000% RES
In one of the two D.TRIM lines press to highlight blue
need to be set individually, depending on the wing OFFSET Y 000% DEC
the  NONE | button. Press the  INC  or  DEC  buttons
servos installation situation and the desired operating SYM OFF
or the arrow keys ( pq ) to select CH6:
direction of the selected digital trim button.
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO BACK THERMAL Prog.MIX SERVO

CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW CH6 >> CH5 TRIM ON

STEP 04 04 04 04 INC ACT ON CTL ON

POS 000% 000% 000% 000% RES A –050% B –050% INC

SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC OFFSET X 000% RES

D.TRIM 1 CH 6 AUTO TRIM INH SET OFFSET Y 000% DEC

D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON SYM OFF

230 Programming example - Flaps trimming

Continue to set all flaps in each phase in the same
manner.
Lastly, determine the proportional entrainment of the
elevator via the mixing value and the mixing direction
of the mixer CH6 >> CH3, as shown below:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
CH6 >> CH3 TRIM ON
ACT ON CTL ON
A +025% B +025% INC
OFFSET X 000% RES
OFFSET Y 000% DEC

SYM OFF

Programming example - Flaps trimming 231

 Programming Example
Phase-Specific Pitch Trimming
The following example shows how to correct the Prog.MIX
trimming of the phase-specific (and recallable) pitch Bring up the desired phase.
trimming through only one control element in all the Create a mixer function CH11 >> CH1 in any desired
phases. phase:
To understand this programming example make sure:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
individual menu descriptions are read and under-
CH 11 >> CH 1
stood, be familiar with basic transmitter use, perform
the fixed-wing Receiver Configuration according to
the instructions (page 31), completely program the CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CLR

model into the transmitter, mechanically adjust the CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8

controls and understand the correct lateral deflec- CH 9 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12

tion of all rudders. It helps, but does not hinder, if the

model has already performed test flights and received
On the setting side of the mixer(s), define a symmetri-
the resulting adjustments.
cal mixing proportion. In the example below, the pro-
portion is 25 %:
Programming BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
To start adjusting pitch trimming, open the BASE sub- CH11 >> CH1 TRIM ON
menu Trim Step and assign a digital trim button. ACT ON CTL ON
A +025% B +025% INC
Trim Step
OFFSET X 000% RES
In the example below, the control channel CH11
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
is normally unassigned in helicopter models. In
SYM ON
one of the two D.TRIM lines press to highlight blue
the   NONE  | button. Press the   INC  or   DEC  but- Note that the operating direction of the digital trim
tons or the arrow keys ( pq ) to select CH11: button from the mixing direction and the trimming
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO distance (max. 37.5% at 125% admixture) are deter-
CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW mined proportionally from the adjusted mixing ratio.
STEP 04 04 04 04 INC The D.TRIM1 button used in this example acts equally
POS 00% 00% 00% 00% RES on all available pitch servos without influencing the
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC throttle servo due to internal coupling.
D.TRIM 1 CH 11 AUTO TRIM INH SET
D.TRIM 2 NONE CTL ON

Back out and navigate to the FUNCTION submenu

Prog.MIX.

232 Programming example - Trimming an rpm presetting

 Programming example
Phase-Specific Trimming: RPM Setting for CH6 Governor
After programming the speed setting of the governor, Prog.MIX
use this option for additional programming via one of Bring up the desired phase.
the two digital trim buttons to trim. Trimming during Create a same-channel mixer function CH6 >> CH6 in
flight is possible. any desired phase:
To understand this programming example make sure:
BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
individual menu descriptions are read and under-
CH 6 CH 6
stood, be familiar with basic transmitter use, perform >>

the fixed-wing Receiver Configuration according to

the instructions (page 31), completely program the CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CLR

model into the transmitter, mechanically adjust the CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8

controls and understand the correct lateral deflec- CH 9 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12

tion of all rudders. It helps, but does not hinder, if the

model has already performed test flights and received
On the setting side of the mixer(s), define a symmetri-
the resulting adjustments.
cal mixing proportion. In the example below, the pro-
Programming portion is 50%:
To start adjusting this setting, open the BASE sub- BACK PHASE 1 Prog.MIX SERVO
menu Trim Step and assign a digital trim button. CH6 >> CH6 TRIM ON

Trim Step ACT ON CTL ON

A +050% B +050% INC
In the example below, D.TRIM 2 is being programmed
OFFSET X 000% RES
with the throttle control channel CH6:
OFFSET Y 000% DEC
BACK PHASE 1 Trim Step SERVO SYM ON
CO T1 T2 T3 T4 VIEW
STEP 04 04 04 04 INC Note that the operating direction of the digital trim
POS 00% 00% 00% 00% RES button from the mixing direction and the trimming
SET 000% 000% 000% 000% DEC distance (max. 37.5% at 125% admixture) are deter-
D.TRIM 1 CH 11 AUTO TRIM INH SET
mined proportionally from the adjusted mixing ratio.
D.TRIM 2 CH 6 CTL ON

Back out and navigate to the FUNCTION submenu

Prog.MIX.

Programming example - Trimming an rpm presetting 233

Appendix
PRX (Receiver Power)
No. 4136
Highly developed, stabilized receiver power supply with intelligent
power management.
The unit offers a stabilized and adjustable receiver power supply to
further enhance the reliability of the power supply. Compatible with
different receiver batteries for uncomplicated, wide-ranging use. If
the battery voltage fails during operation, this event is saved and
displayed to help prevent the use of a receiver battery (which is too
small), or to prevent battery failure.
• For operation with one or two receiver batteries (simultaneous
discharge when two batteries are used).
• Appropriate for a 5- or 6-cell NiMH battery, or 2-cell LiPo or LiFe
battery Graupner/JR, G3,5, G2 and BEC plug-in systems.
• Three adjustable levels for the output voltage to supply the re-
ceiver (5.1 V / 5.5 V / 5.9 V).
• Two ultrabright LEDs separately display the charge of battery 1
and battery 2.
• Integrated high-quality On/Off switch
• High-current resistant design
• Flatter switch and LED construction not to influence the charac-
teristics and the optic of the model
• Flatter design of the fastening brackets, LEDs and switches for
easy installation with an accompanying drilling template.
234 Appendix
Graupner HoTT GPS/Vario Module
No. 33600
Vario with altitude signals and  five tones for ascending and de-
scending, an integrated GPS with  distance measurement,  travel
measurement, speed display, and flight direction/coordinates dis-
play.
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. alti-
tude, speed of ascent and descent in two levels
• Altitude display and storage of min. and max. altitude.
• Settable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-
stant
• Settable repeated warning time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min., once
• The Vario sensor can be connected directly to the telemetry in-
put of the receiver.
Technical data for the Vario:
• Altitude measurement: -500 m to +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Vario sensitivity: programmable 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s,
3 m/s pro tone
• Average calculation: programmable 4 - 20 measurements per
measured value
Vario Module Graupner HoTT
No. 33601
Vario with altitude signals and 5 tones for ascending and descend-
ing, altitude display and storage of min. and max. altitude.
• Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. alti-
tude, speed of ascent and descent in two levels
• Settable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-
stant
• Settable repeated warning time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min., once
• The Vario sensor can be connected directly to the telemetry in-
put of the receiver.
Technical Data
• Altitude measurement: -500 m to +3000 m
• Resolution: 0.1 m
• Vario sensitivity: programmable 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s,
3 m/s pro tone
• Average calculation: programmable 4 - 20 measurements per
measured value
Graupner HoTT General Engine Module
No. 33610
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with gas
engine or electric motor
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. volt-
age
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Programmable current limiting
• Current limiting with shunt resistors 2 x 1 mOhm parallel = 0.5
mOhm
• Rotational speed measurement and warning thresholds for min.
and max. rotational speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25 % increments
(after software update).
• Settable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-
stant
• Settable repeated warning time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min., once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120°C or 200°C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a two-
blade propeller
• 1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulation
input, 1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed reg-
ulation
• 1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A
(short-term 1 sec 60 A) and up to 30 V
• 1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 6S lithium batteries (LiPo, lithium
ion, LiFe), see www.graupnerusa.com for the related items
Graupner HoTT General Air Module
No. 33611
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with gas
engine or electric motor
• Vario with altitude signals and ascent and descent signals, and
additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude,
rate of ascent and descent in two stages
• Altitude display (-500 to +3000 m) and storage of the min. and
max. altitude.
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. volt-
age
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Rotational speed measurement with rotational speed regulation
(programmable) and warning thresholds for min. and max. rota-
tional speed
• Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments
• Settable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-
stant
• Settable repeated warning time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min., once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120°C or 200°C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a two-
blade propeller
• 1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulation
input, 1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed reg-
ulation
• 1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A
(short-term 1 sec 60 A) and up to 30 V
• etc., see www.graupnerusa.com for the related items
Graupner HoTT Electric Air Module
No. 33620
General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with elec-
tric motor
• Vario with altitude signals and ascent and descent signals, and
additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude,
rate of ascent and descent in two stages
• Altitude display (-500 to +3000 m) and storage of the min. and
max. altitude.
• 2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature
• Single cell measurement 2 - 14 s with warning thresholds for
min. voltage
• Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresh-
olds for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current
• Settable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-
stant
• Settable repeated warning time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min., once
• 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120°C or 200°C and voltage
measurement up to 80 V DC
• 1x speed controller input, 1x speed controller output for single
cell undervoltage correction
• 1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 150 A
(short -term 1 sec 320 A) and up to 60 V
• 1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 14S lithium batteries (LiPo, lith-
ium ion, LiFe)
• 1x Telemetry connection for receiver
Appendix 235
Graupner HoTT RPM Magnetic Sensor Graupner HoTT Smart-Box Graupner HoTT USB Interface
No. 33616 No. 33700 No. 7168.6

For connecting to the General Engine (No. 33610) or General Air
Module (No. 33611).
Select the number of blades in the module's Telemetry menu.
Graupner HoTT RPM optical sensor
No. 33615
For connecting to the General Engine (No. 33610) or General Air
Module (No. 33611).
Select the number of blades in the module's Telemetry menu.
Wide-ranging functions combined into one device make the SMART This adapter cable is required together with the separately avail-
BOX your future smart companion. Whether it comes to displaying able USB interface (order No. 7168.6), for updating receivers and
real-time telemetry data or making settings on your HoTT system, sensors.
8 x 21 characters on a large display enable easy use. An integrated
buzzer that emits an acoustic signal and warning tone enhances
the flexible use of the BOX even further.
Using the accompanying installation set, the device can be mount-
ed on brackets of the transmitter and is thus optimally positioned to
enable the reading of real-time telemetry data even while controlling
your model.
The user-installed updates ensures that the SMART BOX always
has the latest software and can be safely expanded with future
functions.
• Transmitter voltage display with • Country setting
adjustable warning threshold
• Range test • Signal quality
• Receiver temperature • Receiver voltage
• Servo reversal • Servo neutral position
• Servo travel • Cycle time Graupner HoTT Adapter Cable
• Channel switching • Fail-Safe settings No. 7168.6S
• Mixer settings • Servo test
This adapter cable is required together with the separately available
Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H) USB interface (No. 7168.6), for updating receivers and sensors.
Weight: approx. 55g The mz-24 HoTT Pro transmitter can be updated directly with the
USB cable included in the delivery of the interface.

236 Appendix
Personal notes 237
238 Personal notes
Personal notes 239
GRAUPNER USA Subject to modification and different modes of deliv- Although we have carefully checked the information contained
3941 PARK DRIVE ST 20-571 ery. Sources are indicated. No liability can be accept- in these instructions and checked that it is correct, we can ac-
EL DORADO HILLS 95762 ed for printing errors. cept no liability of any kind for mistakes, incomplete informa-
UNITED STATES tion and printing errors. Graupner|SJ GmbH retains the right to
PN.UG-01 (V2016/mg)
change the aforementioned features of the hardware and soft-
http://www.graupnerusa.com
ware at any time without prior notice.